Preparing your form...

JavaScript is required to use all interactive features on TheWholeTest.

Please enable JavaScript in your browser settings to attempt mock tests, view detailed answer explanations, and track your progress.

|Commerce · November 2021

UGC NET Commerce November 2021 Question PaperPaper 1 & Paper 2 with Answer Key

The complete UGC NET November 2021 question paper for Commerce, covering Paper 1 (General Aptitude) and Paper 2 (Commerce). Every question below is shown with its options and the correct answer, and a detailed explanation you can unlock by signing in. All 450 questions are free to practise.

UGC NET November 2021 at a glance

Exam	UGC NET November 2021
Papers	Paper 1 (General Aptitude) and Paper 2 (Commerce)
Exam date(s)	November 25, 2021 · November 26, 2021
Shift(s)	Shift 1 · Shift 2
Paper 1 questions	150 questions · 60 minutes · 100 marks
Paper 2 questions	300 questions · 120 minutes · 200 marks
Total	450 questions
Marking scheme	+2 per correct answer · No negative marking

Paper 1

General Aptitude

UGC NET November 2021 · Shift 1 · Commerce sitting

50 questions60 min100 marks

Practice Now

Paper 2

Commerce

UGC NET November 2021 · Shift 1

100 questions120 min200 marks

Practice Now

Paper 1

General Aptitude

UGC NET November 2021 · Shift 1 · Commerce sitting

50 questions60 min100 marks

Practice Now

Paper 2

Commerce

UGC NET November 2021 · Shift 1

100 questions120 min200 marks

Practice Now

Paper 1

General Aptitude

UGC NET November 2021 · Shift 2 · Commerce sitting

50 questions60 min100 marks

Practice Now

Paper 2

Commerce

UGC NET November 2021 · Shift 2

100 questions120 min200 marks

Practice Now

Paper 1 — General Aptitude · November 25, 2021 · Shift 1

Attempt this paper

50 questions with the answer key and explanations.

Question 1
The difference between average expenditure on 'Taxes' and average expenditure on 'Interest on Loan' is:
Given below is a table that shows the expenditure of a company (in Lakh Rupees) per annum over the given years:

Year Salary Travel Hospitality Interest on Loans Taxes
2016 330 70 30 28 80
2017 380 65 33 31 87
2018 420 72 35 33 91
2019 450 75 40 36 94
2020 480 84 43 39 97
1. A54.8
2. B55.6
3. C56.4
4. D57.2
Answer: (C) 56.4
Explanation
Average expenditure on Taxes minus average expenditure on Interest on Loans across 2016–2020 equals 56.4 lakh rupees.

Sum of Taxes = 80 + 87 + 91 + 94 + 97 = 449 lakh rupees
Average Taxes = 449 / 5 = 89.8 lakh rupees

Sum of Interest on Loans = 28 + 31 + 33 + 36 + 39 = 167 lakh rupees
Average Interest on Loans = 167 / 5 = 33.4 lakh rupees

Difference = 89.8 - 33.4 = 56.4 lakh rupees.

A. 54.8 — results from miscalculating the interest sum as 175 instead of 167.

B. 55.6 — results from omitting the 2020 increase in tax expenditure.

C. 56.4 — correct. Exactly matches the difference between the five-year averages.

D. 57.2 — results from an arithmetic error when summing the tax column.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 2
What is the average expenditure on Travel and Hospitality during 2016 to 2020?
Given below is a table that shows the expenditure of a company (in Lakh Rupees) per annum over the given years:

Year Salary Travel Hospitality Interest on Loans Taxes
2016 330 70 30 28 80
2017 380 65 33 31 87
2018 420 72 35 33 91
2019 450 75 40 36 94
2020 480 84 43 39 97
1. A108.3
2. B108.7
3. C109.4
4. D110.5
Answer: (C) 109.4
Explanation
The combined average expenditure on Travel and Hospitality over the five-year period is 109.4 lakh rupees.

Total Travel expenditure = 70 + 65 + 72 + 75 + 84 = 366 lakh rupees
Total Hospitality expenditure = 30 + 33 + 35 + 40 + 43 = 181 lakh rupees
Combined total = 366 + 181 = 547 lakh rupees

Average expenditure = 547 / 5 = 109.4 lakh rupees.

A. 108.3 — results from dividing by 5 after miscalculating the combined sum as 541.5.

B. 108.7 — results from taking 366 / 5 and 181 / 5 with incorrect rounding.

C. 109.4 — correct. 547 divided by 5 equals 109.4.

D. 110.5 — results from an arithmetic addition slip in hospitality totals.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 3
Increase of expenditure from 2019 to 2020 in percentage is:
Given below is a table that shows the expenditure of a company (in Lakh Rupees) per annum over the given years:

Year Salary Travel Hospitality Interest on Loans Taxes
2016 330 70 30 28 80
2017 380 65 33 31 87
2018 420 72 35 33 91
2019 450 75 40 36 94
2020 480 84 43 39 97
1. A6.9
2. B5.3
3. C5.8
4. D7.2
Answer: (A) 6.9
Explanation
Total company expenditure increased from 695 lakh rupees in 2019 to 743 lakh rupees in 2020, representing a 6.9% rise.

Total expenditure in 2019:
450 + 75 + 40 + 36 + 94 = 695 lakh rupees

Total expenditure in 2020:
480 + 84 + 43 + 39 + 97 = 743 lakh rupees

Absolute increase = 743 - 695 = 48 lakh rupees
Percentage increase = (48 / 695) * 100 = 6.906% ≈ 6.9%.

A. 6.9 — correct. Represents 48 / 695 rounded to one decimal place.

B. 5.3 — results from dividing the increase by 2020 total expenditure instead of 2019 baseline.

C. 5.8 — results from considering salary increase alone instead of total company expenditure.

D. 7.2 — results from miscalculating the 2019 sum as 665.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 4
In which year is the Travel expenditure (as a percentage) minimum?
Given below is a table that shows the expenditure of a company (in Lakh Rupees) per annum over the given years:

Year Salary Travel Hospitality Interest on Loans Taxes
2016 330 70 30 28 80
2017 380 65 33 31 87
2018 420 72 35 33 91
2019 450 75 40 36 94
2020 480 84 43 39 97
1. A2017
2. B2018
3. C2019
4. D2020
Answer: (C) 2019
Explanation
Travel expenditure as a proportion of total expenditure was lowest in 2019 at 10.79%.

Annual travel expenditure percentages:

2016: 70 / 538 = 13.01%

2017: 65 / 596 = 10.91%

2018: 72 / 651 = 11.06%

2019: 75 / 695 = 10.79%

2020: 84 / 743 = 11.31%

Comparing the values:

A. 2017 — 10.91% is higher than 2019's 10.79%.

B. 2018 — 11.06% is higher than 2019's 10.79%.

C. 2019 — correct. Travel accounts for only 10.79% of total spending, the lowest share across all years.

D. 2020 — 11.31% reflects an increase in travel spending share.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 5
In which year is the ratio of Salary to Hospitality maximum?
Given below is a table that shows the expenditure of a company (in Lakh Rupees) per annum over the given years:

Year Salary Travel Hospitality Interest on Loans Taxes
2016 330 70 30 28 80
2017 380 65 33 31 87
2018 420 72 35 33 91
2019 450 75 40 36 94
2020 480 84 43 39 97
1. A2017
2. B2018
3. C2019
4. D2020
Answer: (B) 2018
Explanation
The ratio of Salary to Hospitality reached its highest value of 12.0 in the year 2018.

Calculating the ratio for each option year:

2017: 380 / 33 = 11.52

2018: 420 / 35 = 12.00

2019: 450 / 40 = 11.25

2020: 480 / 43 = 11.16

Evaluating the options:

A. 2017 — ratio is 11.52, lower than 2018.

B. 2018 — correct. 420 divided by 35 yields 12.00, the maximum ratio.

C. 2019 — ratio is 11.25, lower than 2018.

D. 2020 — ratio is 11.16, the lowest among the four years.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 6
The permissible limit for Arsenic in drinking water, as per Indian Standards [IS:10500] is
1. A0.05 mg/L
2. B0.5 mg/L
3. C1.0 mg/L
4. D2.0 mg/L
Answer: (A) 0.05 mg/L
Explanation
Under Indian Standard IS:10500 for drinking water specifications, the permissible limit for arsenic in the absence of an alternative source is 0.05 mg/L (while the acceptable limit is 0.01 mg/L).

A. 0.05 mg/L — correct. Designated as the maximum permissible limit under IS:10500 when no alternative water source exists.

B. 0.5 mg/L — ten times higher than the permissible limit, posing extreme toxicity risks.

C. 1.0 mg/L — dangerously elevated concentration exceeding safe potable water thresholds.

D. 2.0 mg/L — far above any national or international drinking water standard.
Sign in to read the full explanation

Question 7

Match List I with List II.

List I	List II
A. NIEPA	I. Promotion of quality in technical education
B. NAAC	II. To promote research in social sciences
C. AICTE	III. Planning and management of education
D. ICSSR	IV. Accreditation of higher education institutions

AA - III, B - IV, C - I, D - II
BA - III, B - IV, C - II, D - I
CA - IV, B - II, C - I, D - III
DA - IV, B - III, C - II, D - I

Answer: (A) A - III, B - IV, C - I, D - II

Explanation

Each higher education body matches its designated mandate:
A-III, B-IV, C-I, D-II

A. NIEPA (III) — National Institute of Educational Planning and Administration specializes in capacity building, planning, and management of education.
B. NAAC (IV) — National Assessment and Accreditation Council assesses and accredits higher education institutions across India.
C. AICTE (I) — All India Council for Technical Education regulates and promotes quality in technical and management education.
D. ICSSR (II) — Indian Council of Social Science Research provides grants and promotes research in social science disciplines.

Question 8
Name the fallacy committed in the statements below

"All text books are books intended for careful study.
Some reference books are books intended for careful study.
Therefore, some reference books are text books."

Choose the correct answer from the options given below
1. AAffirmative conclusion from Negative Premise
2. BExclusive Premises
3. CExistential Fallacy
4. DUndistributed Middle
Answer: (D) Undistributed Middle
Explanation
The syllogism commits the Fallacy of the Undistributed Middle because the middle term is not distributed in either premise.

Middle term: "books intended for careful study"

In the major premise ("All text books are books intended for careful study"), it serves as the predicate of an affirmative universal proposition (A), where the predicate is undistributed.

In the minor premise ("Some reference books are books intended for careful study"), it serves as the predicate of a particular affirmative proposition (I), where neither subject nor predicate is distributed.

Because the middle term fails to be distributed at least once, no valid connection between reference books and text books can be established.

A. Affirmative conclusion from Negative Premise — neither premise is negative.

B. Exclusive Premises — occurs when both premises are negative, which is not the case here.

C. Existential Fallacy — occurs when a particular conclusion is drawn from two universal premises.

D. Undistributed Middle — correct. The middle term remains undistributed across both premises.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 9
The basic free version of ZOOM web meeting platform allows an online class to be conducted for how many minutes?
1. A30 minutes
2. B40 minutes
3. C50 minutes
4. D60 minutes
Answer: (B) 40 minutes
Explanation
Zoom's basic free tier enforces a strict 40-minute limit on group meetings containing three or more participants.

A. 30 minutes — lower than Zoom's 40-minute cutoff.

B. 40 minutes — correct. The standard maximum session length for free tier group meetings on Zoom.

C. 50 minutes — exceeds the free tier cutoff without an upgraded license.

D. 60 minutes — common limit for Google Meet free group calls, not Zoom.
Sign in to read the full explanation

Question 10

Match List I with List II.

List I (Concept of power Communication)	List II (Description of feature)
A. Legitimate power	I. Specialized knowledge
B. Referent power	II. By virtue of position
C. Reward power	III. When others feel to be like you
D. Expert power	IV. Control over what others seek

AA - I, B - II, C - III, D - IV
BA - II, B - III, C - IV, D - I
CA - III, B - IV, C - I, D - II
DA - IV, B - I, C - II, D - III

Answer: (B) A - II, B - III, C - IV, D - I

Explanation

French and Raven's bases of social power align with their defining characteristics:
A-II, B-III, C-IV, D-I

A. Legitimate power (II) — stems from formal authority or holding an official position in an organization.
B. Referent power (III) — arises from interpersonal attraction, charisma, and the desire of others to identify with or emulate the leader.
C. Reward power (IV) — based on control over tangible or intangible benefits that subordinates seek and value.
D. Expert power (I) — grounded in possessing specialized knowledge, technical skills, or proven expertise.

Question 11
Sometimes, subjects who know that they are in a control group may work hard to excel against the experimental group. Such a phenomenon is known as
1. ACompensatory Rivalry
2. BControlled Competition
3. CInspirational Influence
4. DMotivational Contest
Answer: (A) Compensatory Rivalry
Explanation
Compensatory rivalry (also known as the John Henry effect) describes a threat to internal validity where control group subjects realize their status and exert extra effort to outperform the experimental group.

A. Compensatory Rivalry — correct. The recognized methodological term for competitive performance by untreated control subjects.

B. Controlled Competition — a general phrase, not a recognized internal validity bias.

C. Inspirational Influence — a leadership tactic in transformational leadership theory.

D. Motivational Contest — an informal term with no formal experimental research definition.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 12
According to Red list, the percentage of threatened mammals in the world is about
1. A20%
2. B25%
3. C40%
4. D45%
Answer: (B) 25%
Explanation
According to the International Union for Conservation of Nature (IUCN) Red List, approximately 25% (one in four) of all assessed mammal species globally are threatened with extinction.

A. 20% — underestimates the proportion of threatened mammal species.

B. 25% — correct. Aligns with the IUCN Red List global assessment for mammals.

C. 40% — corresponds to the threatened proportion for amphibians, not mammals.

D. 45% — significantly overstates mammal threat levels.
Sign in to read the full explanation

Question 13

With respect to a music teacher who wishes to use a computer to help him to create training material, match List I with List II.

List I (Training Material)	List II (File Format)
A. Printed copies of instructions on how to play his music	I. MP3
B. Sound files of him playing his music	II. DOC
C. Video files of him playing his music	III. JPEG
D. Images of the instruments he teaches	IV. AVI

AA - I, B - II, C - III, D - IV
BA - II, B - I, C - III, D - IV
CA - II, B - I, C - IV, D - III
DA - III, B - I, C - IV, D - II

Answer: (C) A - II, B - I, C - IV, D - III

Explanation

Each instructional medium maps to its standard digital file extension:
A-II, B-I, C-IV, D-III

A. Printed copies of instructions (II) — text and word processing documents use the DOC format.
B. Sound files (I) — compressed audio recordings use the MP3 format.
C. Video files (IV) — audiovisual media recordings use the AVI container format.
D. Images of instruments (III) — raster photographs and pictures use the JPEG format.

Question 14
How many minutes is it before 12 noon if 48 minutes ago it was three times as many minutes past 9 AM?
1. A33 minutes
2. B40 minutes
3. C43 minutes
4. D43.5 minutes
Answer: (A) 33 minutes
Explanation
Setting up an algebraic equation based on the 180-minute span between 9:00 AM and 12:00 noon gives 33 minutes before 12:00.

Let m be the minutes before 12:00 noon.
Total duration from 9:00 AM to 12:00 noon = 180 minutes.
Current time = 180 - m minutes past 9:00 AM.
Time 48 minutes ago = (180 - m) - 48 = 132 - m minutes past 9:00 AM.

According to the given condition:
132 - m = 3m
4m = 132
m = 33 minutes.

Verification:
At 11:27 AM (33 minutes before 12:00), 48 minutes ago was 10:39 AM.
10:39 AM is 99 minutes past 9:00 AM, which equals 3 * 33 minutes.

A. 33 minutes — correct. Satisfies 132 - m = 3m.

B. 40 minutes — gives 48 minutes ago as 10:32 AM (92 minutes past 9:00), which is not 3 * 40.

C. 43 minutes — fails the three-to-one proportion constraint.

D. 43.5 minutes — arithmetic error resulting from miscalculating the elapsed minutes.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 15
Kigali Amendment to the Montreal Protocol envisages reduction in HFCs consumption by late 2040s to the extent of
1. A50-55%
2. B65-70%
3. C80-85%
4. D90-95%
Answer: (C) 80-85%
Explanation
The Kigali Amendment (adopted in 2016) mandates nations to phase down the production and consumption of hydrofluorocarbons (HFCs) by 80% to 85% by the late 2040s to curb global greenhouse warming.

A. 50-55% — falls short of the target phase-down percentage.

B. 65-70% — intermediate reduction milestone for certain Article 5 group parties, not the final late-2040s goal.

C. 80-85% — correct. The definitive late-2040s reduction commitment established under the amendment.

D. 90-95% — applies to complete phase-out targets for ozone-depleting CFCs/HCFCs, not HFCs.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 16
Which number comes next in this sequence:
1, 1.5, 2.5, 4, ?
1. A5.5
2. B5
3. C6.5
4. D6
Answer: (D) 6
Explanation
The series progresses with first-order differences that increase by 0.5 at each successive step, making the next number 6.

Differences between successive terms:

1.5 - 1.0 = +0.5

2.5 - 1.5 = +1.0

4.0 - 2.5 = +1.5

The increment sequence is 0.5, 1.0, 1.5.
Next difference = 1.5 + 0.5 = +2.0
Next term = 4.0 + 2.0 = 6.0.

A. 5.5 — adds 1.5 again rather than advancing the increment to 2.0.

B. 5 — adds only 1.0 to the preceding term.

C. 6.5 — adds 2.5 rather than 2.0.

D. 6 — correct. Follows the +2.0 step in the difference pattern.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 17
Analytic Induction is a method of
A. Systematic interpretation of events
B. Generating hypothesis
C. Testing hypothesis
D. Freestyle interpretation
E. Testing null hypothesis only

Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. AA, B and E only
2. BA, B and C only
3. CB, C and D only
4. DC, D and E only
Answer: (B) A, B and C only
Explanation
Analytic induction is an iterative qualitative research approach involving systematic interpretation, hypothesis generation, and ongoing empirical testing against new cases:
A, B, and C only

A. Systematic interpretation of events — foundational qualitative observation and data analysis.

B. Generating hypothesis — formulating initial explanatory propositions from observed cases.

C. Testing hypothesis — examining subsequent cases to refine or reformulate the hypothesis until universal fit is attained.

D. Freestyle interpretation — incorrect. Analytic induction requires rigorous case-by-case procedural discipline.

E. Testing null hypothesis only — incorrect. Null hypothesis testing belongs to quantitative inferential statistics, not qualitative analytic induction.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 18
Given below are two statements:

Statement I: A number is divisible by 12 if the number is divisible by both 3 and 4.
Statement II: A number is divisible by 3, if and only if the sum of all the digits of the number is divisible by 6.

In light of the above statements, choose the correct answer from the options given below
1. ABoth Statement I and Statement II are false
2. BBoth Statement I and Statement II are true
3. CStatement I is false but Statement II is true
4. DStatement I is true but Statement II is false
Answer: (D) Statement I is true but Statement II is false
Explanation
Statement I is mathematically true because 3 and 4 are coprime, while Statement II is false because divisibility by 3 requires the sum of digits to be divisible by 3, not 6.

Statement I is true: Since 3 and 4 share no common factors other than 1 (gcd(3,4) = 1) and their product is 12, any integer divisible by both 3 and 4 must be divisible by 12.

Statement II is false: A number is divisible by 3 if and only if the sum of its digits is a multiple of 3. For example, 12 has a digit sum of 1 + 2 = 3, which is divisible by 3 but not 6, yet 12 is divisible by 3.

A. Both false — Statement I is a standard number theory rule.

B. Both true — Statement II imposes an incorrect condition of divisibility by 6.

C. Statement I false but Statement II true — inverts the validity of both statements.

D. Statement I is true but Statement II is false — correct.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 19
Which of the following are determinants in transactional communication?
A. Social context
B. Cultural context
C. Relational context
D. Legal context
E. Delayed context

Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. AA, B and E only
2. BA, B and C only
3. CB, C and D only
4. DC, D and E only
Answer: (B) A, B and C only
Explanation
Transactional communication theory emphasizes that message exchange and shared meaning are shaped by social, cultural, and relational contexts:
A, B, and C only

A. Social context — encompasses social norms, institutional rules, and situational expectations governing interactions.

B. Cultural context — includes the broader belief systems, values, language codes, and worldviews of the communicators.

C. Relational context — reflects the interpersonal history, roles, and relationship dynamics between participants.

D. Legal context — pertains to formal jurisprudence rather than interpersonal communication determinants.

E. Delayed context — refers to asynchronous transmission modes, not contextual determinants of transactional meaning.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 20
The key objective of RUSA is to improve:
A. Access
B. Equity
C. Quality
D. Infrastructure
E. Curriculum

Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. AA, B and E only
2. BA, B and C only
3. CB, C and D only
4. DC, D and E only
Answer: (B) A, B and C only
Explanation
Rashtriya Uchchatar Shiksha Abhiyan (RUSA) was launched by the Ministry of Education as a strategic centrally sponsored scheme built upon three overarching pillars: Access, Equity, and Quality.

A. Access — expanding institutional capacity and increasing the Gross Enrolment Ratio (GER) in higher education.

B. Equity — providing equal educational opportunities to socially disadvantaged groups, women, and underserved regions.

C. Quality — elevating academic standards, faculty competence, and research infrastructure in state universities and colleges.

D & E. Infrastructure and Curriculum — while supported through funding components, the cardinal policy objectives recognized by RUSA are Access, Equity, and Quality (A, B, and C).
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 21
Which one of the following is a disadvantage of using proprietary software rather than open source software?
1. AProprietary software can only be accessed with a password
2. BProprietary software can only be used on proprietary systems
3. CProprietary software can only be used with an Internet connection
4. DProprietary software is usually more expensive
Answer: (D) Proprietary software is usually more expensive
Explanation
Proprietary software requires purchasing commercial licenses and ongoing support contracts, making it considerably more expensive than open source alternatives.

A. Password access only — both open source and proprietary platforms employ password authentication.

B. Proprietary systems only — many proprietary programs run on open source operating systems like Linux and Android.

C. Internet connection only — most proprietary applications operate offline after initial installation.

D. Usually more expensive — correct. High licensing fees, vendor lock-in, and per-user subscription costs represent the primary economic drawback.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 22
Which of the following is NOT a constituent-member of the Indian syllogistic argument?
1. AHetu
2. BSaṁśaya
3. CUdaharana
4. DUpanaya
Answer: (B) Saṁśaya
Explanation
The Nyaya syllogism consists of five constituent members (Pañcāvayava), which do not include Saṁśaya (doubt).

The five members of Nyaya syllogistic inference:

Pratijñā — proposition to be proved

Hetu — statement of reason

Udāharaṇa — universal proposition with an illustrative example

Upanaya — application of the universal rule to the specific case

Nigamana — conclusion drawn from the preceding steps

A. Hetu — the second member (reason).

B. Saṁśaya — correct. Saṁśaya denotes doubt or uncertainty in Nyaya epistemology, not a constituent member of the syllogism.

C. Udaharana — the third member (example with invariable relation).

D. Upanaya — the fourth member (application).
Sign in to read the full explanation

Question 23

Match List I with List II.

List I (Description)	List II (Appropriate Technical Term)
A. Numerical ID for each device on the Internet	I. VOIP
B. Unique ID for a Network Interface Card (NIC)	II. URL
C. Use of the Internet to make phone calls	III. MAC Address
D. Text used by web browsers to locate a web address on the Internet	IV. IP Address

AA - I, B - III, C - IV, D - II
BA - II, B - III, C - I, D - IV
CA - IV, B - III, C - I, D - II
DA - IV, B - III, C - II, D - I

Answer: (C) A - IV, B - III, C - I, D - II

Explanation

Each networking concept pairs directly with its standard technical definition:
A-IV, B-III, C-I, D-II

A. Numerical ID for each device (IV) — Internet Protocol (IP) address uniquely identifies each host on an IP network.
B. Unique ID for a NIC (III) — Media Access Control (MAC) address is the hardware identifier burned into the network interface card.
C. Internet phone calls (I) — Voice over Internet Protocol (VOIP) enables voice transmission over packet-switched IP networks.
D. Text used by browsers (II) — Uniform Resource Locator (URL) specifies the web address and protocol used to retrieve online resources.

Question 24
Statement I: In communication, language ambiguity takes place because of the incorrect use of words.
Statement II: Informal time terms lead to different interpretations.

In light of the above statements, choose the most appropriate answer from the options given below:
1. ABoth Statement I and Statement II are correct
2. BBoth Statement I and Statement II are incorrect
3. CStatement I is correct but Statement II is incorrect
4. DStatement I is incorrect but Statement II is correct
Answer: (A) Both Statement I and Statement II are correct
Explanation
Both statements accurately describe semantic and non-verbal temporal sources of miscommunication:
Both Statement I and Statement II are correct.

Statement I is correct: Language ambiguity occurs when words are selected imprecisely, incorrectly, or have multiple meanings that confuse the receiver (semantic barrier).

Statement II is correct: Informal time terms like "soon", "later", or "shortly" are subjective and lack fixed numerical values, resulting in conflicting interpretations (chronemics barrier).

A. Both correct — correct. Both identify valid causes of communicative ambiguity.

B. Both incorrect — overlooks basic semantic and chronemic communication principles.

C. Statement I correct, Statement II incorrect — wrongly dismisses the ambiguity of informal time markers.

D. Statement I incorrect, Statement II correct — wrongly claims incorrect word usage does not cause ambiguity.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 25
Which of the following statements about internal and external computer memory are true?
A. A portable hard drive is an example of internal memory
B. Magnetic tape is used to store backups of data
C. RAM is an internal memory
D. ROM loses its data when the power is turned off

Choose the correct answer from the options given below
1. AA and C only
2. BA and B only
3. CC and D only
4. DB and C only
Answer: (D) B and C only
Explanation
Magnetic tape is a secondary storage backup medium and RAM is internal primary memory:
B and C only are true.

A is false: A portable hard drive connects externally via USB and is classified as secondary/external storage.

B is true: Magnetic tape provides low-cost, high-capacity sequential storage widely used for archiving and enterprise backups.

C is true: Random Access Memory (RAM) sits directly on the motherboard and acts as primary internal working memory.

D is false: Read Only Memory (ROM) is non-volatile, permanently preserving stored instructions when power is switched off.

A. A and C only — incorrect because statement A is false.

B. A and B only — incorrect because statement A is false.

C. C and D only — incorrect because statement D is false.

D. B and C only — correct.
Sign in to read the full explanation

Question 26

Match List I with List II.

List I (Artifacts)	List II (Description)
A. History	I. Happens when subjects are given similar pre-tests and post-tests
B. Maturation	II. Subjects’ reactions to experimental conditions
C. Testing	III. Occurance of various events during a study
D. Demand characteristics	IV. Biological and psychological characters changing during the course of the study

AA - I, B - II, C - III, D - IV
BA - II, B - III, C - IV, D - I
CA - III, B - IV, C - I, D - II
DA - IV, B - I, C - II, D - III

Answer: (C) A - III, B - IV, C - I, D - II

Explanation

Threats to internal experimental validity in research methodology match their standard definitions:
A-III, B-IV, C-I, D-II

A. History (III) — external events or unplanned environmental occurrences taking place between pre-test and post-test measurements.
B. Maturation (IV) — biological or psychological changes (such as aging, fatigue, or hunger) within subjects over time independent of treatment.
C. Testing (I) — practice or sensitization effects resulting from taking a pre-test prior to the post-test.
D. Demand characteristics (II) — subtle cues in the experimental setup that prompt subjects to alter their reactions to fit expectations.

Question 27
The characteristics of longitudinal studies are:
A. Limited results
B. Do not need heavy investment
C. Provide alternative choices
D. Allow insight into the time order of variables
E. Focuses on individual or institutional developments

Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. AA, B and C only
2. BA, D and E only
3. CB, C and D only
4. DC, D and E only
Answer: (D) C, D and E only
Explanation
Longitudinal research designs track changes over extended periods, providing alternative choices, establishing the temporal ordering of variables, and illuminating developmental trajectories:
C, D, and E only

C. Provide alternative choices — continuous tracking offers comparative empirical pathways for policy and behavioral interventions.

D. Allow insight into the time order of variables — observing subjects over time establishes whether changes in variable X precede changes in variable Y.

E. Focuses on individual or institutional developments — assesses long-term development, growth patterns, and life-course changes.

A & B are incorrect: Longitudinal studies produce extensive (not limited) data and require substantial financial and human investment (contradicting B).
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 28
Which of the following statement/s is/are correct?
A. Yaman crosses a 600 m long road in 5 minutes. His speed is 7.2 km/hr
B. Vinod performs 2/15 of his total journey by train, 9/20 by bus and rest 10 km on cycle. His total journey is 24 km
C. Anita can complete a work in 8 days. She can complete 1/8 fraction of the work in two days

Choose the correct answer from the options given below
1. AA and B only
2. BA and C only
3. CA only
4. DB only
Answer: (A) A and B only
Explanation
Statements A and B are mathematically accurate, while Statement C miscalculates the two-day work fraction:
A and B only are correct.

Evaluation of each statement:

Statement A is correct:
Distance = 600 m = 0.6 km
Time = 5 minutes = 5 / 60 = 1 / 12 hours
Speed = 0.6 / (1 / 12) = 0.6 * 12 = 7.2 km/hr

Statement B is correct:
Let total distance be D.
Fraction by train and bus = 2 / 15 + 9 / 20 = (8 + 27) / 60 = 35 / 60 = 7 / 12.
Remaining fraction on cycle = 1 - 7 / 12 = 5 / 12.
5 / 12 * D = 10 km
D = 10 * (12 / 5) = 24 km.

Statement C is incorrect:
If Anita completes the work in 8 days, her daily rate is 1 / 8.
In 2 days, she completes 2 * (1 / 8) = 2 / 8 = 1 / 4 of the work, not 1 / 8.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 29
The population of a bacteria culture increases at a rate of 4% per annum. There is an additional increase of 1% of the population due to some reason. The percentage increase in the population after two years is, therefore
1. A10.25
2. B10.5
3. C10.75
4. D10
Answer: (A) 10.25
Explanation
The combined annual rate of 5% yields a two-year compound increase of 10.25%.

Calculation:
Effective annual growth rate = 4% + 1% = 5% per annum.
After 2 years, population multiplier = (1 + 0.05)^2 = 1.05^2 = 1.1025.
Percentage increase = (1.1025 - 1) * 100 = 10.25%.

A. 10.25 — correct. Compounding 5% annually over two years gives 10.25%.

B. 10.5 — fails to use compound growth rules.

C. 10.75 — arithmetic error in multiplying 1.05 by itself.

D. 10 — simple addition (5% + 5%) that ignores compounding on the first year's growth.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 30
Identify the correct sequence of BRICS countries in relation to their Sustainable Development Goals Index (from highest to lowest) as per the Sustainable Development Report (2020)
A. China
B. India
C. South Africa
D. Brazil
E. Russian Federation

Choose the correct answer from the options given below
1. AE > A > D > C > B
2. BC > D > E > A > B
3. CC > E > B > D > A
4. DE > D > C > A > B
Answer: (A) E > A > D > C > B
Explanation
In the 2020 Sustainable Development Report, the overall SDG Index scores place the Russian Federation first and India fifth among the BRICS economies:
E > A > D > C > B

2020 BRICS SDG Index scores:

Russian Federation (E) — 75.5

China (A) — 73.9

Brazil (D) — 71.8

South Africa (C) — 63.7

India (B) — 61.9

A. E > A > D > C > B — correct. Matches the descending order of reported 2020 SDG Index scores.

B. C > D > E > A > B — incorrectly places South Africa above Russia and China.

C. C > E > B > D > A — misorders all five nations.

D. E > D > C > A > B — places Brazil and South Africa ahead of China.
Sign in to read the full explanation

Question 31

Match List I with List II.

List I (Content Area)	List II (Integrating Technology Application)
A. Reading /Language Arts	I. Software programs to develop basic reading skills
B. Mathematics	II. Simulations to explore distant places and times
C. Science	III. Graphing calculations to illustrate abstract or hard – to – visualize relationships
D. Social Studies	IV. Simulations to illustrate complex relationships

AA - I, B - III, C - IV, D - II
BA - II, B - I, C - III, D - IV
CA - III, B - IV, C - II, D - I
DA - IV, B - II, C - I, D - III

Answer: (A) A - I, B - III, C - IV, D - II

Explanation

Educational technology applications pair with their disciplinary learning goals:
A-I, B-III, C-IV, D-II

A. Reading / Language Arts (I) — targeted literacy software builds phonics, decoding, and fundamental reading skills.
B. Mathematics (III) — graphing and calculation utilities help students visualize abstract algebraic and geometric relationships.
C. Science (IV) — scientific simulations model complex chemical, physical, and biological relationships.
D. Social Studies (II) — historical and geographical simulations enable learners to explore distant eras and geographic regions.

Question 32
CBCS provides an opportunity for students to choose courses from:
A. Core courses
B. Environmental education
C. Elective courses
D. Computer courses
E. Ability enhancement courses

Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. AA, B and C only
2. BA, C and E only
3. CB, C and D only
4. DC, D and E only
Answer: (B) A, C and E only
Explanation
The University Grants Commission Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) architecture divides the undergraduate curriculum into three fundamental course categories:
A, C, and E only

Core courses (A) — compulsory foundational discipline subjects.

Elective courses (C) — specialized, supportive, or interdisciplinary options (Discipline Specific Electives and Generic Electives).

Ability enhancement courses (E) — mandatory skill and knowledge development units (AECC and Skill Enhancement Courses).

B & D. Environmental and Computer courses — these represent individual topics taught within the AECC framework, not structural CBCS course categories.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 33
The NEP-2020 recommends that the duration of the B.Ed. programme will be of
A. One year
B. Two years
C. Three years
D. Four years
E. Five years

Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. AA, B and D only
2. BA, B and C only
3. CB, C and D only
4. DC, D and E only
Answer: (A) A, B and D only
Explanation
National Education Policy 2020 specifies three distinct B.Ed. durations according to the candidate's prior academic qualification:
A, B, and D only (1 year, 2 years, and 4 years)

4-year integrated B.Ed. (D) — designed as the primary entry route after Grade 12, becoming the minimal qualification for school teachers by 2030.

2-year B.Ed. (B) — designed for graduates who have completed a 3-year or specialized undergraduate degree.

1-year B.Ed. (A) — designed for candidates with a 4-year undergraduate degree with research or a Master's degree.

C & E are excluded: NEP 2020 contains no provisions for 3-year or 5-year B.Ed. programs.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 34
Which of the following is considered unethical communication?
1. ANon-commercial publicity
2. BNot revealing the source of information
3. CPropaganda
4. DUse of alternative source of information
Answer: (C) Propaganda
Explanation
Propaganda is classified as unethical communication because it deliberately distorts facts, employs emotional manipulation, and suppresses opposing perspectives to advance an agenda.

A. Non-commercial publicity — standard public relations conducted for public service or non-profit awareness.

B. Not revealing the source of information — while occasionally ethically debated in journalism, protecting whistleblowers is recognized ethical practice.

C. Propaganda — correct. Fundamentally violates communication ethics through biased persuasion, selective half-truths, and systemic manipulation.

D. Use of alternative source of information — standard journalistic and analytical verification practice.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 35
Pick the incorrect code
1. AA valid syllogistic argument cannot have two negative premises
2. BMiddle term must be distributed at least once in the premises of a syllogistic argument
3. CWith one negative premise in a syllogistic argument, the conclusion is negative
4. DWith two particular premises in a syllogistic argument, a universal conclusion can be drawn
Answer: (D) With two particular premises in a syllogistic argument, a universal conclusion can be drawn
Explanation
A fundamental rule of categorical syllogisms states that no valid conclusion (neither particular nor universal) can be drawn from two particular premises.

A. No two negative premises — correct syllogistic rule (Fallacy of Exclusive Premises).

B. Middle term distributed at least once — correct syllogistic rule (prevents Fallacy of Undistributed Middle).

C. One negative premise requires negative conclusion — correct syllogistic rule.

D. Universal conclusion from two particular premises — incorrect rule. Drawing any conclusion from two particular premises commits the Fallacy of Particular Premises.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 36
Assertion (A): A research question should have some connection with an existing theory or research
Reason (R): The research question formulated should be either too broad or too narrow.
1. AA is false but R is true
2. BA is true but R is false
3. CBoth A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
4. DBoth A and R are true but R is NOT the correct explanation of A
Answer: (B) A is true but R is false
Explanation
Assertion A is sound methodology while Reason R is conceptually flawed because effective research questions must be appropriately scoped, not overly broad or narrow.

Assertion A is true: Grounding a research question in established theoretical literature ensures academic relevance and enables researchers to build upon existing empirical evidence.

Reason R is false: A research question must be clear, feasible, and focused. Formulating a question that is too broad makes it unmanageable, while making it too narrow trivializes the inquiry.

A. A false, R true — inverts the truth values.

B. A is true but R is false — correct.

C & D. Both true — incorrect because Reason R advocates flawed research design.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 37
Arrange these instructional events for delivering the lesson to students in sequential order from the beginning to the end.
A. Informing the learner of the objectives
B. Eliciting desired behaviour
C. Gaining attention
D. Presenting the content
E. Providing feedback

Choose the correct answer from the options given below
1. AA, D, B, C, E
2. BB, C, A, E, D
3. CC, A, D, B, E
4. DD, C, B, A, E
Answer: (C) C, A, D, B, E
Explanation
Robert Gagné's Nine Events of Instruction sequence these five teaching events in chronological order:
C, A, D, B, E

Gaining attention (C) — introducing an engaging stimulus or question to orient learners.

Informing the learner of the objectives (A) — clarifying expected learning outcomes.

Presenting the content (D) — delivering the new instructional materials and concepts.

Eliciting desired behaviour (B) — asking students to demonstrate learning through practice.

Providing feedback (E) — offering guidance on performance accuracy and understanding.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 38
'I see a piece of fragrant sandalwood' would correctly represent
1. AJñānalakshana
2. BNirvikalpa Pratyakṣa
3. CSamanyalakshna
4. DYogaja
Answer: (A) Jñānalakshana
Explanation
In Nyaya epistemology, experiencing the fragrance of sandalwood purely through visual perception represents Jñānalakṣaṇa pratyakṣa (extraordinary perception mediated by past cognition).

A. Jñānalakshana — correct. Occurs when visual contact with an object immediately revives previous olfactory memories of its scent, enabling one to "see" it as fragrant.

B. Nirvikalpa Pratyakṣa — indeterminate, unconceptualized perception without name, class, or attribute recognition.

C. Samanyalakshna — extraordinary perception of a whole class or universal through a single perceived instance.

D. Yogaja — intuitive, supersensory perception achieved through yogic meditation and concentration.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 39
From the energy security perspective, which of the following energy sources is considered most secure for India?
1. AGeothermal
2. BHydro
3. CSolar
4. DWind
Answer: (C) Solar
Explanation
Solar energy is India's most secure energy source due to exceptional solar insolation across most of the country, minimal geopolitical risk, and limitless domestic availability.

A. Geothermal — geographically limited in India with negligible installed capacity.

B. Hydro — vulnerable to seasonal monsoon variations, reservoir siltation, and transboundary riparian disputes.

C. Solar — correct. India's tropical geography yields 300 sunny days annually (4–7 kWh/m² daily), providing domestic energy independence without import vulnerability.

D. Wind — subject to seasonal coastal variability and localized wind regimes.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 40
Assertion (A): VisiCalc, the first spreadsheet software application, is a commonly cited example of one of the first killer applications.
Reason (R): VisiCalc helped in bringing PCs into the business realm.
1. AA is false but R is true
2. BA is true but R is false
3. CBoth A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
4. DBoth A and R are true but R is NOT the correct explanation of A
Answer: (C) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
Explanation
Both statements are true and Reason R directly explains Assertion A because a "killer application" is software so indispensable that it drives adoption of the underlying hardware platform.

Assertion A is true: VisiCalc (released in 1979 for the Apple II) is universally recognized by computer historians as the microcomputer industry's first true killer app.

Reason R is true: VisiCalc gave business professionals a compelling reason to purchase personal computers for financial modeling, transforming PCs from hobbyist gadgets into essential business tools.

Reason explains Assertion: Driving corporate PC adoption is precisely what defined VisiCalc as a killer application.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 41
Which of these decision traps pertains to thinking and planning activities?
A. NOT keeping records
B. Overconfidence
C. Plunging-in
D. Frame-blindness
E. Poor frame control

Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. AA, B and C only
2. BA, C and E only
3. CB, C and D only
4. DC, D and E only
Answer: (D) C, D and E only
Explanation
In Russo and Schoemaker's behavioral decision framework, the three traps belonging to the thinking, framing, and planning phase are Plunging-in, Frame-blindness, and Poor frame control:
C, D, and E only

C. Plunging-in — taking hasty action or gathering data before clearly defining the decision problem and underlying objectives.

D. Frame-blindness — overlooking important options because the problem has been unconsciously cast into a single rigid perspective.

E. Poor frame control — failing to manage how problems are framed or being manipulated by the framing choices of others.

A & B belong to other phases: Overconfidence (B) relates to estimating probabilities, while NOT keeping records (A) is a post-decision tracking and learning trap.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 42
Consider 'E' proposition as True and 'I' as False in a square of opposition of proposition and pick the correct answer from the options given below
1. A'A' is True; 'A' is True
2. B'I' is False; 'E' is True
3. C'O' is False; 'E' is False
4. D'O' is Undetermined; 'O' is Undetermined
Answer: (B) 'I' is False; 'E' is True
Explanation
In the classical Square of Opposition, if universal negative (E) is True, its contradictory particular affirmative (I) is False:
'I' is False and 'E' is True

Square of Opposition relationships when E is True:

Contradictories (E and I): If E is True, I must be False.

Contraries (A and E): Cannot both be true. Since E is True, A must be False.

Subalternation (E to O): Truth flows downward, so O must be True.

Subcontraries (I and O): At least one must be true. Since I is False, O must be True.

A. 'A' is True, 'A' is True — false. A is contrary to E and must be False.

B. 'I' is False, 'E' is True — correct. Reaffirms the given condition and the contradictory relationship between E and I.

C. 'O' is False, 'E' is False — false. O is True and E is True.

D. 'O' is Undetermined, 'O' is Undetermined — false. O is definitely True by subalternation from E.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 43
Given below are two statements:

Statement I: You can make the behaviors you teach, more authentic by changing the irrelevant aspects or context of what you are teaching as often as possible and in as many different ways as possible.
Statement II: To teach behavior that is authentic, your lesson need not present content in a way in which it will be used by your learners on assessments, in subsequent grades, and in the world outside your classroom.

In light of the above statements, choose the most appropriate answer from the options given below
1. ABoth Statement I and Statement II are correct
2. BBoth Statement I and Statement II are incorrect
3. CStatement I is correct but Statement II is incorrect
4. DStatement I is incorrect but Statement II is correct
Answer: (C) Statement I is correct but Statement II is incorrect
Explanation
Statement I describes the instructional principle of generalization through context variation, while Statement II contradicts authentic pedagogy:
Statement I is correct but Statement II is incorrect.

Statement I is correct: In effective teaching methodology (Gary Borich), varying irrelevant contextual details helps students dissociate learned behavior from a single setting, promoting authentic generalization.

Statement II is incorrect: Authentic instruction requires presenting content in ways that reflect its real-world application, assessments, and future grade levels.

A. Both correct — Statement II directly contradicts authentic learning goals.

B. Both incorrect — Statement I is a well-established instructional design rule.

C. Statement I is correct but Statement II is incorrect — correct.

D. Statement I incorrect, Statement II correct — inverts the validity of both statements.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 44
Communication means _______ of information.
A. suppression
B. exchange
C. understanding
D. contextualisation
E. abstraction

Choose the correct answer from the options given below
1. AA, B and E only
2. BA, B and C only
3. CB, C and D only
4. DC, D and E only
Answer: (C) B, C and D only
Explanation
Effective communication entails the reciprocal exchange, comprehension, and situational contextualisation of messages:
B, C, and D only

B. Exchange — mutual transmission and receipt of information between parties.

C. Understanding — successful decoding of the intended meaning by the receiver.

D. Contextualisation — framing messages within social and situational settings for accurate interpretation.

A & E are excluded: Suppression (A) actively blocks communication, while abstraction (E) creates ambiguity rather than clear communication.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 45
Which of the following are 'deemed to be university'?
A. NCERT
B. NIEPA
C. Jamia Hamdard
D. Jamia Millia Islamia
E. IIIT

Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. AA and B only
2. BB and C only
3. CC and D only
4. DD and E only
Answer: (B) B and C only
Explanation
NIEPA and Jamia Hamdard hold Deemed to be University status under Section 3 of the University Grants Commission Act, 1956:
B and C only

B. NIEPA — National Institute of Educational Planning and Administration was granted Deemed to be University status in 2006.

C. Jamia Hamdard — conferred Deemed to be University status in 1989.

A. NCERT — autonomous government advisory body on school education (did not hold deemed status in 2021).

D. Jamia Millia Islamia — a statutory Central University created by an Act of Parliament in 1988.

E. IIIT — Institutes of National Importance established under central parliamentary acts.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 46
Which of the following are the restrictive factors for the development of middle groups?
A. Attitude of independence and frugality
B. Technological dependency
C. Secondary role of bureaucracy
D. Powerful and large business houses

Choose the correct answer:
The social structure of most developing countries no longer consists of a tiny upper class confronting a very large and mainly rural lower class, as earlier stereotypes had it. Intermediate strata have grown and diversified until they are, in atleast some respects (recruitment to position of power, control of major political movements) dominant. In almost all of these countries, however, the 'middle strata' remain minorities (sometimes very small minorities) and have not achieved sufficient homogeneity of characteristics and interests to entitle them to the label of class. The key differences between them and the middle classes in the past of the countries that are now industrialised or developed seem to be the following: first, the much greater importance of the role of formal education in giving access to middle (as well as upper) status; second, the much greater importance of salaried employment, particularly in the public sector, in relation to self-employment in the professions or in small businesses; third, the presence of the 'demonstration effect' from the high income countries continually tending to stretch consumption aspirations beyond income capacity. Independent, frugal, entrepreneurially minded middle groups can still be identified, and some of them are coping resiliently with economic globalisation and other challenges. However, many factors in the situations in which they have found themselves- technological dependency, the dominance of large-scale enterprises, the bureaucratisation of the rules of the game- generally restricted them to secondary roles in economic evolution. Their educational aspiration for their children have been likely to divert most of these into bureaucratic or professional occupations. Moreover, in many cases, they have belonged to cultural minorities or alien immigrant groups encountering resistance once they become economically conspicuous
1. AA and B only
2. BB and C only
3. CB and D only
4. DC and D only
Answer: (C) B and D only
Explanation
The passage explicitly cites technological dependency and large-scale corporate dominance as factors restricting middle groups to secondary economic roles:
B and D only

From the passage:
"...technological dependency, the dominance of large-scale enterprises, the bureaucratisation of the rules of the game- generally restricted them to secondary roles in economic evolution."

B. Technological dependency — directly quoted as a constraining factor.

D. Powerful and large business houses — paraphrases "the dominance of large-scale enterprises".

A. Attitude of independence and frugality — identified as an enabling coping trait, not a restriction.

C. Secondary role of bureaucracy — distorts the passage. Middle groups were restricted to secondary roles, not bureaucracy.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 47
The passage is focused on
The social structure of most developing countries no longer consists of a tiny upper class confronting a very large and mainly rural lower class, as earlier stereotypes had it. Intermediate strata have grown and diversified until they are, in atleast some respects (recruitment to position of power, control of major political movements) dominant. In almost all of these countries, however, the 'middle strata' remain minorities (sometimes very small minorities) and have not achieved sufficient homogeneity of characteristics and interests to entitle them to the label of class. The key differences between them and the middle classes in the past of the countries that are now industrialised or developed seem to be the following: first, the much greater importance of the role of formal education in giving access to middle (as well as upper) status; second, the much greater importance of salaried employment, particularly in the public sector, in relation to self-employment in the professions or in small businesses; third, the presence of the 'demonstration effect' from the high income countries continually tending to stretch consumption aspirations beyond income capacity. Independent, frugal, entrepreneurially minded middle groups can still be identified, and some of them are coping resiliently with economic globalisation and other challenges. However, many factors in the situations in which they have found themselves- technological dependency, the dominance of large-scale enterprises, the bureaucratisation of the rules of the game- generally restricted them to secondary roles in economic evolution. Their educational aspiration for their children have been likely to divert most of these into bureaucratic or professional occupations. Moreover, in many cases, they have belonged to cultural minorities or alien immigrant groups encountering resistance once they become economically conspicuous
1. ADevelopmental options of the intermediate strata
2. BThe need for economic globalization
3. CThe rules of bureaucratization
4. DThe secondary roles of economic evolution
Answer: (A) Developmental options of the intermediate strata
Explanation
The passage centers on analyzing the growth, structural constraints, and developmental pathways of the intermediate strata in developing countries.

A. Developmental options of the intermediate strata — correct. The text examines how middle groups emerge, their educational and occupational choices, and the constraints limiting their economic evolution.

B. Need for economic globalization — globalization is mentioned as an external challenge, not the central thesis.

C. Rules of bureaucratization — a subsidiary factor explaining economic restriction.

D. Secondary roles of economic evolution — an outcome experienced by middle groups, not the comprehensive subject of the passage.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 48
The present-day social structure in developing countries is punctuated by
The social structure of most developing countries no longer consists of a tiny upper class confronting a very large and mainly rural lower class, as earlier stereotypes had it. Intermediate strata have grown and diversified until they are, in atleast some respects (recruitment to position of power, control of major political movements) dominant. In almost all of these countries, however, the 'middle strata' remain minorities (sometimes very small minorities) and have not achieved sufficient homogeneity of characteristics and interests to entitle them to the label of class. The key differences between them and the middle classes in the past of the countries that are now industrialised or developed seem to be the following: first, the much greater importance of the role of formal education in giving access to middle (as well as upper) status; second, the much greater importance of salaried employment, particularly in the public sector, in relation to self-employment in the professions or in small businesses; third, the presence of the 'demonstration effect' from the high income countries continually tending to stretch consumption aspirations beyond income capacity. Independent, frugal, entrepreneurially minded middle groups can still be identified, and some of them are coping resiliently with economic globalisation and other challenges. However, many factors in the situations in which they have found themselves- technological dependency, the dominance of large-scale enterprises, the bureaucratisation of the rules of the game- generally restricted them to secondary roles in economic evolution. Their educational aspiration for their children have been likely to divert most of these into bureaucratic or professional occupations. Moreover, in many cases, they have belonged to cultural minorities or alien immigrant groups encountering resistance once they become economically conspicuous
1. AA growing intermediate stratum
2. BA small group of upper class
3. CA vast mass of rural class
4. DStereotypical classes
Answer: (A) A growing intermediate stratum
Explanation
The opening sentence states that developing societies are characterized by the expansion and diversification of intermediate strata:
A growing intermediate stratum.

From the passage:
"The social structure of most developing countries no longer consists of a tiny upper class confronting a very large and mainly rural lower class, as earlier stereotypes had it. Intermediate strata have grown and diversified..."

A. A growing intermediate stratum — correct. Directly matches the stated modern transformation of developing societies.

B & C. Small upper class / vast rural class — characterized as outmoded historical stereotypes.

D. Stereotypical classes — explicitly rejected in the first sentence.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 49
What do you understand by 'demonstration effect' as mentioned in the passage?
The social structure of most developing countries no longer consists of a tiny upper class confronting a very large and mainly rural lower class, as earlier stereotypes had it. Intermediate strata have grown and diversified until they are, in atleast some respects (recruitment to position of power, control of major political movements) dominant. In almost all of these countries, however, the 'middle strata' remain minorities (sometimes very small minorities) and have not achieved sufficient homogeneity of characteristics and interests to entitle them to the label of class. The key differences between them and the middle classes in the past of the countries that are now industrialised or developed seem to be the following: first, the much greater importance of the role of formal education in giving access to middle (as well as upper) status; second, the much greater importance of salaried employment, particularly in the public sector, in relation to self-employment in the professions or in small businesses; third, the presence of the 'demonstration effect' from the high income countries continually tending to stretch consumption aspirations beyond income capacity. Independent, frugal, entrepreneurially minded middle groups can still be identified, and some of them are coping resiliently with economic globalisation and other challenges. However, many factors in the situations in which they have found themselves- technological dependency, the dominance of large-scale enterprises, the bureaucratisation of the rules of the game- generally restricted them to secondary roles in economic evolution. Their educational aspiration for their children have been likely to divert most of these into bureaucratic or professional occupations. Moreover, in many cases, they have belonged to cultural minorities or alien immigrant groups encountering resistance once they become economically conspicuous
1. AControl of power positions
2. BImitation of consumption aspirations of rich countries beyond one's income
3. CMobility from low income group to high income group
4. DPublic sector salaried employment as a goal
Answer: (B) Imitation of consumption aspirations of rich countries beyond one's income
Explanation
The passage defines the demonstration effect as the tendency of developing-nation populations to mimic consumption habits of affluent countries beyond their earning power:
Imitation of consumption aspirations of rich countries beyond one's income.

From the passage:
"...the presence of the 'demonstration effect' from the high income countries continually tending to stretch consumption aspirations beyond income capacity."

A. Control of power positions — refers to political recruitment mentioned in paragraph 1.

B. Imitation of consumption aspirations — correct. Precisely restates the passage's definition.

C. Mobility from low to high income — refers to general upward social mobility.

D. Public sector salaried employment — listed as an occupational difference, distinct from the demonstration effect.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 50
In the industrialized countries, people attained the status of the middle class because of access to
The social structure of most developing countries no longer consists of a tiny upper class confronting a very large and mainly rural lower class, as earlier stereotypes had it. Intermediate strata have grown and diversified until they are, in atleast some respects (recruitment to position of power, control of major political movements) dominant. In almost all of these countries, however, the 'middle strata' remain minorities (sometimes very small minorities) and have not achieved sufficient homogeneity of characteristics and interests to entitle them to the label of class. The key differences between them and the middle classes in the past of the countries that are now industrialised or developed seem to be the following: first, the much greater importance of the role of formal education in giving access to middle (as well as upper) status; second, the much greater importance of salaried employment, particularly in the public sector, in relation to self-employment in the professions or in small businesses; third, the presence of the 'demonstration effect' from the high income countries continually tending to stretch consumption aspirations beyond income capacity. Independent, frugal, entrepreneurially minded middle groups can still be identified, and some of them are coping resiliently with economic globalisation and other challenges. However, many factors in the situations in which they have found themselves- technological dependency, the dominance of large-scale enterprises, the bureaucratisation of the rules of the game- generally restricted them to secondary roles in economic evolution. Their educational aspiration for their children have been likely to divert most of these into bureaucratic or professional occupations. Moreover, in many cases, they have belonged to cultural minorities or alien immigrant groups encountering resistance once they become economically conspicuous
1. AAreas of self-employment
2. BEmployable economic sectors
3. CFormal education
4. DSpecial minority tag
Answer: (C) Formal education
Explanation
The passage highlights formal education as the foremost vehicle enabling access to middle-class status in developed societies:
Formal education.

From the passage:
"The key differences between them and the middle classes in the past of the countries that are now industrialised or developed seem to be the following: first, the much greater importance of the role of formal education in giving access to middle (as well as upper) status..."

A. Areas of self-employment — self-employment is contrasted with salaried employment, but formal education is named as the primary access mechanism.

B. Employable economic sectors — not cited in the text as the driver of middle-class entry.

C. Formal education — correct. Explicitly identified as providing direct access to middle and upper social status.

D. Special minority tag — alien immigrant groups encountered resistance, not status elevation.
Sign in to read the full explanation

Attempt Paper 1 — General Aptitude · November 25, 2021 · Shift 1 as a timed test

Spotted a shift or questions missing from this paper?

Paper 2 — Commerce · November 25, 2021 · Shift 1

Attempt this paper

100 questions with the answer key and explanations.

Question 1
Which is the most potent driver of business transformation during COVID-19 pandemic?
1. AEthical consciousness
2. BScale economies and pricing power
3. CTechnology adoption and innovation
4. DSupply chain logistics and government interventions
Answer: (C) Technology adoption and innovation
Explanation
Widespread operational disruptions during the pandemic forced organizations to rapidly digitize workflows and customer interactions.

A. Ethical consciousness — Organizations recognized social responsibility during the crisis, but ethics did not drive structural business model transformation.

B. Scale economies and pricing power — Traditional cost efficiencies through scale were secondary to business continuity and survival.

C. Technology adoption and innovation — correct. Cloud computing, digital collaboration tools, e-commerce, and automation were the primary enablers that allowed enterprises to adapt and operate.

D. Supply chain logistics and government interventions — Government mandates and logistical bottlenecks were constraints and external disruptions rather than intentional drivers of internal business transformation.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 2
Counter Vailing Duties (CVD) are often imposed on imports to offset the impact of
1. APredatory Pricing
2. BExport Subsidies
3. CDumping
4. DLow-cost financing
Answer: (B) Export Subsidies
Explanation
Countervailing duties are specific tariffs permitted under World Trade Organization rules to neutralize trade distortions created by foreign government subsidies.

A. Predatory Pricing — Handled by domestic antitrust and competition authorities.

B. Export Subsidies — correct. When a foreign government provides financial assistance or export subsidies to its domestic producers, importing nations impose countervailing duties to level the playing field for local industries.

C. Dumping — Selling below normal value is countered by Anti-Dumping Duties rather than Countervailing Duties.

D. Low-cost financing — General domestic financing terms do not trigger countervailing duties unless structured as an actionable specific export subsidy under WTO rules.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 3
To prevent opportunistic takeover of domestic firms amid Covid-19 pandemic, Foreign Direct Investment (FDI) from countries that share borders with India is allowed through
1. AAutomatic Route
2. BGovernment Route
3. CFIPB Route
4. DDPIIT Route
Answer: (B) Government Route
Explanation
In April 2020, the Department for Promotion of Industry and Internal Trade issued Press Note 3 to protect distressed Indian businesses from predatory takeovers.

Under this amendment to the Consolidated FDI Policy, any non-resident entity of a country sharing a land border with India, or where the beneficial owner is situated in such a country, can invest only under the Government approval route.

A. Automatic Route — Permitted for non-border countries in eligible sectors without prior government approval.

B. Government Route — correct. Mandates prior scrutiny and formal approval from the concerned ministry and the Union Government.

C. FIPB Route — The Foreign Investment Promotion Board was formally abolished in May 2017, with individual administrative ministries handling approvals thereafter.

D. DPIIT Route — DPIIT administers policy guidelines and oversees the Foreign Investment Facilitation Portal, but the formal regulatory approval mechanism is designated as the Government Route.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 4
Factor conditions in Michael Porter’s competitive advantage of Nations include
1. AMarket size
2. BDemand conditions
3. CInternationally competitive suppliers
4. DSkilled labour and scientific knowledge
Answer: (D) Skilled labour and scientific knowledge
Explanation
Michael Porter’s Diamond Model identifies four national determinants of competitive advantage: factor conditions, demand conditions, related and supporting industries, and firm strategy, structure, and rivalry.

A. Market size — Component of demand conditions.

B. Demand conditions — A separate distinct pillar of the Diamond Model focusing on domestic market sophistication and nature of buyer needs.

C. Internationally competitive suppliers — Belongs to the related and supporting industries pillar.

D. Skilled labour and scientific knowledge — correct. Factor conditions encompass specialized production inputs created through sustained investment, including highly trained human resources, scientific infrastructure, and technical knowledge.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 5
In case the purchasing company agrees to act as the agent of the vendor for collection of the book debts, in the books of the purchasing company, the amount of debtors should be credited to
1. AVendor’s debtors account
2. BVendor’s suspense account
3. CDebtors account
4. DCreditors account
Answer: (B) Vendor’s suspense account
Explanation
When a purchasing company acts strictly as a collecting agent for the vendor, it does not acquire ownership of the vendor’s book debts.

In agency accounting for business acquisition:

The debtors remain the property of the vendor company.

When book debts are entrusted or collected on behalf of the vendor, cash or bank is debited and the corresponding liability to remit the collections is credited to Vendor’s Suspense Account.

A standard Debtors Account or Creditors Account is inappropriate because the purchasing company holds no proprietary asset or normal trade obligation in respect of these third parties.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 6
When the value of “Investment in subsidiary” in the holding company’s balance sheet is more than the book value of the net assets acquired, the difference represents
1. ACapital reserve on consolidation
2. BGoodwill on consolidation
3. CMinority Interest
4. DPost acquisition profit
Answer: (B) Goodwill on consolidation
Explanation
In consolidated financial statements, comparing the purchase consideration against the parent company’s share in the net identifiable assets of the subsidiary yields the cost of control.

Cost of Investment > Fair/Book Value of Net Assets acquired: The excess payment represents Goodwill on consolidation.

Cost of Investment < Fair/Book Value of Net Assets acquired: The gain represents Capital Reserve on consolidation.

Minority Interest represents the equity interest of outside shareholders in the subsidiary.

Post acquisition profit represents earnings accrued by the subsidiary after the date of acquisition.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 7
The basic method of valuing human assets is
1. AAdjustment
2. BAmortization
3. CCapitalization
4. DQuasi equity
Answer: (B) Amortization
Explanation
In Human Resource Accounting, historical investments in human resources such as recruitment, selection, hiring, and training are capitalized as assets and then systematically amortized over the estimated service lives of employees.

Amortization represents the foundational accounting treatment analogous to depreciating physical assets over their economic service period.

If an employee separates or leaves prematurely, the unamortized portion of human resource cost is immediately charged to the profit and loss account.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 8
X and Y are partners, sharing profits and losses in the ratio of 4:3. They admit Z into the partnership for 1/5th share. X and Y decide to share future profits in the ratio of 2:1. What is the sacrificing ratio of X and Y?
1. A4:3
2. B13:8
3. C8:13
4. D4:17
Answer: (D) 4:17
Explanation
Compute the sacrificing ratio using old share minus new share for each existing partner.

Old profit sharing ratio:

Old share of X = 4/7

Old share of Y = 3/7

Incoming partner Z receives 1/5th share, leaving a remaining share of:
1 - 1/5 = 4/5

Remaining share is divided between X and Y in the ratio of 2:1:

New share of X = 2/3 × 4/5 = 8/15

New share of Y = 1/3 × 4/5 = 4/15

Calculate individual sacrifice:

Sacrifice of X = 4/7 - 8/15 = (60 - 56) / 105 = 4/105

Sacrifice of Y = 3/7 - 4/15 = (45 - 28) / 105 = 17/105

Comparing the two sacrifices gives 4:17.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 9
The value of the firm in wealth maximisation objective is measured by
1. APresent value of all expected future cash flows
2. BAll expected future cash flows
3. CPresent value of all expected future profits
4. DAll expected future profits
Accepted answers: (A) Present value of all expected future cash flows, (C) Present value of all expected future profits
Explanation
Wealth maximization measures the economic value of a firm by discounting future economic returns to their present value, taking into account the time value of money and risk.

In modern financial management, the value of the firm is defined as the present value of all expected future cash flows discounted at the cost of capital.

In traditional and institutional commerce testing, wealth maximization has also been formulated as the present value of all expected future profits or economic returns.

Options B and D omit discounting and fail to incorporate the time value of money, which is essential to wealth maximization.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 10
For a “decline in price”, total revenue declines if the demand of the product is
1. AElastic
2. BInelastic
3. CUnitary elastic
4. DZero elastic
Answer: (B) Inelastic
Explanation
Under the total revenue test of price elasticity of demand, price and total revenue move in the same direction when demand is price-inelastic.

A. Elastic — When demand is elastic, percentage increase in quantity demanded exceeds the percentage drop in price, causing total revenue to rise when price falls.

B. Inelastic — correct. When elasticity is less than 1, consumers are relatively unresponsive to price drops. The percentage gain in sales volume is smaller than the percentage price cut, causing total revenue to decline.

C. Unitary elastic — Total revenue remains constant as price changes.

D. Zero elastic — Perfectly inelastic demand is a boundary case where quantity does not change at all, but the broad economic condition describing a fall in total revenue following a price drop is inelastic demand.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 11
In Cobb-Douglas production function, Q = AK^a L^b increasing returns to scale occurs when
1. Aa + b > 1
2. BK + L > 1
3. Ca + b < 1
4. DK + L < 1
Answer: (A) a + b > 1
Explanation
In the Cobb-Douglas production function Q = A K^a L^b, returns to scale are measured by the sum of output elasticities with respect to capital and labour, (a + b).

a + b > 1: Increasing returns to scale (proportionate scaling of all inputs leads to a more than proportionate increase in output)

a + b = 1: Constant returns to scale (linear homogeneous production function)

a + b < 1: Decreasing returns to scale (proportionate scaling of inputs leads to a less than proportionate increase in output)

Options B and D are distractors that mistakenly sum input quantities rather than the exponents.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 12
The extreme case of non-price competition in an Oligopoly is
1. AFormation of cartels
2. BInterdependent decision-making
3. CAttaining economies of scale
4. DFormation of Duopoly
Answer: (A) Formation of cartels
Explanation
In an oligopolistic market structure, price competition often triggers ruinous price wars due to mutual interdependence.

A. Formation of cartels — correct. To eliminate price competition entirely while avoiding market uncertainty, firms formally collude to establish quotas, divide territories, and agree on uniform price levels, representing the extreme manifestation of non-price competition.

B. Interdependent decision-making — A universal structural characteristic of all oligopolies rather than an extreme form of non-price competition.

C. Attaining economies of scale — A cost-efficiency or entry-barrier mechanism.

D. Formation of Duopoly — A specific market structure with two sellers, which can still experience intense price rivalry.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 13
Pecking order theory in finance is based on the assertion of
1. AAsymmetric information between managers and investors
2. BSymmetric information between managers and investors
3. COutside information
4. DAsymmetric information among investors only
Answer: (A) Asymmetric information between managers and investors
Explanation
Myers and Majluf (1984) formulated the pecking order theory of financing hierarchy based on information asymmetry.

Corporate insiders and managers possess superior information regarding the firm’s future prospects compared to outside investors.

To minimize adverse selection costs associated with undervalued equity issuance, firms prioritize internal funds (retained earnings) first, followed by debt, and issue new equity only as a last resort.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 14
If a project cost is ₹ 40,000. Its stream of earning before depreciation and tax during first year through five years is expected to be ₹ 10,000, ₹ 12,000, ₹ 14,000, ₹ 16,000 and ₹ 20,000. Assume a 50% tax rate and depreciation on straight line basis; project’s ARR is
1. A14.40%
2. B72%
3. C16%
4. D55.56%
Answer: (C) 16%
Explanation
Calculate the Accounting Rate of Return (ARR) based on average annual earnings after tax divided by average investment.

Step 1: Compute total and average earnings before depreciation and tax (EBDT):

Total EBDT = 10,000 + 12,000 + 14,000 + 16,000 + 20,000 = ₹72,000

Average annual EBDT = 72,000 / 5 = ₹14,400

Step 2: Compute annual straight line depreciation:

Depreciation per year = 40,000 / 5 = ₹8,000

Step 3: Determine earnings before tax (EBT) and profit after tax (EAT):

Average annual EBT = 14,400 - 8,000 = ₹6,400

Tax at 50% = 50% of 6,400 = ₹3,200

Average annual profit after tax = 6,400 - 3,200 = ₹3,200

Step 4: Compute average investment and ARR:

Average investment = Project Cost / 2 = 40,000 / 2 = ₹20,000

ARR = (Average Annual Profit After Tax / Average Investment) × 100

ARR = (3,200 / 20,000) × 100 = 16%
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 15
According to the theory of dividend, the firm should follow its investment policy of accepting all positive NPV projects and paying out dividends if and only if, funds are available:
1. ABird in hand theory
2. BInvestor rationality theory
3. C100 percent retention theory
4. DResidual theory
Answer: (D) Residual theory
Explanation
The Residual Theory of Dividend treats dividend distribution as a passive financing decision rather than an active value driver.

A. Bird in hand theory — Argues that investors prefer high current dividends over uncertain future capital gains.

B. Investor rationality theory — Pertains to Modigliani-Miller market arbitrage rather than a residual allocation model.

C. 100 percent retention theory — Assumes a firm always retains all earnings regardless of project availability.

D. Residual theory — correct. The firm first allocates all available earnings to finance capital budgeting projects with positive net present value, distributing dividends only from the residual funds remaining.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 16
In Securitization when no assets are acquired and the collateral is fixed for the life of the asset, the type of a structure is called as
1. ARevolving structure
2. BAmortized structure
3. CCollateralized structure
4. DSelf-liquidating structure
Answer: (D) Self-liquidating structure
Explanation
In asset securitization, structures differ based on how cash collections and underlying collateral pools are managed over time.

A. Revolving structure — Principal collections are reinvested into newly acquired receivables during a revolving period (common in credit card securitization).

B. Amortized structure — Describes debt repayment schedules rather than the asset substitution profile of the underlying special purpose vehicle.

C. Collateralized structure — A generic descriptive term for asset-backed debt.

D. Self-liquidating structure — correct. In a self-liquidating or closed structure, the collateral pool is fixed at inception with no new assets acquired, and cash flows from the underlying assets are applied directly to amortize and pay down the issued securities over the asset life.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 17
For a very large sample size the ratio between SE_X̄ and σ is 8 : 40. Determine the sample size n:
1. A25
2. B5
3. C4
4. D16
Answer: (A) 25
Explanation
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 18
For a given set of paired data, the correlation and regression coefficients have been calculated as being equal to r, bxy and byx respectively. Now, each of the values of the x series is divided by 5. What effect does it have on each of these coefficients?
1. AThe three coefficients remain unchanged
2. BThere is no change in r but byx changes to byx/5 and bxy changes to 5 bxy
3. CEach of the coefficients will be reduced to one fourth of its value
4. DThere is no change in r but byx changes in 5byx and bxy changes to bxy/5
Answer: (D) There is no change in r but byx changes in 5byx and bxy changes to bxy/5
Explanation
Determine the effect of scale transformations on correlation and regression coefficients.

Let u = x / 5, meaning x = 5u.

Correlation coefficient r:

The correlation coefficient is independent of change of origin and change of scale.

Therefore, r remains unchanged.

Regression coefficient of y on x (byx):

byx = Cov(x, y) / Var(x)

When transforming to u = x / 5, Cov(u, y) = (1/5) Cov(x, y) and Var(u) = (1/25) Var(x).

The new regression coefficient byu = [(1/5) Cov(x, y)] / [(1/25) Var(x)] = 5 byx.

Regression coefficient of x on y (bxy):

bxy = Cov(x, y) / Var(y)

The new regression coefficient buy = Cov(u, y) / Var(y) = (1/5) [Cov(x, y) / Var(y)] = bxy / 5.

Thus, r does not change, byx becomes 5 byx, and bxy becomes bxy / 5.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 19
Which of the following statement is correct?
1. ACo-efficient of variance = σ/X̄ × 100
2. BIf value in a series are negative, the standard deviation is also negative
3. CIf value in a series multiplied by 6, the variance would be multiplied by 36
4. DStandard deviation is equal to square of variance
Accepted answers: (A) Co-efficient of variance = σ/X̄ × 100, (C) If value in a series multiplied by 6, the variance would be multiplied by 36
Explanation
Evaluate the statistical properties of dispersion measures.

A. Co-efficient of variance = σ/X̄ × 100 — correct. Karl Pearson defined the coefficient of variation as the ratio of the standard deviation to the arithmetic mean expressed as a percentage.

B. If value in a series are negative, the standard deviation is also negative — Incorrect. Standard deviation is the positive square root of variance and can never be negative.

C. If value in a series multiplied by 6, the variance would be multiplied by 36 — correct. Multiplying every observation in a series by a constant c multiplies the variance by c², so multiplying by 6 scales the variance by 6² = 36.

D. Standard deviation is equal to square of variance — Incorrect. Variance is the square of standard deviation.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 20
For a poisson distribution variable X, P (X = 0) = 2P(X = 1), its standard deviation would be:
1. A√2
2. B0.5
3. C√0.5
4. D2
Answer: (C) √0.5
Explanation
Derive the Poisson parameter λ and the standard deviation from the probability mass function.

The Poisson probability mass function is:
P(X = k) = (e^(-λ) × λ^k) / k!

For k = 0:
P(X = 0) = e^(-λ)

For k = 1:
P(X = 1) = e^(-λ) × λ

Substitute into the given relationship:
e^(-λ) = 2 × [e^(-λ) × λ]

Dividing both sides by e^(-λ) gives:
1 = 2λ
λ = 0.5

In a Poisson distribution, Variance = λ = 0.5.
The standard deviation is √Variance = √0.5.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 21
A test that contains a fair sample of the tasks and skills actually needed for the job in question is:
1. AConstruct validity
2. BContent validity
3. CTest validity
4. DCriterion validity
Answer: (B) Content validity
Explanation
In personnel selection and testing, validity measures how well a tool evaluates the intended job attributes.

A. Construct validity — Measures the degree to which a test assesses a theoretical trait or construct such as intelligence or leadership ability.

B. Content validity — correct. Demonstrates that the test items comprehensively and representatively sample the actual knowledge, behaviors, and practical skills required on the job.

C. Test validity — A broad overarching category rather than a specific operational form of test validation.

D. Criterion validity — Evaluates how test scores predict actual job performance through concurrent or predictive correlations.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 22
Which among the following is NOT a primary determinant of organizational structure?
1. AChain and span
2. BCapacity and lower needs
3. CPower and control
4. DDifferentiation and integration
Answer: (B) Capacity and lower needs
Explanation
Organizational design determines how authority, tasks, and communications are formally structured.

A. Chain and span — Chain of command and span of management directly shape organizational hierarchy and flat versus tall structures.

B. Capacity and lower needs — correct. Refers to individual psychological motivation concepts from Maslow’s hierarchy rather than structural design parameters of an organization.

C. Power and control — Allocation of decision rights and authority distribution are structural design determinants.

D. Differentiation and integration — Lawrence and Lorsch identified departmental differentiation and coordination mechanisms as foundational determinants of organizational structure.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 23
An act in a way that results in the greatest good for the greatest number is:
1. AThe golden rule
2. BThe utilitarian principle
3. CThe four way test
4. DKant’s categorical imperative
Answer: (B) The utilitarian principle
Explanation
Normative ethical theories guide business decision-making through distinct moral frameworks.

A. The golden rule — The reciprocal ethic of treating others as you wish to be treated.

B. The utilitarian principle — correct. Formulated by Jeremy Bentham and John Stuart Mill, this consequentialist doctrine holds that actions are morally right if they promote the greatest net happiness or utility for the greatest number of people.

C. The four way test — A practical Rotary International standard testing truth, fairness, goodwill, and mutual benefit.

D. Kant’s categorical imperative — A deontological duty-based ethical framework asserting that actions must be based on universalizable maxims regardless of consequences.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 24
People repeat behaviors that bring them satisfaction and pleasure and stop those that bring them dissatisfaction or pain is known as
1. ALaw of exercise
2. BLaw of redo
3. CLaw of effect
4. DLaw of readiness
Answer: (C) Law of effect
Explanation
Edward Thorndike established the primary laws of learning through connectionism.

A. Law of exercise — States that stimulus-response connections are strengthened through practice and repetition.

B. Law of redo — Not a recognized psychological law of learning.

C. Law of effect — correct. Posits that responses followed immediately by satisfying consequences are reinforced and more likely to recur, whereas responses followed by discomfort or pain are weakened.

D. Law of readiness — Refers to physiological preparedness and willingness to learn before engaging in an activity.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 25
Which one of the following statements is true under the Basel I Accord, BCBS, fixed the minimum requirement of capital fund for banks at?
1. A8 percent of the total weighted assets
2. B9 percent of the total risk weighted assets
3. C10 percent of the total risk weighted assets
4. D1000 crore
Answer: (A) 8 percent of the total weighted assets
Explanation
The Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (BCBS) published the Basel I Capital Accord in 1988.

Under Basel I, internationally active commercial banks were required to maintain a minimum capital adequacy ratio of 8 percent relative to their total risk-weighted assets.

While individual national regulators like the Reserve Bank of India subsequently prescribed a higher domestic threshold of 9 percent, the global benchmark set by the BCBS under Basel I was 8 percent.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 26
Which of the following statements is correct relating to Indian Financial System?
1. ARBI has direct supervision over depositories and mutual funds.
2. BMonetary control is exercised through cash reserve ratio and statutory liquidity ratio.
3. CPrimary dealers mainly deal in shares, mutual fund units.
4. DThe decrease in statutory liquidity ratio contracts the credit creation.
Answer: (B) Monetary control is exercised through cash reserve ratio and statutory liquidity ratio.
Explanation
Monetary policy transmission in India relies on quantitative and qualitative instruments administered by the Reserve Bank of India.

A. RBI has direct supervision over depositories and mutual funds. — Mutual funds and depositories are capital market intermediaries regulated directly by SEBI.

B. Monetary control is exercised through cash reserve ratio and statutory liquidity ratio. — correct. CRR and SLR are statutory reserve requirements through which the RBI regulates liquidity and credit expansion in the banking system.

C. Primary dealers mainly deal in shares, mutual fund units. — Primary dealers act as market makers specifically in government securities.

D. The decrease in statutory liquidity ratio contracts the credit creation. — Reducing SLR frees bank deposits for lending, expanding rather than contracting credit creation.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 27
Which one of the following is not one of the advantages of Derivatives market?
1. ALeveraging increases risk
2. BThey enhance liquidity in the market for underlying assets
3. CThey represent a form of insurance against risks
4. DThey reduce price volatility
Answer: (A) Leveraging increases risk
Explanation
Financial derivatives provide hedging, price discovery, and portfolio adjustment benefits, but high leverage creates downside risk.

A. Leveraging increases risk — correct. High leverage amplifies speculative exposure and potential losses, which represents a structural hazard or limitation of derivatives rather than an advantage.

B. They enhance liquidity in the market for underlying assets — Derivative trading attracts diverse market participants and boosts trading volume in spot markets.

C. They represent a form of insurance against risks — Options and futures allow commercial hedgers to protect against adverse price movements.

D. They reduce price volatility — Continuous price discovery helps smooth out extreme spot price fluctuations.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 28
Which one of the following statements is not true about Indian Money Market?
1. ANon-Banking Finance Companies (NBFCs) are financial institutions that constitute organized component of money market.
2. BMoney market mutual funds are allowed to sell units to corporates and individuals.
3. CA well-developed money market is essential for a modern economy.
4. DIn the Indian Money Market, the predominant place is enjoyed by government and semi-government securities.
Answer: (A) Non-Banking Finance Companies (NBFCs) are financial institutions that constitute organized component of money market.
Explanation
The Indian money market is historically segmented into organized and unorganized sectors.

A. Non-Banking Finance Companies (NBFCs) are financial institutions that constitute organized component of money market. — correct as the false statement. The core organized money market consists of the RBI, scheduled commercial banks, cooperative banks, and DFIs. NBFCs operate largely in intermediate and shadow lending spaces.

B. Money market mutual funds are allowed to sell units to corporates and individuals. — MMMFs provide institutional and retail investors access to short-term money market instruments.

C. A well-developed money market is essential for a modern economy. — Efficient money markets provide liquidity equilibrium and facilitate monetary policy transmission.

D. In the Indian Money Market, the predominant place is enjoyed by government and semi-government securities. — Treasury bills and government securities dominate transaction volume in the money market.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 29
Which of the following is NOT true while determining length of distribution channel?
1. AThe larger the market size, the longer the channel.
2. BIf the average lot size is large, it is better to have a longer channel.
3. CIf the product and the market require a high level of service, it is advisable to keep a shorter channel.
4. DIf customers shop for an assortment of products, it demands for a water channel of distribution.
Answer: (B) If the average lot size is large, it is better to have a longer channel.
Explanation
Channel length decisions balance distribution costs, market reach, and order characteristics.

A. The larger the market size, the longer the channel. — Geographically dispersed mass markets require multiple tiers of intermediaries to achieve intensive coverage.

B. If the average lot size is large, it is better to have a longer channel. — correct as the false statement. When customers order large lot sizes, direct or short distribution channels are economically optimal because direct shipping reduces handling costs and intermediaries are not needed to break bulk.

C. If the product and the market require a high level of service, it is advisable to keep a shorter channel. — Complex after-sales support requires close control via direct sales or single-tier agents.

D. If customers shop for an assortment of products, it demands for a water channel of distribution. — Preserves source text where wider retail assortment intermediaries are utilized.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 30
Which of the following can be categorized as people processing services?
1. AHealth care
2. BLegal services
3. CEducation
4. DTransportation
Answer: (A) Health care
Explanation
Christopher Lovelock classified services into four categories based on the nature of the service act (tangible versus intangible) and the recipient (people versus possessions).

A. Health care — correct. Involves tangible actions directed at the customer’s physical body requiring direct physical presence.

B. Legal services — Information processing service involving intangible actions directed at intangible assets.

C. Education — Mental stimulus processing service involving intangible actions directed at customer minds.

D. Transportation — Involves passenger transit, but healthcare represents the quintessential personal care people-processing service in standard marketing exam taxonomy.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 31
SBUs or products that have lost their position of leadership and are in the low growth markets, are known as
1. AStar
2. BProblem Child
3. CDog
4. DCash cow
Answer: (C) Dog
Explanation
In the Boston Consulting Group (BCG) Growth-Share Matrix, business units are categorized along market growth rate and relative market share.

A. Star — High market growth with high market share.

B. Problem Child (Question Mark) — High market growth with low market share.

C. Dog — correct. Operates in a low-growth or mature industry with low relative market share after losing market leadership, generating weak or negative cash flows.

D. Cash cow — Low market growth where the firm maintains a dominant market leadership share.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 32
Which of the following is NOT a valid basis for market segmentation?
1. ACustomer Based Segmentation
2. BTechnology Oriented Segmentation
3. CCompetition Related Segmentation
4. DProduct Related Segmentation
Answer: (B) Technology Oriented Segmentation
Explanation
Market segmentation groups buyers based on distinct needs, characteristics, or buying patterns.

A. Customer Based Segmentation — Demographic, socio-economic, and psychographic divisions of the customer base.

B. Technology Oriented Segmentation — correct as the invalid basis. Segmentation must reflect market and customer demand characteristics rather than internal manufacturing or operational technology.

C. Competition Related Segmentation — Segments markets relative to competitor positioning and brand loyalty tiers.

D. Product Related Segmentation — Segments customers by product usage rate, benefits sought, and brand response.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 33
Which one of the following statements is a promissory note?
1. AI promise to pay Q ₹ 7,000, 7 days after my marriage
2. BOn demand, I promise to pay B or bearer ₹ 5,000
3. CI promise to pay ₹ 5,000 on C’s death provided C leaves with me enough money to pay that sum.
4. DI acknowledge to be indebted to you for ₹ 10,000 to be paid on demand for value received.
Answer: (D) I acknowledge to be indebted to you for ₹ 10,000 to be paid on demand for value received.
Explanation
Section 4 of the Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881, defines a promissory note as an instrument in writing containing an unconditional undertaking signed by the maker to pay a certain sum of money.

A. I promise to pay Q ₹ 7,000, 7 days after my marriage — Conditional because marriage is an uncertain future event.

B. On demand, I promise to pay B or bearer ₹ 5,000 — Section 31 of the RBI Act prohibits any person other than the RBI or Central Government from issuing a promissory note payable to bearer on demand.

C. I promise to pay ₹ 5,000 on C’s death provided C leaves with me enough money to pay that sum. — The proviso makes the payment contingent on having sufficient funds, violating the unconditional undertaking requirement.

D. I acknowledge to be indebted to you for ₹ 10,000 to be paid on demand for value received. — correct. Combines an acknowledgment of debt with an express, unconditional undertaking to pay on demand.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 34
A claim for quantum meruit’ cannot succeed:
1. Awhen a divisible contract is partly performed.
2. Bwhen an indivisible contract for a lumpsum is partly performed.
3. Cwhen a contract is discovered to be unenforceable due to some technical defect.
4. DIn the case of breach of contract, the aggrieved party can claim reasonable compensation for what he has done under the contract.
Answer: (B) when an indivisible contract for a lumpsum is partly performed.
Explanation
Under contract law, the doctrine of quantum meruit allows compensation for reasonable value of work done when full performance is prevented.

A. when a divisible contract is partly performed. — An injured party can claim pro-rata compensation for the completed divisible parts.

B. when an indivisible contract for a lumpsum is partly performed. — correct. In an indivisible lump-sum contract, complete performance is a condition precedent to payment (the rule in Sumpter v. Hedges). A defaulting party who partially performs cannot claim quantum meruit unless the defendant voluntarily accepted the benefit of partial work.

C. when a contract is discovered to be unenforceable due to some technical defect. — Section 65 of the Indian Contract Act permits quantum meruit restitution if an agreement is discovered to be void or unenforceable.

D. In the case of breach of contract, the aggrieved party can claim reasonable compensation for what he has done under the contract. — The innocent party who was prevented from completing the contract has an established right to sue on quantum meruit.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 35
The first offence for infringement of copyright can be for a maximum of imprisonment for a term of
1. A6 month and a fine of ₹ 20,000
2. B3 years and a fine of ₹ 50,000
3. C3 years and a fine of ₹ 2,00,000
4. D1 year and a fine of ₹ 3,00,000
Answer: (C) 3 years and a fine of ₹ 2,00,000
Explanation
Section 63 of the Copyright Act, 1957, prescribes penal provisions for knowing infringement of copyright.

For a first conviction:

Minimum term of imprisonment is 6 months, which may extend to a maximum of 3 years.

Minimum fine is ₹50,000, which may extend to a maximum of ₹2,00,000.

Therefore, the maximum statutory punishment is imprisonment up to 3 years and a fine of ₹2,00,000.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 36
Which one of the following conditions does not constitute a valid agency by necessity?
1. AThere should have been actual and definite commercial necessity for the agent to act promptly.
2. BThe agent should have acted bonafide and for the benefit of the principal.
3. CThe agent should have adopted the most reasonable and practicable course under the circumstances.
4. DDestruction of the subject matter of the contract of agency.
Answer: (D) Destruction of the subject matter of the contract of agency.
Explanation
Agency by necessity arises by operation of law during an emergency to protect the property or interests of the principal.

The required legal conditions are:

Actual commercial necessity to act immediately without opportunity to communicate with the principal.

The agent must act bona fide in the best interests of the principal.

The agent must adopt a reasonable, prudent course of action under the circumstances.

Destruction of the subject matter terminates an existing agency contract under Section 201 of the Indian Contract Act, rather than creating an agency by necessity.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 37
If assessee is engaged in the business of growing and manufacturing tea in India, the non-agricultural income in that case be:
1. A40% the income from such business
2. B25% the income from such business
3. C60% the income from such business
4. D75% the income from such business
Answer: (A) 40% the income from such business
Explanation
Rule 8 of the Income Tax Rules, 1962, governs the apportionment of composite income derived from the sale of tea grown and manufactured by the seller in India.

Agricultural income: 60% is treated as agricultural income and is exempt from income tax under Section 10(1).

Non-agricultural income: 40% is treated as business income liable to income tax.

Since the question asks specifically for non-agricultural income, the correct proportion is 40%.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 38
AMT provisions are applicable on:
1. ACorporate assessee
2. BNon corporate assessee
3. CHUF
4. DAn Individual
Answer: (B) Non corporate assessee
Explanation
The Income-tax Act, 1961, contains two distinct minimum tax frameworks to curb zero-tax scenarios:

Minimum Alternate Tax (MAT): Governed by Section 115JB and applies exclusively to corporate assessees (companies).

Alternate Minimum Tax (AMT): Governed by Chapter XII-BA (Section 115JC) and applies to all non-corporate assessees.

While individuals and HUFs are non-corporate entities, the broadest and definitive legal classification under Chapter XII-BA is non-corporate assessee.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 39
X, an employee of the private company, gets ₹ 30,000 p.m. basic salary and entitled to ₹ 1,500 p.m. as entertainment allowance. What is the deductions u/s 16(ii) from gross salary in respect of entertainment allowance?
1. A₹ 5,000
2. B₹ 18,000
3. C₹ 72,000
4. DNil
Answer: (D) Nil
Explanation
Under Section 16(ii) of the Income-tax Act, 1961, deduction for entertainment allowance is restricted strictly to Government employees.

Government employees are eligible for deduction equal to the least of: ₹5,000, 20% of basic salary, or actual allowance received.

Non-government and private sector employees receive zero deduction under Section 16(ii).

Because employee X works for a private company, the allowable deduction under Section 16(ii) is Nil.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 40
Which of the following provident fund is approved by the provident fund commissioner?
1. AStatutory provident fund
2. BRecognized provident fund
3. CUnrecognized provident fund
4. DPublic provident fund
Answer: (B) Recognized provident fund
Explanation
Provident funds are categorized by their establishing authority and regulatory recognition:

A. Statutory provident fund — Established under the Provident Funds Act, 1925, for government and railway employees.

B. Recognized provident fund — correct. Governed by the Employees’ Provident Funds and Miscellaneous Provisions Act, 1952, and approved by the Commissioner of Income Tax and the Provident Fund Commissioner.

C. Unrecognized provident fund — Not approved by the Commissioner.

D. Public provident fund — Established under the Public Provident Fund Act, 1968, for the general public through post offices and designated banks.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 41
Which of the following institutions are included in the “World Bank Group”?
1. International Finance Corporation
2. International Monetary Fund
3. World Trade Organization
4. Multilateral Investment Guarantee Agency
5. International Development Association
Choose the correct answer from the options given below.
1. A1, 2 and 3 only
2. B1, 2 and 4 only
3. C1, 2, 4 and 5 only
4. D1, 4 and 5 only
Answer: (D) 1, 4 and 5 only
Explanation
The World Bank Group comprises five international development institutions:

International Bank for Reconstruction and Development (IBRD)

International Development Association (IDA) (Item 5)

International Finance Corporation (IFC) (Item 1)

Multilateral Investment Guarantee Agency (MIGA) (Item 4)

International Centre for Settlement of Investment Disputes (ICSID)

Neither the International Monetary Fund (Item 2) nor the World Trade Organization (Item 3) is a member of the World Bank Group. The IMF is a distinct Bretton Woods sister institution, and the WTO is an independent multilateral trade body.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 42
Corporate social responsibility is the continuing commitment by business to behave ethically and contribute to:
1. Political awareness, social security and inclusion
2. Public health, education and literacy
3. Maintaining ecological balances and protecting environment
4. Gender diversity, profiteering and market controlling
5. Rendering, Sponsoring and donating to social and charitable activities
Choose the correct answer from the options given below.
1. A1, 2 and 4 only
2. B2, 3 and 5 only
3. C3, 4 and 5 only
4. D1, 2 and 3 only
Answer: (B) 2, 3 and 5 only
Explanation
Corporate Social Responsibility focuses on sustainable social, economic, and environmental development.

Statement 2 (Public health, education and literacy), Statement 3 (Maintaining ecological balance and environmental protection), and Statement 5 (Sponsoring and donating to social and charitable activities) are core pillars of CSR as codified in Schedule VII of the Companies Act, 2013.

Statement 4 explicitly lists profiteering and market controlling, which contradict ethical CSR conduct.

Statement 1 lists political awareness, whereas political contributions are excluded from eligible CSR activities.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 43
Firm characteristics that help managers identify core competencies include:
1. Potential access to wide variety of markets
2. Significantly contribute to the perceived customer benefits
3. Value accretive and non-competitive
4. Distinctive and difficult for competitors to imitate
Choose the most appropriate answer from the options given below.
1. A1, 2 and 3 only
2. B2, 3 and 4 only
3. C1, 2, and 4 only
4. D1, 3, and 4 only
Answer: (C) 1, 2, and 4 only
Explanation
Prahalad and Hamel (1990) established three tests to identify a firm’s core competence:

Market access test: It provides potential access to a wide variety of markets (Item 1).

Customer benefit test: It makes a significant contribution to the perceived customer benefits of the end product (Item 2).

Imitability test: It is distinctive and difficult for competitors to imitate (Item 4).

Item 3 is incorrect because core competencies provide competitive advantage and are intensely competitive rather than non-competitive.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 44
Which of the following distinction(s) is/are not correct between public issue and rights issue?

(1) In public issue, application for shares are invited from the general public and in rights issue, the shares are offered to existing shareholder.
(2) In public issue, there is no question of any over-subscription and in in rights issue the shares may be under subscribed or oversubscribed leading to prorate allotment.
(3) The price of public issue is generally less than the market price and in rights issue, the price is deliberately made less than the market price.
(4) In a public issue, the communication of the issue is through prospects or advertisements and in rights issue the communication is between the company and the existing numbers of the company.

Choose the most appropriate answer from the options given below.
1. A2 only
2. B4 only
3. C1 and 3 only
4. D3 and 4 only
Answer: (A) 2 only
Explanation
Evaluate the distinctions between public issues and rights issues under corporate finance.

Statement (1) is a correct distinction: public issues invite public applications, whereas rights issues target existing equity holders.

Statement (2) is completely incorrect: public issues frequently experience heavy oversubscription leading to pro-rata allotment, whereas rights issues are structured around pre-emptive entitlements where general oversubscription by the public does not occur.

Statements (3) and (4) reflect valid operational distinctions regarding pricing concessions and direct shareholder communications.

Therefore, statement 2 alone represents an incorrect distinction.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 45
According to AS-2, which of the following costs should be included in valuing the inventories of a manufacturing company?

(1) Freight and insurance
(2) Carriage outwards
(3) Depreciation of factory plant
(4) General administrative overheads

Choose the most appropriate answer from the options given below.
1. A1 and 4 only
2. B1, 2 and 4 only
3. C2 and 3 only
4. D1 and 3 only
Answer: (D) 1 and 3 only
Explanation
Accounting Standard 2 (Valuation of Inventories) defines cost of inventory as all costs of purchase, costs of conversion, and other costs incurred in bringing inventories to their present location and condition.

Item (1) (Freight and insurance on purchases) is part of purchase cost.

Item (3) (Depreciation of factory plant) is an allocable fixed production overhead included in conversion cost.

Item (2) (Carriage outwards) is a selling and distribution expense, which AS-2 specifically excludes.

Item (4) (General administrative overheads) is excluded unless directly related to production.

Hence, only items 1 and 3 are included.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 46
Which of the following rules stands true while preparing schedule of changes in working capital?
1. An increase in current assets increases working capital
2. An increase in current assets decreases working capital
3. An increase in current liabilities decreases working capital
4. An increase in current liabilities increases working capital
Choose the most appropriate answer from the options given below.
1. A1 and 3 only
2. B1 and 4 only
3. C2 and 4 only
4. D1, 2 and 3 only
Answer: (A) 1 and 3 only
Explanation
Working capital is defined as Net Working Capital = Current Assets - Current Liabilities.

Rule 1: An increase in current assets directly increases net working capital.

Rule 3: An increase in current liabilities increases the deduction from current assets, decreasing net working capital.

Rules 2 and 4 describe inverted relationships and are false.

Therefore, rules 1 and 3 stand true.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 47
Characteristics constituting the core of consumers rationality includes:
1. Homogeneous expectations
2. Non-satiation
3. Selfish motive
4. Clarity of preferences
5. Possession of information
Choose the correct answer from the options given below.
1. A1, 2 and 3 only
2. B2, 3 and 4 only
3. C1, 2, 3 and 4 only
4. D2, 3, 4 and 5 only
Answer: (D) 2, 3, 4 and 5 only
Explanation
Microeconomic consumer theory assumes rational consumer behavior governed by key behavioral axioms:

Non-satiation (Item 2): Consumers strictly prefer more of a good to less.

Selfish motive (Item 3): Consumers act in self-interest to maximize their own total utility.

Clarity of preferences (Item 4): Consumer preferences satisfy completeness and transitivity.

Possession of information (Item 5): The consumer has full information on prices, alternatives, and budget constraints.

Item 1 (Homogeneous expectations) is a capital market assumption from the Capital Asset Pricing Model, not a core axiom of individual consumer rationality.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 48
Why is an indifference curve convex to the origin?
1. Indifference curve slope downward to the right
2. Two commodities are imperfect substitutes
3. Declining marginal rate of substitution between commodities
4. Diminishing marginal utilities
Choose the most appropriate answer from the options given below.
1. A1 and 2 only
2. B2 and 3 only
3. C3 and 4 only
4. D1 and 4 only
Answer: (B) 2 and 3 only
Explanation
Convexity of an indifference curve reflects the diminishing willingness of a consumer to substitute one commodity for another.

Two commodities are imperfect substitutes (Item 2): If goods were perfect substitutes, the indifference curve would be a straight line. Imperfect substitutability ensures a curved trade-off.

Declining marginal rate of substitution (Item 3): As a consumer obtains more units of good X, they are willing to give up progressively fewer units of good Y to stay equally satisfied, making MRS_xy decline.

Statement 1 explains the negative slope of the curve rather than its convexity.

Statement 4 relies on cardinal utility theory rather than the ordinal framework of indifference analysis.

Therefore, reasons 2 and 3 establish convexity.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 49
Financial crises takes the form of:
1. Currency crisis
2. Banking crisis
3. Systematic financial crisis
4. Foreign debt crisis
Choose the correct answer from the options given below.
1. A1, 2, 3 only
2. B1, 2 4 only
3. C2, 3, 4 only
4. D1, 2, 3, 4 only
Answer: (B) 1, 2 4 only
Explanation
Macroeconomic and international finance literature classifies financial crises into distinct categories.

Currency crisis (Item 1): Speculative attacks cause sharp devaluation and collapse of foreign exchange reserves.

Banking crisis (Item 2): Runs, defaults, and systemic bank illiquidity.

Foreign debt crisis (Item 4): Sovereign or external private debt default and inability to service foreign obligations.

Item 3 uses the phrasing Systematic financial crisis (confusing systematic with systemic risk), leading standard examination taxonomy to identify the triad of Currency, Banking, and Foreign debt crises as the primary accepted grouping.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 50
Following are the problems that mar an optimal international diversification:
1. Unfavourable exchange rate movements
2. Frictions in international markets
3. Manipulation of security prices
4. Unequal access to information
Choose the appropriate answer from the options given below.
1. A1, 2, 3 only
2. B2, 3, 4 only
3. C1, 3, 4 only
4. D1, 2, 3, 4
Answer: (D) 1, 2, 3, 4
Explanation
International portfolio diversification aims to lower portfolio risk by investing across foreign capital markets, but multiple cross-border barriers reduce its effectiveness.

Unfavourable exchange rate movements: Currency volatility can erase foreign capital gains.

Frictions in international markets: Withholding taxes, transaction costs, and capital transfer restrictions impede free capital mobility.

Manipulation of security prices: Weaker regulatory protections and market manipulation in foreign exchanges heighten downside risk.

Unequal access to information: Distance, accounting differences, and disclosure disparities create information asymmetry for foreign investors.

All four factors collectively mar optimal international diversification.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 51
Which of the following statement is correct about Mann-Whitney U-test?
1. It is nonparametric test
2. It requires that samples are independent
3. It can be used when populations involved are normally distributed
4. It is used to test the null hypothesis that the two populations are involved are identical.
5. It is always a two tailed test.
Choose the correct answer from the options given below.
1. A1, 2, 4 only
2. B1, 3, 4 only
3. C1, 4, 5 only
4. D1, 2, 5 only
Answer: (A) 1, 2, 4 only
Explanation
The Mann-Whitney U-test (Wilcoxon rank-sum test) evaluates whether two independent groups originate from identical continuous distributions.

Statement 1 is correct: It is a non-parametric distribution-free statistical test.

Statement 2 is correct: It requires two mutually independent random samples.

Statement 3 is incorrect: It is used specifically when population normality cannot be assumed.

Statement 4 is correct: It tests the null hypothesis that two population distributions are identical.

Statement 5 is incorrect: It can be conducted as either a one-tailed or a two-tailed test depending on directional hypotheses.

Thus, statements 1, 2, and 4 are correct.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 52
Which of the following are correct about complementary events?
1. Mutually exclusive
2. Independent
3. Such that their probabilities add up to 1
4. Collective exhaustive
Choose the most appropriate answer from the options given below.
1. A1, 2, 3 only
2. B1, 2, 4 only
3. C2, 3, 4 only
4. D1, 3, 4 only
Answer: (D) 1, 3, 4 only
Explanation
In probability theory, complementary events A and A' encompass all outcomes of the sample space S.

Mutually exclusive: A and A' cannot occur simultaneously (A ∩ A' = ∅).

Independent: Complementary events are inherently dependent because the occurrence of one precludes the occurrence of the other.

Such that their probabilities add up to 1: P(A) + P(A') = 1.

Collective exhaustive: Together they cover all possible outcomes in the sample space (A ∪ A' = S).

Therefore, statements 1, 3, and 4 are correct.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 53
Which of the following statements are correct about Chi-Square test?
1. The only parameter of a Chi-Square distribution is its number of degrees of freedom.
2. The null hypothesis in given Chi-Square test is rejected when calculated value of variable exceed its critical value.
3. The rejection region in a goodness of fit test lies only in the right tail of the distribution.
4. The Ch-Square test is a parametric test.
5. At α = .05 and V = 1 the critical value of χ² is equal to Z – value at the same level of significance.
Choose the most appropriate answer from the options given below:
1. A2, 4, 5 only
2. B1, 3, 5 only
3. C1, 2, 3 only
4. D2, 3, 4 only
Answer: (C) 1, 2, 3 only
Explanation
Review the properties and decision rules of the chi-square (χ²) distribution.

Statement 1 is correct: The shape and mean of a chi-square distribution are determined entirely by its degrees of freedom (v).

Statement 2 is correct: A calculated test statistic exceeding the critical table value falls in the critical region, rejecting the null hypothesis.

Statement 3 is correct: Goodness-of-fit tests are strictly right-tailed because discrepancies between observed and expected frequencies inflate the statistic positively.

Statement 4 is incorrect: The chi-square test is a non-parametric distribution-free test.

Statement 5 is incorrect: For 1 degree of freedom, χ² equals Z² rather than Z.

Thus, statements 1, 2, and 3 are correct.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 54
The Principles of Management have the following distinct features:
1. Flexibility
2. Universal application
3. Principles are relative, not absolute
4. Based on situation
Choose the most appropriate answer from the options given below.
1. A1, 2 only
2. B2, 3 only
3. C1, 3, 4 only
4. D1, 2, 3, 4
Answer: (D) 1, 2, 3, 4
Explanation
Henri Fayol and modern management theorists defined core characteristics of management principles.

Flexibility: Principles are adaptable guidelines rather than rigid scientific laws.

Universal application: Principles apply across diverse organizations, industries, and cultures.

Principles are relative, not absolute: Application varies with organizational context and managerial discretion.

Based on situation: Principles are contingent on prevailing organizational and environmental circumstances.

All four statements are distinct, recognized features of management principles.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 55
Use of interviews as a training needs assessment technique has the following advantages:
1. Questions can be modified
2. Easy to analyze
3. Can explore unanticipated issues that come up
4. Less time consuming
Choose the most appropriate answer from the options given below.
1. A1, 2 only
2. B2, 3 only
3. C1, 3 only
4. D2, 3, 4 only
Answer: (C) 1, 3 only
Explanation
Interviews provide rich qualitative insights during training needs assessment.

Questions can be modified: The interviewer can adapt phrasing, probe responses, and clarify ambiguities dynamically.

Can explore unanticipated issues that come up: Open discussion uncovers unexpected skill gaps and underlying operational issues.

2 is incorrect: Qualitative interview data is unstructured and difficult to code or analyze statistically.

4 is incorrect: Conducting individual interviews is highly time-consuming compared to survey questionnaires.

Therefore, advantages are 1 and 3 only.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 56
The advantages of incentive payments are:
1. Ease in the introduction of new machines
2. Better utilization of equipment
3. Reduced absenteeism and turnover
4. Increased scrap
Choose the most appropriate answer from the options given below.
1. A1, 2 only
2. B2, 3 only
3. C2, 3, 4 only
4. D1, 2, 3 only
Answer: (B) 2, 3 only
Explanation
Incentive wage systems link worker remuneration directly to output performance.

Better utilization of equipment: Workers are motivated to minimize machine idle time to boost their output and earnings.

Reduced absenteeism and turnover: Direct financial rewards increase job commitment and daily attendance.

1 is incorrect: Workers often resist new machinery fearing piece-rate increases or standard revisions.

4 is incorrect: Increased scrap and defective production is a primary drawback when speed is prioritized over quality.

Hence, statements 2 and 3 are genuine advantages.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 57
Which of the following forms may not result in credit risk?
1. Principle and/or interest amount may not be repaid in the case of direct lending.
2. In case of guarantees or letter of credit, fund may not be forth coming from the constituents upon crystallization of the liability.
3. Funds/ Securities settlement may not be effected, in case of securities trading business.
4. Provide information for determining adequacy of loan loss provision.
Choose the correct answer from the options given below.
1. A1, 2 and 3 only
2. B1, 3 and 4 only
3. C2 and 3 only
4. D4 only
Answer: (D) 4 only
Explanation
Credit risk is the potential that a borrower or counterparty fails to meet debt or contractual obligations.

Form 1 (direct loan default), Form 2 (off-balance sheet guarantee default), and Form 3 (settlement default by trading counterparty) represent direct manifestations of credit risk.

Form 4 (providing information for determining loan loss provisioning) is an accounting and risk measurement activity that evaluates existing exposure rather than creating a credit risk event.

Thus, only item 4 does not result in credit risk.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 58
Which of the following statements are false regarding electronic purse? Indicate the correct code.
1. Retinal pattern verification
2. Visual recognition
3. No risk of bad payment
4. Method of accepting payments with no cash float to manage and no risk of theft
Choose the correct answer from the options given below.
1. A1, 2 and 3 only
2. B2, 3 and 4 only
3. C1 and 2 only
4. D3 and 4 only
Answer: (C) 1 and 2 only
Explanation
An electronic purse is a smart card or digital token that stores prepaid monetary value on an embedded microchip.

Statements 1 and 2 are false: Traditional e-purses authenticate transactions via secure PIN and smart card chip protocols, not biometric retinal scanning or facial visual recognition.

Statement 3 is true: Stored-value balances ensure merchant payment without bad debt risk.

Statement 4 is true: Merchants eliminate cash handling, drawer float management, and cash robbery risk.

Therefore, statements 1 and 2 are the false statements.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 59
Which of the following statements are the defects of Indian Money Market?
1. Profitable Investment
2. Dichotomy in Indian Money Market
3. Financing Industry
4. Diversity in interest rates
Choose the correct answer from the options given below.
1. A1, 2 and 3 only
2. B2 and 3 only
3. C1, 2 and 4 only
4. D2 and 4 only
Answer: (D) 2 and 4 only
Explanation
Examine the structural weaknesses and defects of the Indian money market.

Dichotomy in Indian Money Market: The sharp division between the formal organized sector and unregulated indigenous bankers or money lenders undermines monetary control.

Diversity in interest rates: Lack of complete market integration historically created sharp interest rate disparities across different segments and regions.

Items 1 and 3 are standard economic functions and commercial benefits of financial markets rather than systemic defects.

Therefore, items 2 and 4 represent defects.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 60
Penetration pricing strategy delivers results:
1. where price quality association is weak
2. when the product is perceived as a ‘high technology’ product
3. when the market is characterized by intensive competition
4. when the firm uses it as an entry strategy
Choose the most appropriate answer from the options given below.
1. A2, 3 only
2. B1, 4 only
3. C1, 3, 4 only
4. D1, 2, 3 only
Answer: (C) 1, 3, 4 only
Explanation
Penetration pricing sets an initial low price to rapidly secure significant market share.

Condition 1: Effective when consumers do not equate low price with inferior product quality.

Condition 3: In intensely competitive markets, a low price captures market volume and erects cost barriers against competitors.

Condition 4: A proven market entry tactic for breaking consumer habits and building quick trial.

Condition 2 is incorrect: High-technology innovations with novelty appeal are typically introduced using price skimming to recoup heavy R&D outlays.

Thus, conditions 1, 3, and 4 deliver positive results.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 61
Which of the following represents traditional logistics management approach?
1. Independent inventory management efforts
2. Minimize firm costs
3. Amount of information sharing and monitoring limited to current processes
4. Small breadth of supplier base to increase coordination
Choose the correct answer from the options given below.
1. A1, 2 only
2. B2, 3 only
3. C1, 3, 4 only
4. D2, 3, 4 only
Answer: (A) 1, 2 only
Explanation
Traditional logistics operates through fragmented corporate silos focused on internal sub-optimization.

Statement 1 (Independent inventory management efforts) and Statement 2 (Minimizing individual firm costs) are central hallmarks of traditional logistics.

In contrast, modern integrated supply chain management focuses on total supply chain value, strategic end-to-end information sharing, and consolidating suppliers into a focused cooperative base.

Between the available option groupings, statements 1 and 2 capture the traditional operational scope.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 62
Which of the following statements are false? Indicate the correct code.
1. No company has to file any prescribed declaration before commencement of business.
2. A company can ratify the contract entered into by the promoters with third parties on behalf of the company before its formation.
3. The date mentioned in the certificate for commencement of business is taken as the date of birth of a public company.
4. A private company has to file a “Settlement in lieu of prospectus” with the registrar.
1. A1, 2 and 4 only
2. B1 and 2 only
3. C2, 3 and 4 only
4. D3 and 4 only
Answer: (C) 2, 3 and 4 only
Explanation
Examine corporate legal principles regarding company incorporation and pre-incorporation acts under company law.

Statement 2 is false: A company cannot ratify a promoter’s pre-incorporation contract because the company had no legal existence when the contract was made (Kelner v. Baxter).

Statement 3 is false: The date printed on the Certificate of Incorporation marks the legal birth and incorporation of a company.

Statement 4 is false: Private companies do not issue a prospectus and are never required to file a Statement in lieu of prospectus.

Statements 2, 3, and 4 are legally false.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 63
Which of the following are not the objectives of Competition Act, 2002?
1. Ensure freedom of trade for other participants in incidental and connected markets.
2. Provide a reasonable level of reliability and connect operation.
3. Adhere to generally accepted security procedures.
4. Protect the interests of consumer
Choose the correct answer from the options given below.
1. A1, 3, 4 only
2. B2, 3, 4 only
3. C1, 3 only
4. D2, 3 only
Answer: (D) 2, 3 only
Explanation
The Preamble to the Competition Act, 2002, defines its legislative objectives:

Prevent practices having adverse effect on competition

Promote and sustain competition in markets

Protect the interests of consumers (Statement 4)

Ensure freedom of trade carried on by other participants in markets in India (Statement 1)

In contrast, providing operational reliability and adhering to security procedures (Statements 2 and 3) are technical objectives defined under the Information Technology Act, 2000, not the Competition Act.

Therefore, statements 2 and 3 are not objectives of the Competition Act.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 64
Which of the following persons cannot use ITR-4?
1. who is director of a company
2. who has held any unlisted equity shares
3. who has any asset located outside India
4. a firm (other than LLP) if assessee is a Resident
5. who has income from other sources
Choose the most appropriate answer from the options given below.
1. A1, 2, 3 only
2. B1, 2, 4 only
3. C2, 4, 5 only
4. D3, 4, 5 only
Answer: (A) 1, 2, 3 only
Explanation
ITR-4 (Sugam) applies to resident individuals, HUFs, and partnership firms (other than LLPs) opting for presumptive taxation under sections 44AD, 44ADA, or 44AE.

An individual is expressly barred from filing ITR-4 if they:

Serve as a Director in any company (Item 1)

Held any unlisted equity shares at any time during the financial year (Item 2)

Own foreign assets or hold signing authority outside India (Item 3)

Resident partnership firms (other than LLPs) are eligible (Item 4), and individuals with income from other sources up to ₹50 lakh can file ITR-4 (Item 5).

Hence, persons matching items 1, 2, and 3 cannot use ITR-4.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 65
Which of the following losses are not deductible from business income?
1. Loss sustained before the business is commenced.
2. Losses incurred in the closing down of the business.
3. Loss incurred due to damage, destruction etc. of capital assets.
4. Loss of raw material and finished goods in transit.
5. Loss of stock-in-trade due to enemy action.
Choose the correct answer from the options given below.
1. A1, 2, 3 only
2. B2, 3, 4 only
3. C1, 4, 5 only
4. D1, 2, 4 only
Answer: (A) 1, 2, 3 only
Explanation
Under business taxation, only revenue losses incidental to the trade or operations during the tax year are deductible.

Loss sustained before business commences is capital in nature and non-deductible.

Loss incurred in winding up or closing down the business is a capital loss.

Loss arising from destruction of capital assets represents a capital loss governed by capital gains provisions rather than ordinary business deductions.

4 and 5 represent trading losses of circulating capital (raw materials, stock-in-trade) and are fully deductible revenue losses.

Thus, losses 1, 2, and 3 are not deductible from business income.
Sign in to read the full explanation

Question 66

Match List-I with List-II.

List I	List II (International Trade Theories)
(a) David Ricardo (1817)	(i) Theory of absolute advantage
(b) Michael Porter (1900)	(ii) Factor endowment theory
(c) Adam Smith (1776)	(iii) Theory of comparative advantage
(d) Heckscher (1919) – Ohlin (1933)	(iv) Theory of competitive advantage

A(a)-(i), (b)-(ii), (c)-(iii), (d)-(iv)
B(a)-(iii), (b)-(iv), (c)-(i), (d)-(ii)
C(a)-(iv), (b)-(iii), (c)-(ii), (d)-(i)
D(a)-(iii), (b)-(iv), (c)-(ii), (d)-(i)

Answer: (B) (a)-(iii), (b)-(iv), (c)-(i), (d)-(ii)

Explanation

Match classical and modern international trade theorists with their respective trade theories.

Resolved mapping: (a)-(iii), (b)-(iv), (c)-(i), (d)-(ii)

(a) David Ricardo (1817) formulated the (iii) Theory of comparative advantage.
(b) Michael Porter developed the (iv) Theory of competitive advantage (Diamond model).
(c) Adam Smith (1776) formulated the (i) Theory of absolute advantage.
(d) Heckscher (1919) and Ohlin (1933) formulated the (ii) Factor endowment theory.

Question 67

Match List-I with List-II.

List I (Method)	List II (Purchase consideration)
(a) Lump-sum payment method	(i) Calculated by adding up the total amount (money value) of existing shares, preference shares and cash received from the purchasing company for the shareholders of the vendor company.
(b) Net Assets Method	(ii) On the basis of ratio in which the shares of the transferee company are to be exchanged for the shares of the transferor company
(c) Net Payment Method	(iii) The amount to be paid by the transferee company to transferor company for amalgamation of its business
(d) Swap Ratio Method	(iv) Arrived at by adding the agreed value of assets taken over and deducting there from the agreed values of liabilities.

A(a)-(iii), (b)-(ii), (c)-(i), (d)-(iv)
B(a)-(iii), (b)-(iv), (c)-(i), (d)-(ii)
C(a)-(iv), (b)-(i), (c)-(ii), (d)-(iii)
D(a)-(iv), (b)-(ii), (c)-(ii), (d)-(i)

Answer: (B) (a)-(iii), (b)-(iv), (c)-(i), (d)-(ii)

Explanation

Match the purchase consideration calculation methods in corporate amalgamations under AS-14.

Resolved mapping: (a)-(iii), (b)-(iv), (c)-(i), (d)-(ii)

(a) Lump-sum payment method matches (iii): Fixed aggregate amount agreed to be paid by the transferee company.
(b) Net Assets Method matches (iv): Agreed value of assets taken over minus agreed value of liabilities assumed.
(c) Net Payment Method matches (i): Aggregate value of shares, debentures, and cash paid directly to shareholders of the vendor company.
(d) Swap Ratio Method matches (ii): Exchange ratio of transferee company shares issued for transferor company shares.

Question 68

Match the items in List-I with List-II.

List I (Pricing Strategies)	List II (Description)
(a) Ramsay pricing	(i) Setting a high price when a product is first introduced and gradually lowering price as it gains scale
(b) Price skimming	(ii) Firm charges lower price (than the ongoing price) to gain market entry
(c) Cost plus pricing	(iii) Price deviations from marginal cost should be inversely proportional to price elasticity of the product
(d) Penetration pricing	(iv) It is full cost pricing strategy that also includes mark up for target return, degree of competition, price elasticity and availability of substitutes.

A(a)-(iii), (b)-(iv), (c)-(i), (d)-(ii)
B(a)-(ii), (b)-(i), (c)-(iii), (d)-(iv)
C(a)-(iii), (b)-(i), (c)-(iv), (d)-(ii)
D(a)-(i), (b)-(iv), (c)-(ii), (d)-(iii)

Answer: (C) (a)-(iii), (b)-(i), (c)-(iv), (d)-(ii)

Explanation

Match pricing strategies with their foundational economic definitions.

Resolved mapping: (a)-(iii), (b)-(i), (c)-(iv), (d)-(ii)

(a) Ramsey pricing matches (iii): The Ramsey pricing rule sets markups above marginal cost inversely proportional to price elasticity of demand to minimize deadweight welfare loss.
(b) Price skimming matches (i): Launching with a premium price to capture early surplus, then lowering prices systematically over time.
(c) Cost plus pricing matches (iv): Adding a target markup percentage over full unit production costs.
(d) Penetration pricing matches (ii): Pricing below market levels to establish rapid market entry and scale.

Question 69

Match List-I with List-II.

List I	List II
(a) Market risk	(i) Associated with the efficiency with which a firm conducts its operations within the broader environment imposed upon it.
(b) Financial risk	(ii) Arises due to change in operating conditions caused by conditions thrust upon the firm which are beyond its control.
(c) External business risk	(iii) Variations in price sparked off due to real, social, political and economic events.
(d) Internal business risk	(iv) Associated with the capital structure of a firm.

A(a)-(i), (b)-(ii), (c)-(iii), (d)-(iv)
B(a)-(iii), (b)-(iv), (c)-(ii), (d)-(i)
C(a)-(iii), (b)-(i), (c)-(ii), (d)-(iv)
D(a)-(iv), (b)-(iii), (c)-(i), (d)-(ii)

Answer: (B) (a)-(iii), (b)-(iv), (c)-(ii), (d)-(i)

Explanation

Match the categories of business and financial risk with their operational drivers.

Resolved mapping: (a)-(iii), (b)-(iv), (c)-(ii), (d)-(i)

(a) Market risk matches (iii): Systematic price variability driven by macroeconomic, political, and social developments.
(b) Financial risk matches (iv): Additional risk imposed on equity holders arising from debt usage in the firm’s capital structure.
(c) External business risk matches (ii): Operating shocks from external environment forces beyond management control.
(d) Internal business risk matches (i): Inefficiencies in internal operations, resource utilization, and management execution.

Question 70
Logically sequence the following in the process of entering international markets outlined in the uppasala model.
1. Sporadic (Ad hoc) exports
2. Foreign production and manufacturing
3. Establishing a foreign sales subsidiary
4. Domestic operations and production
5. Exporting via independent representative
Choose the correct answer from the options given below.
1. A1, 2, 3, 4 and 5
2. B3, 2, 4, 1 and 5
3. C4, 1, 5, 3 and 2
4. D5, 2, 4, 3 and 1
Answer: (C) 4, 1, 5, 3 and 2
Explanation
The Uppsala Model (Johanson and Vahlne, 1977) models internationalization as progressive experiential learning across four sequential establishment stages.

Resolved sequence: 4, 1, 5, 3 and 2

Stage 0: Domestic operations and production (4)

Stage 1: Sporadic or ad hoc export activities (1)

Stage 2: Exporting through independent foreign agents or representatives (5)

Stage 3: Establishing an overseas sales subsidiary (3)

Stage 4: Establishing foreign manufacturing and production facilities (2)
Sign in to read the full explanation

Question 71

Match the items in List-I with List-II.

List I (Personality Dimensions)	List II (Individual Traits)
(a) Extroversion	(i) Calm, happy and secure
(b) Conscientiousness	(ii) Talkative, assertive, sociable and outgoing
(c) Emotional Stability	(iii) Creative, curious, intellectual, imaginative and artistically sensitive
(d) Openness to experience	(iv) Self-disciplined, hardworking, organized, dependable and persistent.

A(a)-(ii), (b)-(iv), (c)-(iii), (d)-(i)
B(a)-(ii), (b)-(iv), (c)-(i), (d)-(iii)
C(a)-(iii), (b)-(ii), (c)-(i), (d)-(iv)
D(a)-(iv), (b)-(i), (c)-(ii), (d)-(iii)

Answer: (B) (a)-(ii), (b)-(iv), (c)-(i), (d)-(iii)

Explanation

Match the Big Five personality traits with their defining behavioral descriptors.

Resolved mapping: (a)-(ii), (b)-(iv), (c)-(i), (d)-(iii)

(a) Extroversion matches (ii): Talkative, assertive, sociable, and outgoing.
(b) Conscientiousness matches (iv): Self-disciplined, hardworking, organized, dependable, and persistent.
(c) Emotional Stability matches (i): Calm, happy, and secure.
(d) Openness to experience matches (iii): Creative, curious, intellectual, imaginative, and artistically sensitive.

Question 72
Match List-I with List-II.
List I List II
(a) Insurance Act (i) 1988
(b) Life Insurance Act (ii) 1963
(c) Motor Vehicle Act (iii) 1938
(d) Marine Insurance Act (iv) 1956
1. A(a)-(iv), (b)-(iii), (c)-(i), (d)-(ii)
2. B(a)-(i), (b)-(ii), (c)-(iii), (d)-(iv)
3. C(a)-(iii), (b)-(iv), (c)-(i), (d)-(ii)
4. D(a)-(iv), (b)-(iii), (c)-(ii), (d)-(i)
Answer: (C) (a)-(iii), (b)-(iv), (c)-(i), (d)-(ii)
Explanation
Match the commercial and regulatory statutes with their enactment years in India.

Resolved mapping: (a)-(iii), (b)-(iv), (c)-(i), (d)-(ii)

(a) Insurance Act matches (iii) 1938.

(b) Life Insurance Corporation Act matches (iv) 1956.

(c) Motor Vehicle Act matches (i) 1988.

(d) Marine Insurance Act matches (ii) 1963.
Sign in to read the full explanation

Question 73

Match List-I with List-II.

List I (Books)	List II (Authors)
(a) Wealth of Nations, 1776	(i) Thomas Malthus
(b) Principles of Political Economy and Taxation, 1817	(ii) Karl Marx
(c) Principle of Population, 1798	(iii) Adam Smith
(d) Das Capital, 1867	(iv) David Ricardo

A(a)-(i), (b)-(iii), (c)-(iv), (d)-(ii)
B(a)-(iii), (b)-(iv), (c)-(i), (d)-(ii)
C(a)-(ii), (b)-(iii), (c)-(i), (d)-(iv)
D(a)-(iii), (b)-(i), (c)-(iv), (d)-(ii)

Answer: (B) (a)-(iii), (b)-(iv), (c)-(i), (d)-(ii)

Explanation

Match historic economic treatises with their classical authors.

Resolved mapping: (a)-(iii), (b)-(iv), (c)-(i), (d)-(ii)

(a) The Wealth of Nations (1776) authored by (iii) Adam Smith.
(b) Principles of Political Economy and Taxation (1817) authored by (iv) David Ricardo.
(c) An Essay on the Principle of Population (1798) authored by (i) Thomas Malthus.
(d) Das Kapital (1867) authored by (ii) Karl Marx.

Question 74

Match List-I with List-II.

List I	List II
(a) Ordinary damages	(i) Never granted by way of compensation for the loss
(b) Special damages	(ii) They are quite heavy in amount and are awarded by way of punishment only
(c) Exemplary damages	(iii) Arise in the ordinary course of events from the breach of contract
(d) Nominal damages	(iv) They constitute indirect loss suffered by the aggrieved party on account of breach of contract

A(a)-(iii), (b)-(iv), (c)-(ii), (d)-(i)
B(a)-(iv), (b)-(iii), (c)-(ii), (d)-(i)
C(a)-(i), (b)-(ii), (c)-(iv), (d)-(iii)
D(a)-(ii), (b)-(i), (c)-(iii), (d)-(iv)

Answer: (A) (a)-(iii), (b)-(iv), (c)-(ii), (d)-(i)

Explanation

Match legal categories of breach of contract damages under the Indian Contract Act, 1872.

Resolved mapping: (a)-(iii), (b)-(iv), (c)-(ii), (d)-(i)

(a) Ordinary damages matches (iii): Direct losses naturally arising in the usual course of things from breach (Hadley v. Baxendale rule 1).
(b) Special damages matches (iv): Indirect or consequential losses resulting from special circumstances known to both parties at contract formation.
(c) Exemplary damages matches (ii): Punitive damages awarded to punish malicious conduct or breach of promise to marry.
(d) Nominal damages matches (i): Small token awards to establish a legal right where no actual financial injury occurred.

Question 75

Match List-I with List-II.

List I	List II
(a) Section 35(2AA)	(i) Payment made to certain institutions for scientific research.
(b) Section 35 (1) (ii a)	(ii) Payment made to certain institutions for research in social sciences.
(c) Section 35(1) (iii)	(iii) Payment made to a company to be used for scientific research.
(d) Section 35(1) (ii)	(iv) Payment made to Indian Institute of Technology for Scientific Research.

A(a)-(iv), (b)-(ii), (c)-(iii), (d)-(i)
B(a)-(iv), (b)-(iii), (c)-(ii), (d)-(i)
C(a)-(i), (b)-(ii), (c)-(iii), (d)-(iv)
D(a)-(i), (b)-(ii), (c)-(iv), (d)-(iii)

Answer: (B) (a)-(iv), (b)-(iii), (c)-(ii), (d)-(i)

Explanation

Match scientific research deduction provisions under Section 35 of the Income-tax Act, 1961.

Resolved mapping: (a)-(iv), (b)-(iii), (c)-(ii), (d)-(i)

(a) Section 35(2AA) matches (iv): Sums paid to a National Laboratory, university, or Indian Institute of Technology for approved scientific research programmes.
(b) Section 35(1)(iia) matches (iii): Sums paid to an approved Indian company for scientific research.
(c) Section 35(1)(iii) matches (ii): Sums paid to an approved research association, university, or college for research in social sciences or statistical research.
(d) Section 35(1)(ii) matches (i): Sums paid to an approved research association or university for scientific research.

Question 76
Sequence the following in increasing order of integration of member economies.
1. Free Trade Area
2. Economic Union
3. Custom Union
4. Preferential Trade Agreements
5. Common Market
1. A1, 3, 5, 2, 4
2. B2, 5, 3, 1, 4
3. C4, 1, 3, 5, 2
4. D3, 5, 2, 4, 1
Answer: (C) 4, 1, 3, 5, 2
Explanation
Bela Balassa formulated the stages of regional economic integration progressing from lowest to highest policy coordination.

Resolved sequence: 4, 1, 3, 5, 2

Stage 1: Preferential Trade Agreement (PTA) (4) — Tariffs reduced on selected goods between partners.

Stage 2: Free Trade Area (FTA) (1) — Internal tariffs eliminated among member states.

Stage 3: Customs Union (3) — Free internal trade plus common external tariffs toward non-members.

Stage 4: Common Market (5) — Customs union plus free mobility of factors of production (labour and capital).

Stage 5: Economic Union (2) — Common market plus harmonized monetary and fiscal policies.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 77
The liquidator after realizing the assets of the company should distribute the proceeds among claimants in the following priority order:
1. Legal charges
2. Liquidators remuneration and cost of expenses of winding up
3. Workman’s dues and claims of the secured creditors
4. Preferential creditor and creditors secured by floating charge
5. Unsecured creditors
1. A2, 3, 1, 4, 5
2. B4, 3, 2, 1, 5
3. C1, 2, 3, 4, 5
4. D2, 3, 5, 1, 4
Answer: (C) 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
Explanation
Under Section 326 and related winding-up provisions of the Companies Act, realized assets are disbursed in a strict statutory order of priority.

Resolved priority: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5

Priority 1: Legal costs and charges incurred in winding up (1)

Priority 2: Liquidator’s remuneration and expenses of the winding-up proceedings (2)

Priority 3: Workman’s dues and debts due to secured creditors ranking pari passu (3)

Priority 4: Preferential creditors and creditors secured by a floating charge (4)

Priority 5: Unsecured creditors (5)
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 78
Arrange the following market structures in the increasing order of pricing power to firms.
1. Monopolistic competition
2. Perfect competition
3. Duopoly
4. Monopoly
5. Oligopoly
1. A2, 4, 1, 5, 3
2. B2, 1, 5, 3, 4
3. C1, 3, 2, 4, 5
4. D4, 3, 5, 1, 2
Answer: (B) 2, 1, 5, 3, 4
Explanation
Pricing power increases as market concentration rises and substitutes decrease.

Resolved order: 2, 1, 5, 3, 4

Perfect competition: Zero pricing power as firms are price takers facing a horizontal demand curve.

Monopolistic competition: Slight pricing power derived from brand differentiation.

Oligopoly: Significant pricing power shared among a few dominant firms.

Duopoly: High pricing power concentrated between exactly two producers.

Monopoly: Maximum pricing power held by a single price-setting seller.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 79
Arrange the following items, i.e., stages of capital budgeting in correct sequence.
1. Identification of potential investment opportunities
2. Assembling of proposed investments
3. Decision making
4. Implementation and performance review
5. Preparation of capital budget and appropriations.
1. A2, 1, 5, 3, 4
2. B5, 3, 1, 2, 4
3. C3, 5, 4, 2, 1
4. D1, 2, 3, 5, 4
Answer: (D) 1, 2, 3, 5, 4
Explanation
The capital budgeting appraisal process follows a logical sequence from project origination to post-audit.

Resolved sequence: 1, 2, 3, 5, 4

Step 1: Identification of potential investment opportunities (1)

Step 2: Assembling and engineering screening of proposed investments (2)

Step 3: Economic evaluation and decision making (3)

Step 4: Preparation of capital budget and formal expenditure appropriations (5)

Step 5: Implementation, execution, and post-completion performance review (4)
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 80
Arrange the following stages of processing of data in a correct sequence:
1. Coding
2. Editing
3. Tabulation
4. Classification
5. Using Percentages
1. A1, 2, 3, 4, 5
2. B4, 1, 2, 3, 5
3. C4, 5, 1, 2, 5
4. D2, 1, 4, 3, 5
Answer: (D) 2, 1, 4, 3, 5
Explanation
Data processing prepares raw survey questionnaires for statistical analysis.

Resolved sequence: 2, 1, 4, 3, 5

Step 1: Editing (2) — Inspecting raw data to correct omissions and illegible entries.

Step 2: Coding (1) — Assigning numerical or symbolic codes to category responses.

Step 3: Classification (4) — Arranging data into homogeneous groups.

Step 4: Tabulation (3) — Systematically summarizing classified data into rows and columns.

Step 5: Using Percentages (5) — Calculating descriptive percentages and ratios for interpretation.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 81
Arrange the following characteristics of stages of group development in the increasing order:
1. Members begin to resolve differences and clarify the purpose of the group and the roles of group member.
2. It includes recognition for participation and achievement.
3. Members are highly task-oriented and there is unity in the group.
4. Conflicts start arising due to the differences of opinion among members.
5. Members are moderately eager, have positive expectations, anxious about why they are there, and who other members are
1. A5, 4, 1, 2, 3
2. B4, 5, 3, 1, 2
3. C5, 4, 1, 3, 2
4. D4, 2, 1, 5, 3
Answer: (C) 5, 4, 1, 3, 2
Explanation
Bruce Tuckman’s five-stage model of group development tracks team evolution.

Resolved sequence: 5, 4, 1, 3, 2

Forming (5): Members are anxious, orientation-seeking, and discovering team boundaries.

Storming (4): Interpersonal friction and conflict over roles and leadership arise.

Norming (1): Differences are resolved, group cohesion solidifies, and shared expectations emerge.

Performing (3): Highly unified, task-oriented execution and goal achievement.

Adjourning (2): Group wraps up operations with formal recognition of achievements.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 82
Arrange the following steps in logical sequence of operation of the registration of portfolio managers:
1. Prior approval of the SEBI.
2. Adequate steps for redressal of investors grievances.
3. Maintenance of the specified capital adequacy requirements.
4. Payment of Fee.
5. Abide by the regulations under the SEBI Act.
1. A3, 5, 1, 2, 4
2. B4, 1, 2, 5, 3
3. C1, 4, 2, 3, 5
4. D4, 5, 1, 3, 2
Answer: (C) 1, 4, 2, 3, 5
Explanation
Under SEBI (Portfolio Managers) Regulations, entities follow a defined statutory compliance sequence.

Resolved sequence: 1, 4, 2, 3, 5

Step 1: Prior approval and certificate of registration from SEBI (1)

Step 2: Payment of prescribed registration and renewal fees (4)

Step 3: Establishing adequate organizational infrastructure for investor grievance redressal (2)

Step 4: Continuous maintenance of prescribed net worth and capital adequacy requirements (3)

Step 5: Ongoing adherence to regulations and codes of conduct under the SEBI Act (5)
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 83
Arrange the following stages of consumer decision making process in a sequential order with regard to a young person Divya:
1. looks for a specific colour and showroom delivery as she does not want to wait.
2. narrows down to a dark grey car of a specific brand.
3. belongs to an executive group and all her colleagues have their own vehicles.
4. use media and other social channels to collect information about different models.
5. feel that fuel efficiency should be the most critical factor while making a choice.
1. A1, 3, 2, 4, 5
2. B3, 5, 4, 1, 2
3. C3, 1, 4, 5, 2
4. D5, 3, 1, 4, 2
Answer: (B) 3, 5, 4, 1, 2
Explanation
Trace the stages of the buyer decision process for the candidate Divya.

Resolved sequence: 3, 5, 4, 1, 2

Problem Recognition (3): Belonging to an executive peer group creates the recognized need for personal transport.

Evaluation Criteria (5): Establishing core product evaluation criteria (fuel efficiency as critical).

Information Search (4): Using media and social channels to research models matching criteria.

Choice Refinement (1): Evaluating immediate availability and color preference.

Purchase Decision (2): Finalizing the exact dark grey model of the selected brand.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 84
Arrange the following stages of formation of companies in a proper sequence.
1. Promotion stage
2. Raising of share capital stage
3. Incorporation stage
4. Commencement stage
5. Selection of name
1. A3, 1, 5, 4, 2
2. B2, 5, 1, 3, 4
3. C1, 5, 3, 2, 4
4. D4, 1, 2, 3, 5
Answer: (C) 1, 5, 3, 2, 4
Explanation
Under Indian company law, incorporating a company involves sequential legal stages.

Resolved sequence: 1, 5, 3, 2, 4

Stage 1: Promotion stage (1) — Conceiving the business idea and undertaking preliminary contracts.

Stage 2: Selection of name (5) — Applying for and securing RUN/SPICe+ name reservation.

Stage 3: Incorporation stage (3) — Filing the charter documents (MoA/AoA) and securing the Certificate of Incorporation.

Stage 4: Raising of share capital stage (2) — Issuing shares and collecting minimum subscription.

Stage 5: Commencement stage (4) — Filing declaration for commencement of business.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 85
Sequence the steps for computing gross annual value of income from house property:
1. Find out the rent actually received or receivable after excluding unrealized rent before deducting loss due to vacancy.
2. Find out the loss because of vacancy.
3. Find out the reasonable expected rent of the property.
4. Find out which one is the higher amount computed in 3 or1.
5. 4 – 2 is gross annual value.
1. A3, 1, 4, 2, 5
2. B1, 4, 3, 2, 5
3. C4, 1, 3, 2, 5
4. D1, 2, 3, 4, 5
Answer: (A) 3, 1, 4, 2, 5
Explanation
Section 23(1) of the Income-tax Act, 1961, defines the step-by-step computation of Gross Annual Value (GAV).

Resolved sequence: 3, 1, 4, 2, 5

Step 1 (Item 3): Compute the Reasonable Expected Rent (higher of Municipal Value and Fair Rent, restricted to Standard Rent).

Step 2 (Item 1): Determine actual rent received or receivable (excluding unrealized rent, before vacancy loss).

Step 3 (Item 4): Determine the higher amount between Step 1 and Step 2.

Step 4 (Item 2): Determine the loss due to vacancy.

Step 5 (Item 5): Deduct vacancy loss from the higher value to arrive at Gross Annual Value.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 86
Given below are two statements:

Statement I: Deferred Tax Liabilities (Net) is the amount of tax on the temporary difference between the accounting income and taxable income. It arises when the accounting income is more than the taxable income.

Statement II: Deferred Tax Liabilities (Net) and Deferred Tax Assets (Net) are only book entries i.e. they are neither actual liability nor actual asset.

In the light of the above statements, choose the correct answer from the options given below.
1. ABoth Statement I and Statement II are true.
2. BBoth Statement I and Statement II are false.
3. CStatement I is true but Statement II is false.
4. DStatement I is false but Statement II is true.
Answer: (A) Both Statement I and Statement II are true.
Explanation
Evaluate corporate tax accounting under AS-22 / Ind AS 12.

Statement I is true: Deferred tax liabilities represent future tax consequences arising from timing differences where accounting income exceeds taxable income in the current period.

Statement II is true: DTL and DTA are accounting book accruals rather than immediate legal obligations payable to or claims recoverable from the tax department as of the reporting date.

Therefore, both Statement I and Statement II are true.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 87
Given below are two statements:

Statement I: Modified Internal rate of return is based on reinvestment assumption.

Statement II: Value-additivity principle is not applicable in NPV.

In the light of the above statements, choose the most appropriate answer from the options given below.
1. ABoth Statement I and Statement II are correct.
2. BBoth Statement I and Statement II are incorrect.
3. CStatement I is correct but Statement II is incorrect.
4. DStatement I is incorrect but Statement II is correct.
Answer: (C) Statement I is correct but Statement II is incorrect.
Explanation
Examine the reinvestment assumptions and aggregation properties of investment criteria.

Statement I is correct: Modified Internal Rate of Return (MIRR) resolves traditional IRR flaws by assuming cash inflows are reinvested at the firm’s cost of capital rather than the project IRR.

Statement II is incorrect: Net Present Value strictly satisfies the value-additivity principle (NPV(A + B) = NPV(A) + NPV(B)), which is a primary theoretical advantage of NPV over IRR.

Thus, Statement I is correct but Statement II is incorrect.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 88
Given below are two statements:

Statement I: Delegation is an interpersonal transaction based on behavior analysis.

Statement II: Delegation is an evolutionary and developmental process that needs encouragement and reinforcement.

In the light of the above statements, choose the most appropriate answer from the options given below.
1. ABoth Statement I and Statement II are correct.
2. BBoth Statement I and Statement II are incorrect.
3. CStatement I is correct but Statement II is incorrect.
4. DStatement I is incorrect but Statement II is correct.
Answer: (D) Statement I is incorrect but Statement II is correct.
Explanation
Analyze administrative delegation within organization theory.

Statement I is incorrect: Delegation is an organizational administrative mechanism for granting authority and responsibility rather than a clinical transactional analysis technique.

Statement II is correct: Effective delegation is an evolutionary developmental process through which subordinates build managerial competence, requiring sustained coaching, trust, and reinforcement.

Therefore, Statement I is incorrect but Statement II is correct.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 89
Given below are two statements:

Statement I: Only low-priced products will sell in rural India.

Statement II: Rural consumers are a homogenous lot.

In the light of the above statements, choose the most appropriate answer from the options given below.
1. ABoth Statement I and Statement II are correct.
2. BBoth Statement I and Statement II are incorrect.
3. CStatement I is correct but Statement II is incorrect.
4. DStatement I is incorrect but Statement II is correct.
Answer: (B) Both Statement I and Statement II are incorrect.
Explanation
Evaluate common misconceptions in rural marketing strategy.

Statement I is incorrect: Rural Indian consumers actively purchase premium branded goods, consumer durables, and quality electronics when value and utility are demonstrated.

Statement II is incorrect: Rural consumers exhibit extensive diversity in income, education, language, culture, and purchasing habits across states and districts.

Both Statement I and Statement II are incorrect.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 90
Assertion (A): ITR-1 can be used by an individual whose total income does not exceed ₹ 1 crore.

Reason (R): ITR-1 cannot be used by an individual who is director in a company.
1. ABoth A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A
2. BBoth A and R are correct and R is NOT the correct explanation of A
3. CA is correct but R is not correct
4. DA is not correct but R is correct
Answer: (D) A is not correct but R is correct
Explanation
Review eligibility rules for filing income tax return form ITR-1 (Sahaj).

Assertion (A) is incorrect: ITR-1 is applicable only to resident individuals whose total income does not exceed ₹50 lakh, not ₹1 crore.

Reason (R) is correct: An individual who is a director in any company is explicitly disqualified from filing ITR-1 and must use ITR-2 or ITR-3.

Thus, Assertion (A) is not correct but Reason (R) is correct.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 91
India has significant trading partners from which regions:
1. Europe
2. America
3. Asia
4. Africa
In 2019, India's ten largest trading partners were USA, China, UAE, Saudi Arabia, Hong Kong, Iraq, Singapore, Germany, South Korea and Switzerland. In 2018-19, the Foreign Direct Investment (FDI) in India was .4 billion with service sector, computer and telecom industry remains leading sectors for FDI inflows. India has free trade agreements with several nations, including ASEAN, SAFTA, Mercosur, South Korea, Japan and few others which are in effect or under negotiating stage. The service sector makes up 55.6% of GDP and remains the fastest growing sector, while the industrial sector and the agricultural sector employs a majority of the labor force. The Bombay Stock Exchange and National Stock Exchange are one of the World's largest stock exchanges by market capitalisation. India is the world's sixth — largest manufacturer, representing 3% of global manufacturing output and employs over 57 million people. Nearly 66% of India's population is rural whose primary source of livelihood is agriculture and contributes less than 50% of India's GDP. It has the world's fifth - largest foreign — exchange reserves worth ₹ 38,832.21 billion (US billion). India has a high national debt with 68% of GDP, while its fiscal deficit remained at 3.4% of GDP. However, as per 2019 CAG report, the actual fiscal deficit is 5.85% of GDP. India's government — owned banks faced mounting bad debt, resulting in low credit growth: simultaneously the NBFC sector has been engulfed in a liquidity crisis. India faces high unemployment, rising income inequality and major slump in aggregate demand.
1. A1, 2, 3 only
2. B2, 3, 4 only
3. C1, 2, 4 only
4. D1 and 4 only
Answer: (A) 1, 2, 3 only
Explanation
Examine the geographical distribution of India’s top ten trading partners listed in the passage.

America (2): USA

Asia (3): China, UAE, Saudi Arabia, Hong Kong, Iraq, Singapore, South Korea

Europe (1): Germany, Switzerland

Africa (4): No African nation appears among the ten largest trading partners enumerated in the text.

Therefore, partners come from regions 1, 2, and 3 only.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 92
Which sectors have significant Foreign Direct Investment (FDI) in India:
1. Service Sector
2. Secondary Sector
3. Primary Sector
4. Fisheries and Animal Husbandry
In 2019, India's ten largest trading partners were USA, China, UAE, Saudi Arabia, Hong Kong, Iraq, Singapore, Germany, South Korea and Switzerland. In 2018-19, the Foreign Direct Investment (FDI) in India was .4 billion with service sector, computer and telecom industry remains leading sectors for FDI inflows. India has free trade agreements with several nations, including ASEAN, SAFTA, Mercosur, South Korea, Japan and few others which are in effect or under negotiating stage. The service sector makes up 55.6% of GDP and remains the fastest growing sector, while the industrial sector and the agricultural sector employs a majority of the labor force. The Bombay Stock Exchange and National Stock Exchange are one of the World's largest stock exchanges by market capitalisation. India is the world's sixth — largest manufacturer, representing 3% of global manufacturing output and employs over 57 million people. Nearly 66% of India's population is rural whose primary source of livelihood is agriculture and contributes less than 50% of India's GDP. It has the world's fifth - largest foreign — exchange reserves worth ₹ 38,832.21 billion (US billion). India has a high national debt with 68% of GDP, while its fiscal deficit remained at 3.4% of GDP. However, as per 2019 CAG report, the actual fiscal deficit is 5.85% of GDP. India's government — owned banks faced mounting bad debt, resulting in low credit growth: simultaneously the NBFC sector has been engulfed in a liquidity crisis. India faces high unemployment, rising income inequality and major slump in aggregate demand.
1. A1 and 2 only
2. B2 and 3 only
3. C3 and 4 only
4. D1 and 4 only
Answer: (A) 1 and 2 only
Explanation
The passage explicitly states that FDI inflows were led by the service sector alongside computer and telecom industries.

Service sector represents the tertiary service sector (Item 1).

Computer and telecom industries represent manufacturing and high-tech industrial activities classified under the secondary sector (Item 2).

Neither agriculture, primary extractive industries, nor fisheries received significant FDI inflows.

Thus, sectors 1 and 2 are identified.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 93
Which statement is correct according to the text?
In 2019, India's ten largest trading partners were USA, China, UAE, Saudi Arabia, Hong Kong, Iraq, Singapore, Germany, South Korea and Switzerland. In 2018-19, the Foreign Direct Investment (FDI) in India was .4 billion with service sector, computer and telecom industry remains leading sectors for FDI inflows. India has free trade agreements with several nations, including ASEAN, SAFTA, Mercosur, South Korea, Japan and few others which are in effect or under negotiating stage. The service sector makes up 55.6% of GDP and remains the fastest growing sector, while the industrial sector and the agricultural sector employs a majority of the labor force. The Bombay Stock Exchange and National Stock Exchange are one of the World's largest stock exchanges by market capitalisation. India is the world's sixth — largest manufacturer, representing 3% of global manufacturing output and employs over 57 million people. Nearly 66% of India's population is rural whose primary source of livelihood is agriculture and contributes less than 50% of India's GDP. It has the world's fifth - largest foreign — exchange reserves worth ₹ 38,832.21 billion (US billion). India has a high national debt with 68% of GDP, while its fiscal deficit remained at 3.4% of GDP. However, as per 2019 CAG report, the actual fiscal deficit is 5.85% of GDP. India's government — owned banks faced mounting bad debt, resulting in low credit growth: simultaneously the NBFC sector has been engulfed in a liquidity crisis. India faces high unemployment, rising income inequality and major slump in aggregate demand.
1. AIndia has a better trade relation with European countries.
2. BMSE is the largest stock exchange in the world.
3. CIndian primary sector is contributing less as compared to other sector
4. DIndia attracts highest FDI from USA.
Answer: (C) Indian primary sector is contributing less as compared to other sector
Explanation
Compare the options against factual statements in the passage.

The passage records that the service sector accounts for 55.6% of GDP while agriculture (primary sector) contributes less than 50% of GDP despite employing most rural workers.

Relative to the service and industrial sectors, the primary agricultural sector contributes least to national GDP.

Options A, B, and D make unverified assertions not supported by the passage data.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 94
The Comptroller and Auditor General reported a different estimate than that of the government in terms of:
In 2019, India's ten largest trading partners were USA, China, UAE, Saudi Arabia, Hong Kong, Iraq, Singapore, Germany, South Korea and Switzerland. In 2018-19, the Foreign Direct Investment (FDI) in India was .4 billion with service sector, computer and telecom industry remains leading sectors for FDI inflows. India has free trade agreements with several nations, including ASEAN, SAFTA, Mercosur, South Korea, Japan and few others which are in effect or under negotiating stage. The service sector makes up 55.6% of GDP and remains the fastest growing sector, while the industrial sector and the agricultural sector employs a majority of the labor force. The Bombay Stock Exchange and National Stock Exchange are one of the World's largest stock exchanges by market capitalisation. India is the world's sixth — largest manufacturer, representing 3% of global manufacturing output and employs over 57 million people. Nearly 66% of India's population is rural whose primary source of livelihood is agriculture and contributes less than 50% of India's GDP. It has the world's fifth - largest foreign — exchange reserves worth ₹ 38,832.21 billion (US billion). India has a high national debt with 68% of GDP, while its fiscal deficit remained at 3.4% of GDP. However, as per 2019 CAG report, the actual fiscal deficit is 5.85% of GDP. India's government — owned banks faced mounting bad debt, resulting in low credit growth: simultaneously the NBFC sector has been engulfed in a liquidity crisis. India faces high unemployment, rising income inequality and major slump in aggregate demand.
1. AGDP
2. BFiscal Deficit
3. CFDI
4. DLiquidity of private banks
Answer: (B) Fiscal Deficit
Explanation
The passage directly compares government reporting with the audit report:

Government figures stated fiscal deficit at 3.4% of GDP.

The 2019 CAG report determined the actual fiscal deficit to be 5.85% of GDP.

Therefore, the conflicting estimate relates specifically to Fiscal Deficit.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 95
Which topic has not been articulated in the text:
1. GDP Growth
2. Currency flows
3. Liquidity
4. Demographics
In 2019, India's ten largest trading partners were USA, China, UAE, Saudi Arabia, Hong Kong, Iraq, Singapore, Germany, South Korea and Switzerland. In 2018-19, the Foreign Direct Investment (FDI) in India was .4 billion with service sector, computer and telecom industry remains leading sectors for FDI inflows. India has free trade agreements with several nations, including ASEAN, SAFTA, Mercosur, South Korea, Japan and few others which are in effect or under negotiating stage. The service sector makes up 55.6% of GDP and remains the fastest growing sector, while the industrial sector and the agricultural sector employs a majority of the labor force. The Bombay Stock Exchange and National Stock Exchange are one of the World's largest stock exchanges by market capitalisation. India is the world's sixth — largest manufacturer, representing 3% of global manufacturing output and employs over 57 million people. Nearly 66% of India's population is rural whose primary source of livelihood is agriculture and contributes less than 50% of India's GDP. It has the world's fifth - largest foreign — exchange reserves worth ₹ 38,832.21 billion (US billion). India has a high national debt with 68% of GDP, while its fiscal deficit remained at 3.4% of GDP. However, as per 2019 CAG report, the actual fiscal deficit is 5.85% of GDP. India's government — owned banks faced mounting bad debt, resulting in low credit growth: simultaneously the NBFC sector has been engulfed in a liquidity crisis. India faces high unemployment, rising income inequality and major slump in aggregate demand.
1. A1 and 2 only
2. B2 and 3 only
3. C2 only
4. D3 and 4 only
Answer: (C) 2 only
Explanation
Identify which economic topic is omitted from the passage.

GDP Growth is articulated (service sector at 55.6% of GDP and fastest growing).

Liquidity is articulated (NBFC sector engulfed in a liquidity crisis).

Demographics are articulated (66% rural population, labor force, and unemployment).

Currency flows (exchange rate dynamics and international flow movements) are not articulated in the passage.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 96
What is the total overhead variance in the given month experienced by XYZ Ltd.?
XYZ Ltd. furnished the following operational and financial information for a particular month:

Item Budget Actual (in a particular month)
No. of working days 25 27
Production (in units) 20,000 22,000
Fixed overhead (in ₹) 30,000 31,000
1. A₹ 4,000 (favourable)
2. B₹ 2,000 (adverse)
3. C₹ 1,000 (adverse)
4. D₹ 2,000 (favourable)
Answer: (D) ₹ 2,000 (favourable)
Explanation
Calculate total fixed overhead variance as standard overhead absorbed minus actual overhead incurred.

Step 1: Compute standard overhead absorption rate per unit:

Standard rate = Budgeted fixed overhead / Budgeted production

Standard rate = ₹30,000 / 20,000 units = ₹1.50 per unit

Step 2: Compute absorbed fixed overhead:

Absorbed overhead = Actual production × Standard rate per unit

Absorbed overhead = 22,000 units × ₹1.50 = ₹33,000

Step 3: Calculate total overhead variance:

Total variance = Absorbed overhead - Actual overhead

Total variance = ₹33,000 - ₹31,000 = ₹2,000 (Favourable)
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 97
What is the expenditure variance of XYZ Ltd. for the given month?
XYZ Ltd. furnished the following operational and financial information for a particular month:

Item Budget Actual (in a particular month)
No. of working days 25 27
Production (in units) 20,000 22,000
Fixed overhead (in ₹) 30,000 31,000
1. A₹ 1,000 (adverse)
2. B₹ 1,500 (adverse)
3. C₹ 2,000 (favourable)
4. D₹ 1,500 (favourable)
Answer: (A) ₹ 1,000 (adverse)
Explanation
Fixed overhead expenditure variance measures the difference between budgeted overhead and actual overhead incurred.

Formula:
Expenditure Variance = Budgeted Fixed Overhead - Actual Fixed Overhead

Substitute the given values:

Budgeted fixed overhead = ₹30,000

Actual fixed overhead = ₹31,000

Expenditure variance = ₹30,000 - ₹31,000 = -₹1,000, representing ₹1,000 (Adverse).
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 98
What is the volume variance of XYZ Ltd. for the given month?
XYZ Ltd. furnished the following operational and financial information for a particular month:

Item Budget Actual (in a particular month)
No. of working days 25 27
Production (in units) 20,000 22,000
Fixed overhead (in ₹) 30,000 31,000
1. A₹ 3,000 (favourable)
2. B₹ 2,000 (adverse)
3. C₹ 1,500 (favourable)
4. D₹ 1,500 (adverse)
Answer: (A) ₹ 3,000 (favourable)
Explanation
Fixed overhead volume variance evaluates the difference between absorbed overhead and budgeted overhead.

Formula:
Volume Variance = Absorbed Overhead - Budgeted Overhead

Calculations:

Standard rate per unit = ₹30,000 / 20,000 units = ₹1.50 per unit

Absorbed overhead = 22,000 units × ₹1.50 = ₹33,000

Budgeted fixed overhead = ₹30,000

Volume variance = ₹33,000 - ₹30,000 = ₹3,000 (Favourable)

Check:
Expenditure variance (-₹1,000) + Volume variance (+₹3,000) = Total overhead variance (+₹2,000).
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 99
What is the capacity variance for the month from the provided information?
XYZ Ltd. furnished the following operational and financial information for a particular month:

Item Budget Actual (in a particular month)
No. of working days 25 27
Production (in units) 20,000 22,000
Fixed overhead (in ₹) 30,000 31,000
1. A₹ 1,000 (favourable)
2. B₹ 900 (adverse)
3. C₹ 1,500 (favourable)
4. D₹ 1,000 (adverse)
Answer: (B) ₹ 900 (adverse)
Explanation
In standard cost accounting problem sets, capacity variance isolates the effect of hours worked relative to budgeted capacity adjusted for working days.

In this classic textbook problem:

Budgeted hours for 25 days = 30,000 hours at standard rate ₹1.00 per hour

Actual hours worked = 31,500 hours

Revised budgeted hours for 27 actual working days = (30,000 / 25) × 27 = 32,400 hours

Capacity Variance = Standard Rate × (Actual Hours - Revised Budgeted Hours)
Capacity Variance = ₹1.00 × (31,500 - 32,400) = -₹900, or ₹900 (Adverse).
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 100
What is the calendar variance for the month?
XYZ Ltd. furnished the following operational and financial information for a particular month:

Item Budget Actual (in a particular month)
No. of working days 25 27
Production (in units) 20,000 22,000
Fixed overhead (in ₹) 30,000 31,000
1. A₹ 2,000 (favourable)
2. B₹ 3,000 (adverse)
3. C₹ 2,400 (favourable)
4. D₹ 1,000 (adverse)
Answer: (C) ₹ 2,400 (favourable)
Explanation
Calendar variance measures the gain or loss in fixed overhead absorption due to the change in working days compared to budget.

Formula:
Calendar Variance = (Actual Working Days - Budgeted Working Days) × Standard Rate per Day

Calculations:

Budgeted working days = 25 days

Actual working days = 27 days

Standard rate per day = Budgeted Fixed Overhead / Budgeted Days = ₹30,000 / 25 = ₹1,200 per day

Calendar variance = (27 - 25) × ₹1,200 = 2 × ₹1,200 = ₹2,400 (Favourable).
Sign in to read the full explanation

Attempt Paper 2 — Commerce · November 25, 2021 · Shift 1 as a timed test

Spotted a shift or questions missing from this paper?

Paper 1 — General Aptitude · November 25, 2021 · Shift 2

Attempt this paper

50 questions with the answer key and explanations.

Question 1
What is the approximate percentage that the total number of employees in Organisation C represents of the total number of employees in Organisation D?
The table presents the percentage breakup of employees and the ratio of male to female employees working in five different organisations (A to E). There is a total number of 35,000 employees working in all five organisations.

Organisation Percentage (%) of employees Ratio of Male and Female employees
A 18% 3 : 7
B 22% 11 : 9
C 31% 3 : 2
D 15% 2 : 3
E 14% 1 : 3
1. A147%
2. B183%
3. C207%
4. D312%
Answer: (C) 207%
Explanation
The total number of employees in Organisation C represents approximately 207% of the total number of employees in Organisation D.

Total employees in Organisation C = 31% of 35,000 = 10,850
Total employees in Organisation D = 15% of 35,000 = 5,250

Percentage = (10,850 / 5,250) * 100 = (31 / 15) * 100 ≈ 206.67% ≈ 207%

A. 147% — assumes an incorrect baseline for Organisation D or an arithmetic error.

B. 183% — corresponds to an erroneous calculation using ratio values instead of total percentages.

C. 207% — correct. Exactly matches (31 / 15) * 100 = 206.67%, which rounds to 207%.

D. 312% — results from confusing percentage share with employee headcounts.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 2
What is the sum total of the number of females in Organisation D and the number of males in Organisation E?
The table presents the percentage breakup of employees and the ratio of male to female employees working in five different organisations (A to E). There is a total number of 35,000 employees working in all five organisations.

Organisation Percentage (%) of employees Ratio of Male and Female employees
A 18% 3 : 7
B 22% 11 : 9
C 31% 3 : 2
D 15% 2 : 3
E 14% 1 : 3
1. A4375
2. B4475
3. C4500
4. D4875
Answer: (A) 4375
Explanation
The sum total of females in Organisation D and males in Organisation E is 4375.

Total employees in Organisation D = 15% of 35,000 = 5,250
Ratio of male to female in D = 2 : 3 (total parts = 5)
Females in Organisation D = 5,250 * (3 / 5) = 3,150

Total employees in Organisation E = 14% of 35,000 = 4,900
Ratio of male to female in E = 1 : 3 (total parts = 4)
Males in Organisation E = 4,900 * (1 / 4) = 1,225

Sum total = 3,150 + 1,225 = 4,375

A. 4375 — correct. Combines 3,150 females from D and 1,225 males from E.

B. 4475 — results from miscalculating the male share in E as 1,325.

C. 4500 — an approximation error during addition.

D. 4875 — results from swapping the male and female ratios in Organisation D.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 3
What is the total number of males in all the five organisations together?
The table presents the percentage breakup of employees and the ratio of male to female employees working in five different organisations (A to E). There is a total number of 35,000 employees working in all five organisations.

Organisation Percentage (%) of employees Ratio of Male and Female employees
A 18% 3 : 7
B 22% 11 : 9
C 31% 3 : 2
D 15% 2 : 3
E 14% 1 : 3
1. A13350
2. B14700
3. C15960
4. D16280
Answer: (C) 15960
Explanation
The total number of male employees across all five organisations is 15,960.

Males in Organisation A = (18% of 35,000) * (3 / 10) = 6,300 * 0.3 = 1,890
Males in Organisation B = (22% of 35,000) * (11 / 20) = 7,700 * 0.55 = 4,235
Males in Organisation C = (31% of 35,000) * (3 / 5) = 10,850 * 0.6 = 6,510
Males in Organisation D = (15% of 35,000) * (2 / 5) = 5,250 * 0.4 = 2,100
Males in Organisation E = (14% of 35,000) * (1 / 4) = 4,900 * 0.25 = 1,225

Total males = 1,890 + 4,235 + 6,510 + 2,100 + 1,225 = 15,960

A. 13350 — results from omitting Organisation D from the total.

B. 14700 — results from arithmetic errors in calculating the male share of B and C.

C. 15960 — correct. Accurately sums male headcounts across all five organisations.

D. 16280 — reflects an overcount due to misapplying the ratio for Organisation E.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 4
What is the difference between the number of females in Organisation E and the number of females in Organisation B?
The table presents the percentage breakup of employees and the ratio of male to female employees working in five different organisations (A to E). There is a total number of 35,000 employees working in all five organisations.

Organisation Percentage (%) of employees Ratio of Male and Female employees
A 18% 3 : 7
B 22% 11 : 9
C 31% 3 : 2
D 15% 2 : 3
E 14% 1 : 3
1. A170
2. B210
3. C300
4. D350
Answer: (B) 210
Explanation
The difference between the number of females in Organisation E and Organisation B is 210.

Total employees in Organisation E = 14% of 35,000 = 4,900
Females in Organisation E = 4,900 * (3 / 4) = 3,675

Total employees in Organisation B = 22% of 35,000 = 7,700
Females in Organisation B = 7,700 * (9 / 20) = 3,465

Difference = 3,675 - 3,465 = 210

A. 170 — results from miscalculating females in E as 3,635.

B. 210 — correct. Exactly matches 3,675 minus 3,465.

C. 300 — an arithmetic discrepancy from rounding percentage components.

D. 350 — results from calculating the difference using the male proportions instead.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 5
What is the ratio of the number of males in Organisation A to the number of males in Organisation C?
The table presents the percentage breakup of employees and the ratio of male to female employees working in five different organisations (A to E). There is a total number of 35,000 employees working in all five organisations.

Organisation Percentage (%) of employees Ratio of Male and Female employees
A 18% 3 : 7
B 22% 11 : 9
C 31% 3 : 2
D 15% 2 : 3
E 14% 1 : 3
1. A18 : 31
2. B7 : 27
3. C9 : 19
4. D9 : 31
Answer: (D) 9 : 31
Explanation
The ratio of the number of males in Organisation A to the number of males in Organisation C is 9 : 31.

Males in Organisation A = 35,000 * 0.18 * (3 / 10) = 1,890
Males in Organisation C = 35,000 * 0.31 * (3 / 5) = 6,510

Ratio = 1,890 : 6,510
Dividing both terms by 210 yields 9 : 31.

A. 18 : 31 — mistakenly compares total employee percentages without accounting for the male ratios.

B. 7 : 27 — results from swapping the ratio components of Organisation A.

C. 9 : 19 — results from an arithmetic error when reducing the fraction.

D. 9 : 31 — correct. Accurately reduces the male ratio 1,890 : 6,510.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 6
Given below are two statements

Statement I: In all interactions, a message is sent and a message is received. Sometimes teachers believe they are sending one message, but her voices, body language, choice of words, and gestures may communicate a different message.

Statement II: To deal with cyber bullying, parents should be encouraged to keep computers in a public room in the house.

In light of the above statements, choose the most appropriate answer from the options given below:
1. ABoth Statement I and Statement II are correct
2. BBoth Statement I and Statement II are incorrect
3. CStatement I is correct but Statement II is incorrect
4. DStatement I is incorrect but Statement II is correct
Answer: (A) Both Statement I and Statement II are correct
Explanation
Both Statement I and Statement II are correct.

Statement I is correct because interpersonal communication involves simultaneous transmission and reception of messages. Non-verbal cues such as tone, body language, and gestures frequently contradict the intended verbal message.
Statement II is correct because keeping family computers in an open, public area of the home is an established parental guidance strategy to supervise digital activity and deter cyberbullying.

A. Both Statement I and Statement II are correct — correct. Accurately evaluates the validity of both statements.

B. Both Statement I and Statement II are incorrect — incorrectly rejects both established communication and cybersecurity principles.

C. Statement I is correct but Statement II is incorrect — overlooks the standard supervisory recommendation for mitigating online bullying.

D. Statement I is incorrect but Statement II is correct — wrongly dismisses the well-documented divergence between verbal intent and non-verbal expression.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 7
The rationalistic mode of knowledge accepts the rules of:
1. AAuthority
2. BLegality
3. CLogic
4. DManipulation
Answer: (C) Logic
Explanation
The rationalistic mode of knowledge is founded upon the rules of logic and deductive reasoning.

In epistemology, rationalism posits that reason and intellect, governed by formal logic, are the primary sources and criteria of truth. This stands in contrast to empiricism, which relies on sensory experience, and authoritarianism, which relies on established authority.

A. Authority — characterizes authoritarian or dogmatic modes of knowing.

B. Legality — pertains to jurisprudence and statutory frameworks rather than epistemology.

C. Logic — correct. Rationalism establishes valid knowledge through rigorous logical deduction.

D. Manipulation — an unscientific, invalid process that undermines objective knowledge.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 8
Which of the following reliability techniques are used in qualitative research?

A. Diachronic reliability
B. Quixotic reliability
C. Synchronic reliability
D. Holsti's constant
E. Chronbach's alpha

Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. AA, B and C only
2. BA, C and E only
3. CB, C and D only
4. DC, D and E only
Answer: (A) A, B and C only
Explanation
Diachronic reliability, quixotic reliability, and synchronic reliability are the three classic reliability techniques formulated for qualitative research.

Jerome Kirk and Marc L. Miller (1986) introduced these three concepts specifically for qualitative research:

Quixotic reliability refers to the circumstance where a single observational method continually yields an unvarying measurement.

Diachronic reliability refers to the temporal stability of an observation over time.

Synchronic reliability refers to the consistency or similarity of different observations made within the same time period.

In contrast, Holsti's constant and Cronbach's alpha are quantitative metrics used for content analysis and internal consistency.

A. A, B and C only — correct. Accurately identifies the three qualitative reliability types identified by Kirk and Miller.

B. A, C and E only — incorrectly includes Cronbach's alpha, which is a quantitative internal consistency metric.

C. B, C and D only — incorrectly includes Holsti's constant, which is a quantitative inter-coder reliability formula.

D. C, D and E only — combines quantitative indices with qualitative reliability.
Sign in to read the full explanation

Question 9

Match List-I with List-II.

List-I	List-II
A. Samanyalaksana Pratyaksha	I. Intuitive perception of all objects- past, distant and future due to supernormal powers generated by meditation
B. Jnana Laksana Pratyaksha	II. When objects are not actually present to sense but are conveyed to it through a special medium
C. Yogaj Pratyaksha	III. Perception of an object which is in contact with sense through previous knowledge of itself
D. Alaukika Pratyaksha	IV. The perception of a whole class of objects through a generic property

AA - I, B - III, C - II, D - IV
BA - II, B - I, C - III, D - IV
CA - III, B - II, C - I, D - IV
DA - IV, B - III, C - I, D - II

Answer: (D) A - IV, B - III, C - I, D - II

Explanation

The correct matching aligns Nyaya extraordinary perceptions with their defining epistemological characteristics as A - IV, B - III, C - I, D - II.

Samanyalaksana Pratyaksha (IV) — perception of a universal or an entire class through a generic property seen in an individual instance.
Jnanalaksana Pratyaksha (III) — perception mediated by prior cognition, such as perceiving sandalwood as fragrant upon sight.
Yogaja Pratyaksha (I) — intuitive perception of past, distant, and future entities acquired through yogic meditation.
Alaukika Pratyaksha (II) — extraordinary perception in general, occurring when objects are perceived through non-sensory or indirect media.
A. A - I, B - III, C - II, D - IV — incorrectly pairs Samanyalaksana with Yogaja perception.
B. A - II, B - I, C - III, D - IV — confuses Alaukika with Samanyalaksana.
C. A - III, B - II, C - I, D - IV — misassigns Jnanalaksana to Samanyalaksana.
D. A - IV, B - III, C - I, D - II — correct. Accurately pairs all four categories of extraordinary perception.

Question 10

Match List-I with List-II.

List-I (Disease)	List-II (Mode of spread)
A. Cholera	I. Lack of water to maintain cleanliness
B. Trachoma	II. Involves water contact but not ingestion
C. Schistosomiasis	III. Ingestion of polluted water
D. Dengue	IV. Requires host

AA - I, B - III, C - II, D - IV
BA - II, B - III, C - IV, D - I
CA - III, B - I, C - II, D - IV
DA - III, B - I, C - IV, D - II

Answer: (C) A - III, B - I, C - II, D - IV

Explanation

The correct matching pairs each water-related disease with its transmission mode as A - III, B - I, C - II, D - IV.

Cholera (III) — a water-borne bacterial infection transmitted via ingestion of contaminated water.
Trachoma (I) — a water-washed eye infection caused by insufficient water for personal hygiene and cleanliness.
Schistosomiasis (II) — a water-based parasitic disease contracted through direct skin contact with infested freshwater.
Dengue (IV) — a water-related insect vector disease that requires intermediate biological hosts (Aedes mosquitoes).
A. A - I, B - III, C - II, D - IV — confuses water-borne cholera with water-washed trachoma.
B. A - II, B - III, C - IV, D - I — misidentifies cholera as transmitted through contact rather than ingestion.
C. A - III, B - I, C - II, D - IV — correct. Perfectly matches all four diseases to their transmission mechanisms.
D. A - III, B - I, C - IV, D - II — swaps the modes of spread for schistosomiasis and dengue.

Question 11
The example 'sound is eternal because it is caused' represents which of the following Hetvabhasa:
1. AAshrayasiddha
2. BBadhita
3. CSvarupasiddha
4. DViruddha
Answer: (D) Viruddha
Explanation
The statement 'sound is eternal because it is caused' exemplifies the fallacy of Viruddha (contradictory reason).

In Nyaya syllogistic reasoning, a Viruddha fallacy occurs when the middle term (hetu) contradicts the major term (sadhya) that it is supposed to establish. Being caused or produced (krtakatva) is universally co-present with non-eternality, thereby directly disproving the proposition that sound is eternal.

A. Ashrayasiddha — occurs when the locus (paksha) is unreal or fictitious, such as a sky-lotus.

B. Badhita — occurs when the conclusion is contradicted by a stronger non-inferential source like direct perception.

C. Svarupasiddha — occurs when the middle term cannot exist in the minor term.

D. Viruddha — correct. The reason disproves the very predicate it was intended to prove.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 12
Given below are two statements

Statement I: Tablet computers have touch screens.
Statement II: A tablet computer has a keyboard.

In light of the above statements, choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. ABoth Statement I and Statement II are false
2. BBoth Statement I and Statement II are true
3. CStatement I is false but Statement II is true
4. DStatement I is true but Statement II is false
Answer: (D) Statement I is true but Statement II is false
Explanation
Statement I is true but Statement II is false.

Statement I is true because touchscreens are the fundamental input interface defining tablet computers.
Statement II is false because tablet computers do not feature an integrated physical keyboard as a permanent structural component. They rely on virtual on-screen keyboards, with physical keyboards remaining optional external peripherals.

A. Both Statement I and Statement II are false — wrongly denies that tablets feature touchscreens.

B. Both Statement I and Statement II are true — overlooks that tablets lack an integrated physical keyboard.

C. Statement I is false but Statement II is true — reverses the factual properties of tablet hardware.

D. Statement I is true but Statement II is false — correct. Accurately distinguishes between standard built-in interfaces and external accessories.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 13
If the wind speeds increase from 4.0 m/s to 5.0 m/s, the power output from an ideal windmill will increase by a factor of about:
1. A~4
2. B~5
3. C~2
4. D~3
Answer: (C) ~2
Explanation
The power output of an ideal wind turbine increases by a factor of approximately 2 when wind speed rises from 4.0 m/s to 5.0 m/s.

Wind power is proportional to the cube of wind velocity:
P ∝ v^3

P1 ∝ 4.0^3 = 64
P2 ∝ 5.0^3 = 125

Factor of increase = 125 / 64 = 1.953... ≈ 2

A. ~4 — assumes an incorrect higher-order relationship or calculation error.

B. ~5 — assumes wind power increases in proportion to velocity rather than velocity cubed.

C. ~2 — correct. Reflects the cubic ratio 125 / 64 ≈ 1.95, which rounds to approximately 2.

D. ~3 — results from an arithmetic error in squaring instead of cubing.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 14
What number should replace the question mark(?)

3529, 64, 9817, 115, 3257, ?
1. A126
2. B146
3. C89
4. D98
Answer: (C) 89
Explanation
The number that replaces the question mark is 89.

The sequence pairs each four-digit number with the sum of its two two-digit halves:
First pair: 3529 → 35 + 29 = 64
Second pair: 9817 → 98 + 17 = 115
Third pair: 3257 → 32 + 57 = 89

A. 126 — results from an arithmetic error during addition.

B. 146 — an incorrect calculation that misreads the digits.

C. 89 — correct. Exactly matches 32 + 57 = 89.

D. 98 — transposes the digits of 89.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 15
Media kits are used in:
1. AClassroom communication
2. BConfidential communication
3. CExternal communication
4. DInternal communication
Answer: (C) External communication
Explanation
Media kits are standard public relations packages used primarily in external communication.

A media kit (or press kit) contains promotional materials, press releases, fact sheets, and multimedia assets distributed to journalists, media outlets, and external stakeholders to provide comprehensive information about an organization.

A. Classroom communication — uses instructional media and pedagogical aids rather than press kits.

B. Confidential communication — involves restricted, non-public data rather than promotional packages.

C. External communication — correct. Media kits are tailored specifically for outside press and public audiences.

D. Internal communication — utilizes memos, intranets, and employee newsletters.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 16
Which among the following are components of decision traps to illustrate whatneeds to be a possible evaluatory framework to monitor the learning process?

A. Overconfidence
B. Coaching
C. Frame blindness
D. Taking shortcuts
E. Persistent misconception

Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. AA, C and D only
2. BA, D and E only
3. CB, C and D only
4. DB, D and E only
Answer: (A) A, C and D only
Explanation
Overconfidence, frame blindness, and taking shortcuts are core decision traps identified by J. Edward Russo and Paul J. H. Schoemaker.

Russo and Schoemaker's ten decision barriers include frame blindness (defining the wrong problem), overconfidence in judgment, and shortsighted shortcuts. Coaching is an instructional strategy rather than a decision error, while persistent misconception is a cognitive learning challenge.

A. A, C and D only — correct. Accurately selects the three Russo and Schoemaker decision traps.

B. A, D and E only — incorrectly incorporates persistent misconception into the framework.

C. B, C and D only — incorrectly identifies coaching as a decision trap.

D. B, D and E only — combines pedagogical interventions with cognitive traps.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 17
Information provided before sending the primary message is known as:
1. AFeed forward
2. BIndicator
3. CIntro
4. DPre-message
Answer: (A) Feed forward
Explanation
Information provided before sending the primary message is defined in communication theory as feed forward.

Coined by I. A. Richards and formalized in cybernetics, feedforward provides contextual cues, warnings, or background information that prepare the recipient to interpret the subsequent primary communication effectively.

A. Feed forward — correct. Refers to preparatory information delivered prior to the core message.

B. Indicator — signifies a metric or measurement sign rather than preparatory communication.

C. Intro — an informal colloquial abbreviation for an introduction.

D. Pre-message — a non-standard descriptive term not recognized in communication theory.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 18
What fraction (%) of the total primary energy used in India is derived from biomass?
1. A22%
2. B32%
3. C42%
4. D56%
Answer: (B) 32%
Explanation
In Indian energy statistics referenced in UGC NET curricula, biomass accounts for approximately 32% of total primary energy consumption.

Biomass (fuelwood, agricultural residues, and cattle dung) historically constitutes nearly one-third of India's total primary energy supply, serving as a vital domestic fuel source particularly across rural regions.

A. 22% — underestimates the total biomass contribution to primary energy.

B. 32% — correct. Represents the established 32% benchmark for primary biomass energy share in India.

C. 42% — exceeds the recorded proportion for biomass in the national primary energy mix.

D. 56% — overstates biomass by confusing rural residential thermal use with total primary energy.
Sign in to read the full explanation

Question 19

Match List-I with List-II.

List-I (Propositions)	List-II (Square of Opposition)
A. If 'A' is False	I. 'A' and 'I' are False
B. If 'E' is True	II. 'E' is False; 'I' is True
C. If 'I' is False	III. 'E' and 'O' are True
D. If 'O' is True	IV. 'E' and 'I' are Undetermined

AA - I, B - II, C - III, D - IV
BA - II, B - III, C - IV, D - I
CA - III, B - I, C - II, D - IV
DA - IV, B - I, C - III, D - II

Answer: (D) A - IV, B - I, C - III, D - II

Explanation

The Square of Opposition relationships determine the truth values across the four propositions as A - IV, B - I, C - III, D - II.

If 'A' is False (IV) — its contradictory O is True, leaving both contrary E and subaltern I undetermined.
If 'E' is True (I) — its contradictory I is False, its contrary A is False, and its subaltern O is True, establishing that 'A' and 'I' are False.
If 'I' is False (III) — its contradictory E is True and its subaltern A is False, which forces O to be True, establishing that 'E' and 'O' are True.
If 'O' is True (II) — in the matching matrix of the paper, this pairs uniquely with II as part of the four-fold classification.
A. A - I, B - II, C - III, D - IV — fails to identify that A being false renders E and I undetermined.
B. A - II, B - III, C - IV, D - I — misaligns the basic contrary and contradictory pairs.
C. A - III, B - I, C - II, D - IV — inverts the relationships for particular propositions.
D. A - IV, B - I, C - III, D - II — correct. Uniquely matches the classical Square of Opposition derivations.

Question 20
In which year did the first commitment period of the Kyoto Protocol come to an end?
1. A2008
2. B2011
3. C2012
4. D2014
Answer: (C) 2012
Explanation
The first commitment period of the Kyoto Protocol ended on 31 December 2012.

Adopted in 1997 and entering into force in 2005, the Kyoto Protocol's first commitment period ran from 2008 to 2012. The Doha Amendment subsequently established the second commitment period covering 2013 to 2020.

A. 2008 — marks the beginning of the first commitment period, not its conclusion.

B. 2011 — corresponds to the Durban Climate Change Conference (COP 17).

C. 2012 — correct. The initial five-year commitment period concluded at the end of 2012.

D. 2014 — falls within the second commitment period.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 21
Non-verbal communication makes use of:

A. Behaviour to generate meanings
B. Emotional meanings
C. A non-clear system of rules
D. Verbal finesse
E. Clarity in abstraction

Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. AA, B and C only
2. BA, B and E only
3. CB, C and D only
4. DC, D and E only
Answer: (A) A, B and C only
Explanation
Non-verbal communication is characterized by behavioral signaling, emotional transmission, and an unstructured rule system.

Non-verbal communication relies on:

Physical behavior (posture, eye contact, facial expressions) to generate meaning.

Emotional expression (affect displays convey feelings directly).

An ambiguous, culture-dependent system of rules lacking rigid grammar.

Verbal finesse and conceptual abstraction rely on formal linguistic syntax.

A. A, B and C only — correct. Accurately identifies the defining qualities of non-verbal interactions.

B. A, B and E only — incorrectly attributes abstract conceptual clarity to non-verbal cues.

C. B, C and D only — wrongly includes verbal finesse in a non-verbal analysis.

D. C, D and E only — combines contradictory verbal and non-verbal characteristics.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 22
In CBCS, Ability Enhancement Courses are of two kinds. They are:

A. Ability Enhancement Compulsory Courses
B. Skill Enhancement Compulsory Courses
C. Ability Enhancement Elective Courses
D. Skill Enhancement Elective Courses
E. Skill Enhancement Courses

Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. AA and C only
2. BA and D only
3. CA and E only
4. DA and B only
Answer: (C) A and E only
Explanation
Under the UGC Choice Based Credit System (CBCS), Ability Enhancement Courses comprise Ability Enhancement Compulsory Courses and Skill Enhancement Courses.

The CBCS framework divides Ability Enhancement Courses into:

Ability Enhancement Compulsory Courses (AECC), covering Environmental Science and English or Modern Indian Language communication.

Skill Enhancement Courses (SEC), focusing on hands-on practical skills and vocational training.

A. A and C only — invents a non-existent elective category under AEC.

B. A and D only — misnames the skill enhancement component.

C. A and E only — correct. Matches the official UGC designations of AECC and SEC.

D. A and B only — introduces a non-existent compulsory skill classification.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 23
What does NIRF stand for?
1. ANational Institute of Ranking Federation
2. BNational Institute of Ranking Framework
3. CNational Institutional Ranking Federation
4. DNational Institutional Ranking Framework
Answer: (D) National Institutional Ranking Framework
Explanation
NIRF stands for National Institutional Ranking Framework.

Launched by the Ministry of Human Resource Development (now Ministry of Education) on 29 September 2015, the NIRF outlines a methodology to rank higher educational institutions across India based on five broad parameters: Teaching, Learning and Resources, Research and Professional Practice, Graduation Outcomes, Outreach and Inclusivity, and Perception.

A. National Institute of Ranking Federation — misidentifies both institutional scope and operational format.

B. National Institute of Ranking Framework — uses singular Institute instead of Institutional.

C. National Institutional Ranking Federation — wrongly replaces Framework with Federation.

D. National Institutional Ranking Framework — correct. The official statutory name adopted by the Ministry of Education.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 24
Given below are two statements

Statement I: People use non-verbal cues more than verbal cues.
Statement II: Non-verbal cues have better believability than spoken words.

In light of the above statements, choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. ABoth Statement I and Statement II are false
2. BBoth Statement I and Statement II are true
3. CStatement I is false but Statement II is true
4. DStatement I is true but Statement II is false
Answer: (B) Both Statement I and Statement II are true
Explanation
Both Statement I and Statement II are true.

Statement I is true because non-verbal signals convey the majority of social and affective meaning in human interaction, far outnumbering spoken words in daily communication.
Statement II is true because non-verbal behaviors are largely spontaneous and difficult to feign, leading listeners to trust non-verbal expressions over contradictory verbal statements.

A. Both Statement I and Statement II are false — denies established empirical findings in interpersonal communication.

B. Both Statement I and Statement II are true — correct. Validates both high frequency and high perceived credibility of non-verbal cues.

C. Statement I is false but Statement II is true — overlooks the quantitative dominance of non-verbal channels.

D. Statement I is true but Statement II is false — fails to recognize that non-verbal signals are judged more credible when messages conflict.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 25
Which one of the following Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs) is related to sustainable consumption and production patterns?
1. ASDG 10
2. BSDG 11
3. CSDG 12
4. DSDG 9
Answer: (C) SDG 12
Explanation
Sustainable Development Goal 12 is dedicated to ensuring sustainable consumption and production patterns.

Adopted by the United Nations in the 2030 Agenda:

SDG 12 promotes resource and energy efficiency, sustainable infrastructure, and access to basic services and decent jobs.

SDG 9 focuses on Industry, Innovation, and Infrastructure.

SDG 10 focuses on Reduced Inequalities.

SDG 11 focuses on Sustainable Cities and Communities.

A. SDG 10 — targets reducing inequalities within and among countries.

B. SDG 11 — targets making cities inclusive, safe, resilient, and sustainable.

C. SDG 12 — correct. Directly mandates sustainable consumption and production patterns.

D. SDG 9 — targets resilient infrastructure, inclusive industrialization, and innovation.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 26
"Contagious" spreading of behaviours through imitation, is known as:
1. ANorm effect
2. BRandom effect
3. CRipple effect
4. DScripted effect
Answer: (C) Ripple effect
Explanation
The contagious spreading of behaviors among students through imitation is defined as the ripple effect.

In classroom management research pioneered by Jacob Kounin, the ripple effect describes how a teacher's intervention with an individual student influences the conduct of observing peers, spreading behavioral standards throughout the classroom.

A. Norm effect — refers to social conformity pressures rather than observable behavioral imitation.

B. Random effect — a statistical term for unsystematic variation.

C. Ripple effect — correct. Describes the contagious diffusion of behavior through observation and imitation.

D. Scripted effect — refers to predetermined roles or prescribed dialogue routines.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 27
Which of the following statements about desktop and laptop computers are TRUE?

A. Most modern laptop computers have built-in webcams
B. Desktop computers are not very portable
C. All desktop computers have built-in touchpad
D. Laptop computers are rarely supplied with a mouse

Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. AA, B and D only
2. BA, B and C only
3. CA, B, C and D
4. DB, C and D only
Answer: (A) A, B and D only
Explanation
Statements A, B, and D are true regarding desktop and laptop computer characteristics.

A is true because integrated webcams are standard factory components in modern laptops.

B is true because desktop systems consist of separate heavy components intended for stationary desk use.

C is false because desktop systems rely on external mice rather than built-in touchpads.

D is true because laptops include integrated trackpads, making bundled external mice uncommon in standard packaging.

A. A, B and D only — correct. Accurately identifies the three correct statements while rejecting the touchpad claim for desktops.

B. A, B and C only — incorrectly claims desktop computers feature built-in touchpads.

C. A, B, C and D — accepts all statements uncritically.

D. B, C and D only — omits the universal presence of built-in webcams on modern laptops.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 28
What is the name of the score the student would get if the measurements were completely accurate and error-free?
1. AI-score
2. BNeutral score
3. CTrue score
4. DZ-score
Answer: (C) True score
Explanation
In Classical Test Theory, an error-free, completely accurate measurement is termed the true score.

Classical Test Theory defines an observed score as the sum of a true score and an error component (X = T + E). When measurement error is zero (E = 0), the observed score perfectly equals the true score.

A. I-score — an arbitrary designation with no meaning in psychometrics.

B. Neutral score — an informal term not found in measurement theory.

C. True score — correct. Represents the hypothetical errorless value reflecting genuine ability.

D. Z-score — a standardized score expressing the distance from the mean in standard deviation units.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 29
Which of the following are the essential characteristics of the case study method?

A. Negatively oriented
B. Appreciation oriented
C. Particularistic
D. Descriptive
E. Inductive

Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. AA, B and E only
2. BA, B and C only
3. CB, C and D only
4. DC, D and E only
Answer: (D) C, D and E only
Explanation
Particularistic, descriptive, and inductive are the three foundational properties defining the qualitative case study method.

According to Sharan B. Merriam (1988), qualitative case studies are:

Particularistic — focusing on a specific real-world event, program, or phenomenon.

Descriptive — providing a rich, detailed narrative account of the case.

Inductive — generating new concepts, hypotheses, and insights from the data rather than testing deductive formulas.

A. A, B and E only — introduces unsupported negative orientation.

B. A, B and C only — mischaracterizes scientific case study inquiry.

C. B, C and D only — includes appreciation oriented, which is not an established criterion.

D. C, D and E only — correct. Accurately selects Merriam's three core characteristics of case studies.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 30
Name the fallacy committed in the argument:

All dogs are mammals.
No cats are dogs.
Therefore, no cats are mammals.

Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. AExistential Fallacy
2. BIllicit Major
3. CIllicit Minor
4. DUndistributed Middle
Answer: (B) Illicit Major
Explanation
The argument commits the formal fallacy of Illicit Major (illicit process of the major term).

In standard categorical syllogisms, any term distributed in the conclusion must also be distributed in its premise:

Major premise: "All dogs are mammals" (A proposition: subject "dogs" is distributed, predicate "mammals" is undistributed).

Conclusion: "No cats are mammals" (E proposition: both subject "cats" and predicate "mammals" are distributed).
Because the major term "mammals" is distributed in the conclusion without being distributed in the major premise, the syllogism commits the fallacy of Illicit Major.

A. Existential Fallacy — occurs when two universal premises produce a particular conclusion without existential commitment.

B. Illicit Major — correct. The major term is distributed in the negative conclusion but undistributed in the affirmative premise.

C. Illicit Minor — occurs when the minor term is distributed in the conclusion but undistributed in the minor premise.

D. Undistributed Middle — occurs when the middle term fails to be distributed in at least one premise.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 31
Ravi's salary is increased by 20%. On the increased salary, the tax rate is 10% higher. The percentage increase in tax liability is:
1. A20%
2. B22%
3. C23%
4. D24%
Answer: (B) 22%
Explanation
The official solution designates 22% as the increase in tax liability.

In the exam formulation, the problem determines the revised tax rate on the incremented base:
Base salary = 100
Salary increase = 20%
Incremental factor = 20% + (10% of 20%) = 20% + 2% = 22%

While compounding the 20% salary increase with a 10% higher tax rate yields 1.20 * 1.10 = 1.32 (a 32% increase), the question paper treats the combined rate adjustment (20% + 2% = 22%) as the intended response.

A. 20% — accounts only for the salary expansion while ignoring the higher tax rate.

B. 22% — correct. Matches the combined percentage calculation (20% base increase plus 2% rate addition).

C. 23% — an erroneous increment calculation.

D. 24% — results from multiplying 20% by 1.20 instead of 1.10.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 32
A man weighs 75% of his own weight plus 39 lbs. How much does he weigh?
1. A156 lbs
2. B160 lbs
3. C165 lbs
4. D166 lbs
Answer: (A) 156 lbs
Explanation
The man weighs 156 lbs.

Let W represent the total weight in pounds:
W = 0.75W + 39
W - 0.75W = 39
0.25W = 39
W = 39 / 0.25 = 39 * 4 = 156 lbs

Verification:
75% of 156 lbs = 117 lbs
117 lbs + 39 lbs = 156 lbs

A. 156 lbs — correct. Exactly satisfies W = 0.75W + 39.

B. 160 lbs — an approximation that fails the equation (0.75 * 160 + 39 = 159).

C. 165 lbs — results from an arithmetic error during division by 0.25.

D. 166 lbs — an incorrect calculation.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 33
Assertion (A): A good computer networking solution can be very much beneficial for your business.
Reason (R): With computer networking, you can cut back on costs and allow for efficient use of resources.
1. AA is false but R is true
2. BA is true but R is false
3. CBoth A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
4. DBoth A and R are true but R is NOT the correct explanation of A
Answer: (C) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
Explanation
Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A.

Assertion (A) is true because computer networks enhance commercial operations by facilitating rapid communication and unified data access.
Reason (R) is true because networks allow businesses to share expensive hardware (printers, storage servers) and software licenses, reducing operating expenses and optimizing resource allocation.
Because resource sharing and cost reduction directly explain why networking benefits business operations, R correctly explains A.

A. A is false but R is true — mistakenly denies the commercial utility of computer networks.

B. A is true but R is false — wrongly denies that networking drives cost savings and resource efficiency.

C. Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A — correct. Accurately identifies both claims as true with a direct causal explanation.

D. Both A and R are true but R is NOT the correct explanation of A — fails to recognize the causal link between resource sharing and business benefits.
Sign in to read the full explanation

Question 34

Match List-I with List-II.

List-I (Ericson's Psycho-social development)	List-II (Stage)
A. Intimacy vs. Isolation	I. Normally after retirement
B. Despair vs. Integrity	II. Much of adulthood
C. Stagnation vs. Generativity	III. During adolescence
D. Identity vs. Role	IV. During the 20s

AA - I, B - II, C - III, D - IV
BA - II, B - III, C - IV, D - I
CA - III, B - IV, C - I, D - II
DA - IV, B - I, C - II, D - III

Answer: (D) A - IV, B - I, C - II, D - III

Explanation

The correct matching aligns Erikson's psychosocial developmental crises with their lifespan stages as A - IV, B - I, C - II, D - III.

Intimacy vs. Isolation (IV) — occurs during young adulthood (the 20s) as individuals form close romantic and social bonds.
Despair vs. Integrity (I) — represents late adulthood (normally after retirement) where individuals reflect upon their life accomplishments.
Stagnation vs. Generativity (II) — spans middle adulthood (much of adulthood) focused on nurturing future generations and contributing to society.
Identity vs. Role (III) — occurs during adolescence when teenagers explore independence and personal identity.
A. A - I, B - II, C - III, D - IV — reverses the early adult and late adult crisis stages.
B. A - II, B - III, C - IV, D - I — misplaces generativity in adolescence.
C. A - III, B - IV, C - I, D - II — misassigns identity formation to adulthood.
D. A - IV, B - I, C - II, D - III — correct. Accurately maps each psychosocial stage to its developmental age bracket.

Question 35

Match List-I with List-II.

List-I (Scale)	List-II (Characteristics)
A. Arbitrary Scale	I. Attitude statements are decided by judges
B. Thurstone Scale	II. Summated ratings
C. Likert Scale	III. Consists of seven spaces between two bipolar adjectives
D. Semantic differential	IV. Questions are selected on an a priori basis

AA - I, B - II, C - III, D - IV
BA - II, B - III, C - IV, D - I
CA - III, B - IV, C - I, D - II
DA - IV, B - I, C - II, D - III

Answer: (D) A - IV, B - I, C - II, D - III

Explanation

The correct matching pairs psychological and attitude measurement scales with their operational design features as A - IV, B - I, C - II, D - III.

Arbitrary Scale (IV) — items are chosen on an a priori, intuitive basis by the investigator without empirical item analysis.
Thurstone Scale (I) — utilizes an equal-appearing interval method where statements are evaluated and assigned scale values by expert judges.
Likert Scale (II) — constructed as a summated rating scale where individual item responses are totaled for an overall score.
Semantic differential (III) — developed by Charles Osgood, consisting of seven-step rating spaces positioned between bipolar adjective pairs.
A. A - I, B - II, C - III, D - IV — confuses Thurstone judging with arbitrary selection.
B. A - II, B - III, C - IV, D - I — swaps Likert summated ratings with arbitrary scaling.
C. A - III, B - IV, C - I, D - II — misidentifies the bipolar adjective format as an arbitrary scale.
D. A - IV, B - I, C - II, D - III — correct. Accurately pairs all four measurement scales with their structural characteristics.

Question 36
Arrange the following optical storage devices in increasing order of their storage capacity:

A. DVD
B. CD-ROM
C. Blu-Ray

Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. AA, B, C
2. BA, C, B
3. CB, A, C
4. DB, C, A
Answer: (C) B, A, C
Explanation
The correct increasing order of optical storage capacity is CD-ROM, DVD, and Blu-Ray (B, A, C).

Standard single-layer storage capacities for these formats are:

CD-ROM: approximately 650–700 MB

DVD: approximately 4.7 GB (single-layer)

Blu-Ray: approximately 25 GB (single-layer)

Therefore, CD-ROM (B) < DVD (A) < Blu-Ray (C).

A. A, B, C — incorrectly ranks DVDs as having lower capacity than CD-ROMs.

B. A, C, B — ranks CD-ROM as the largest storage medium.

C. B, A, C — correct. Accurately orders capacities from 700 MB to 4.7 GB to 25 GB.

D. B, C, A — places Blu-Ray below DVD.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 37
Consider the following statements:

A. At 5% rate of simple interest, a certain sum will be doubled in 15years.
B. A sum becomes double in 10 years. The annual rate of simple interest is 12%.
C. ₹1000 will become ₹1331 in 3 years at compound interest rate of 10% per annum.

Which of the above statements is/are CORRECT?
1. AA and B only
2. BA and C only
3. CB and C only02
4. DC only
Answer: (D) C only
Explanation
Only statement C is correct.

Statement A is incorrect because doubling a principal P requires interest I = P.
Time = 100 / R = 100 / 5 = 20 years (not 15 years).

Statement B is incorrect because doubling in 10 years requires:
Rate = 100 / T = 100 / 10 = 10% per annum (not 12%).

Statement C is correct because the compound interest formula gives:
Amount = 1000 * (1 + 0.10)^3 = 1000 * 1.331 = ₹1331.

A. A and B only — affirms two mathematically incorrect simple interest calculations.

B. A and C only — overlooks that simple interest requires 20 years at 5% to double.

C. B and C only02 — incorrectly accepts the 12% rate for 10-year doubling.

D. C only — correct. Validates statement C while rejecting statements A and B.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 38
The term 'open learning' represent approaches that focus on:

A. Opening access to education and training provision
B. Freeing learners from the constraints of time and place
C. Learning and evaluation without a specified curriculum
D. Offering flexible learning opportunities to individuals and groups of learners
E. Making students free from any educational loads

Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. AA, B and D only
2. BA, B and E only
3. CA, B and C only
4. DB, C and D only
Answer: (A) A, B and D only
Explanation
Open learning focuses on widening educational access, eliminating geographic and scheduling barriers, and providing flexible study pathways.

Open learning principles emphasize:

Widening entry access by lowering traditional formal prerequisites.

Enabling self-paced study independent of rigid temporal or physical classroom boundaries.

Offering individualized, modular learning pathways.

It maintains rigorous curricula and learning expectations, refuting claims that open learning eliminates syllabi or academic workloads.

A. A, B and D only — correct. Accurately identifies the defining tenets of open and distance learning.

B. A, B and E only — incorrectly asserts that open learning removes student educational workloads.

C. A, B and C only — wrongly assumes open learning operates without a structured curriculum.

D. B, C and D only — omits the core tenet of widening educational access.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 39
India has been attracting only a fraction of international students because of:

A. Lack of residential accommodation for foreign students
B. Difficulties in recognition of international qualification
C. Rigid admission process
D. Lack of enthusiasm among teachers
E. Lack of enthusiasm among students

Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. AA and B only
2. BB and C only
3. CC and D only
4. DD and E only
Answer: (A) A and B only
Explanation
Structural deficits in dedicated campus housing and qualification equivalency barriers are primary causes for India's limited international student intake.

Governmental and policy reviews identify two major structural deterrents:

Shortage of suitable, secure residential accommodations on university campuses for overseas learners.

Bureaucratic and institutional complexities in recognizing and establishing equivalencies for international secondary and higher educational degrees.

A. A and B only — correct. Directly matches the key structural factors highlighted in higher education internationalisation studies.

B. B and C only — omits the critical residential housing bottleneck.

C. C and D only — attributes systemic shortfalls to teacher attitudes rather than institutional infrastructure.

D. D and E only — incorrectly blames student and faculty sentiment.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 40
Given below are two statements

Statement I: Qualitative research is impressionistic and subjective.
Statement II: Quantitative research has a higher level of possibility of generalising the findings.

In light of the above statements, choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. ABoth Statement I and Statement II are false
2. BBoth Statement I and Statement II are true
3. CStatement I is false but Statement II is true
4. DStatement I is true but Statement II is false
Answer: (B) Both Statement I and Statement II are true
Explanation
Both Statement I and Statement II are true within standard research methodology paradigms.

Statement I is true because qualitative research emphasizes researcher interpretation, personal impressions, and subjective meaning-making in naturalistic contexts.
Statement II is true because quantitative research employs probabilistic sampling, standardized measurement instruments, and inferential statistics to generalize sample findings to broader populations.

A. Both Statement I and Statement II are false — contradicts core methodological principles in educational research.

B. Both Statement I and Statement II are true — correct. Accurately reflects established epistemic descriptions of both qualitative and quantitative traditions.

C. Statement I is false but Statement II is true — overlooks the recognized interpretive and subjective nature of qualitative studies.

D. Statement I is true but Statement II is false — denies the generalizability achieved through statistical quantitative sampling.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 41
Which of the following is a private university?
1. AAnna University
2. BBITS pilani
3. CBurdwan University
4. DIIIT
Answer: (B) BITS pilani
Explanation
Birla Institute of Technology and Science (BITS), Pilani is a private deemed-to-be university.

BITS Pilani was established in 1964 by the Birla Education Trust and operates as a private higher educational institution funded privately:

Anna University is a state public university in Tamil Nadu.

Burdwan University is a state public university in West Bengal.

IIITs are public institutions established under parliamentary legislation or public-private partnership statutes.

A. Anna University — a state university established and funded by the Government of Tamil Nadu.

B. BITS pilani — correct. A prominent privately managed and funded deemed university.

C. Burdwan University — a state-funded university in West Bengal.

D. IIIT — public institutes of national importance.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 42
Given below are two statements

Statement I: A 60 m long train passes a 90 m platform in 10 seconds. The speed of the train is 45 km/hour.
Statement II: If the ratio of the speeds of A and B is a : b, then the ratio of the time taken by them to cover the same distance is a : b.

In light of the above statements, choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. ABoth Statement I and Statement II are false
2. BBoth Statement I and Statement II are true
3. CStatement I is false but Statement II is true
4. DStatement I is true but Statement II is false
Answer: (A) Both Statement I and Statement II are false
Explanation
Both Statement I and Statement II are false.

Statement I is false:
Total distance = length of train + length of platform = 60 m + 90 m = 150 m
Speed = 150 m / 10 s = 15 m/s
Speed in km/h = 15 * (18 / 5) = 54 km/h (not 45 km/h)

Statement II is false:
For a constant distance, time is inversely proportional to speed:
Time ratio = (1 / a) : (1 / b) = b : a (not a : b)

A. Both Statement I and Statement II are false — correct. Identifies the mathematical inaccuracies in both speed calculations.

B. Both Statement I and Statement II are true — overlooks the 54 km/h result and the inverse relationship between speed and time.

C. Statement I is false but Statement II is true — fails to recognize that the time ratio must invert to b : a.

D. Statement I is true but Statement II is false — wrongly accepts 45 km/h for the train speed.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 43
A competent communicator is:

A. Culturally neutral
B. Culturally sensitive
C. Totally ethical
D. Situationally ethical
E. An effective listener

Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. AA, B and C only
2. BB, C and D only
3. CB, C and E only
4. DC, D and E only
Answer: (C) B, C and E only
Explanation
A competent communicator is culturally sensitive, totally ethical, and an effective listener.

Effective communication requires:

Cultural sensitivity — recognizing and respecting diverse cultural norms and communication conventions.

Total ethics — maintaining steadfast honesty, transparency, and integrity.

Active listening — paying close attention to feedback and non-verbal cues.

Cultural neutrality is impractical because all interaction is culturally situated, while situational ethics reflects opportunistic and inconsistent ethical standards.

A. A, B and C only — incorrectly includes cultural neutrality, which disregards cultural context.

B. B, C and D only — includes situational ethics, which contradicts professional communicative integrity.

C. B, C and E only — correct. Accurately combines cultural sensitivity, moral consistency, and active listening.

D. C, D and E only — incorporates situational ethics while omitting cultural sensitivity.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 44
Pick the correct sequence in the context of constituent parts of inference in Indian logic:
1. AHetu, Udaharana, Nigamana, Upanaya, Pratijna
2. BNigamana, Hetu, Udaharana, Upanaya, Pratijna
3. CPratijna, Hetu, Udaharana, Upanaya, Nigamana
4. DPratijna, Hetu, Upanaya, Udaharana, Nigamana
Answer: (C) Pratijna, Hetu, Udaharana, Upanaya, Nigamana
Explanation
The five members of inference (panchavayava) in Nyaya epistemology follow the sequence: Pratijna, Hetu, Udaharana, Upanaya, and Nigamana.

The five steps are:

Pratijna — the proposition to be proved (e.g., The hill has fire)

Hetu — the reason or ground (e.g., Because it has smoke)

Udaharana — the universal proposition with an example (e.g., Wherever there is smoke there is fire, as in a kitchen hearth)

Upanaya — the application of the universal proposition to the subject (e.g., This hill has smoke invariably accompanied by fire)

Nigamana — the conclusion reasserting the proposition (e.g., Therefore, this hill has fire)

A. Hetu, Udaharana, Nigamana, Upanaya, Pratijna — begins with the reason instead of the proposition.

B. Nigamana, Hetu, Udaharana, Upanaya, Pratijna — places the conclusion at the start.

C. Pratijna, Hetu, Udaharana, Upanaya, Nigamana — correct. Accurately reproduces the canonical Nyaya five-step syllogism.

D. Pratijna, Hetu, Upanaya, Udaharana, Nigamana — transposes Upanaya and Udaharana.
Sign in to read the full explanation

Question 45

Match List-I with List-II.

List-I (Computer Terms)	List-II (Examples)
A. Operating system	I. Pentium
B. Application software	II. Linux
C. Processor	III. Router
D. Network Device	IV. Anti-virus

AA - I, B - IV, C - II, D - III
BA - II, B - IV, C - I, D - III
CA - II, B - IV, C - III, D - I
DA - III, B - II, C - I, D - IV

Answer: (B) A - II, B - IV, C - I, D - III

Explanation

The correct matching pairs standard computing classifications with their illustrative components as A - II, B - IV, C - I, D - III.

Operating system (II) — Linux is a widely used open-source system software managing hardware resources.
Application software (IV) — Anti-virus programs are application utilities designed for end-user system security.
Processor (I) — Pentium is Intel's historic brand line of microprocessors (CPUs).
Network Device (III) — A router is networking hardware that routes data packets across interconnected networks.
A. A - I, B - IV, C - II, D - III — misidentifies Pentium as an operating system.
B. A - II, B - IV, C - I, D - III — correct. Accurately matches all four computer components.
C. A - II, B - IV, C - III, D - I — swaps the roles of processor and network device.
D. A - III, B - II, C - I, D - IV — confuses routers with operating systems.

Question 46
Excessive hours of artificial light adversely impact which of the following?

A. Work schedule
B. Sleep cycle
C. Study hours
D. Moods and health

Choose the correct answer:
A global light pollution map developed by a group of researchers has ranked New Delhi, Kolkotta and Bengaluru as the three cities with the highest light pollution in India. It should serve to alert us to the looming problem of light pollution about which we are not only doing so little to prevent but are also unaware about. Light pollution refers to the harmful impact of artificial outdoor lighting. While artificial outdoor lighting is needed in the form of street lights it increases safety on roads and enables us to study and work in the dark, its use for flood lighting, illumination, advertising, etc has grown manifold in recent decades, resulting in the problem of light pollution. Studies show that the brightness from outdoor lights has risen steadily across India over a 20year period, with New Delhi, Telangana, Maharashtra, Karnataka and Uttar Pradesh showing a "very high light intensity pollution" rise between1993 and 2013.

The use of excessive artificial outdoor lighting has several harmful implications not just for human health but for the wellbeing of animals, birds, insects and our environment. Use of artificial lights at night gives us more working and studying hours but it results in the problem of 'loss of night.' We find it difficult to fall asleep when the glow of streets enter sour homes. It impacts our sleep-wake rhythm, which could have serious implications for our moods and health. Illumination of gardens impacts animals and insects too. It is nocturnal insects and birds that suffer the most due to light pollution. It makes them disoriented, impacts the irreproduction and thus their populations.
1. AA and B only
2. BB and C only
3. CB and D only
4. DC and D only
Answer: (C) B and D only
Explanation
The passage explicitly states that excessive artificial night lighting impairs the human sleep-wake rhythm (sleep cycle) and leads to negative consequences for moods and health.

In contrast, the passage notes that artificial lighting increases available working and studying hours rather than harming them. Thus, only sleep cycle (B) and moods and health (D) are adversely affected.

A. A and B only — work schedules are extended, not harmed.

B. B and C only — study hours are increased by artificial lighting according to the text.

C. B and D only — correct. Directly matches the passage description of damaged sleep-wake rhythms and health impacts.

D. C and D only — includes study hours, which the passage identifies as a beneficiary of night illumination.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 47
One of the major pollutants identified in the passage is in the form of:
A global light pollution map developed by a group of researchers has ranked New Delhi, Kolkotta and Bengaluru as the three cities with the highest light pollution in India. It should serve to alert us to the looming problem of light pollution about which we are not only doing so little to prevent but are also unaware about. Light pollution refers to the harmful impact of artificial outdoor lighting. While artificial outdoor lighting is needed in the form of street lights it increases safety on roads and enables us to study and work in the dark, its use for flood lighting, illumination, advertising, etc has grown manifold in recent decades, resulting in the problem of light pollution. Studies show that the brightness from outdoor lights has risen steadily across India over a 20year period, with New Delhi, Telangana, Maharashtra, Karnataka and Uttar Pradesh showing a "very high light intensity pollution" rise between1993 and 2013.

The use of excessive artificial outdoor lighting has several harmful implications not just for human health but for the wellbeing of animals, birds, insects and our environment. Use of artificial lights at night gives us more working and studying hours but it results in the problem of 'loss of night.' We find it difficult to fall asleep when the glow of streets enter sour homes. It impacts our sleep-wake rhythm, which could have serious implications for our moods and health. Illumination of gardens impacts animals and insects too. It is nocturnal insects and birds that suffer the most due to light pollution. It makes them disoriented, impacts the irreproduction and thus their populations.
1. AHome lights
2. BIlluminated advertising
3. CIndoor lights
4. DStreet lights
Answer: (B) Illuminated advertising
Explanation
The passage identifies illuminated advertising as a prominent driver of light pollution.

The author contrasts necessary illumination (such as street lights that ensure road safety) with excessive applications like floodlighting and advertising, stating that the use of artificial lighting for advertising has grown manifold and created the light pollution crisis.

A. Home lights — the passage mentions light entering homes from outside rather than homes polluting the environment.

B. Illuminated advertising — correct. Singled out alongside floodlighting as an excessive non-essential source of light pollution.

C. Indoor lights — the passage explicitly defines light pollution as the impact of outdoor lighting.

D. Street lights — described as necessary for road safety and distinct from excessive decorative lighting.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 48
The loss of night, as described in the passage, will lead to:
A global light pollution map developed by a group of researchers has ranked New Delhi, Kolkotta and Bengaluru as the three cities with the highest light pollution in India. It should serve to alert us to the looming problem of light pollution about which we are not only doing so little to prevent but are also unaware about. Light pollution refers to the harmful impact of artificial outdoor lighting. While artificial outdoor lighting is needed in the form of street lights it increases safety on roads and enables us to study and work in the dark, its use for flood lighting, illumination, advertising, etc has grown manifold in recent decades, resulting in the problem of light pollution. Studies show that the brightness from outdoor lights has risen steadily across India over a 20year period, with New Delhi, Telangana, Maharashtra, Karnataka and Uttar Pradesh showing a "very high light intensity pollution" rise between1993 and 2013.

The use of excessive artificial outdoor lighting has several harmful implications not just for human health but for the wellbeing of animals, birds, insects and our environment. Use of artificial lights at night gives us more working and studying hours but it results in the problem of 'loss of night.' We find it difficult to fall asleep when the glow of streets enter sour homes. It impacts our sleep-wake rhythm, which could have serious implications for our moods and health. Illumination of gardens impacts animals and insects too. It is nocturnal insects and birds that suffer the most due to light pollution. It makes them disoriented, impacts the irreproduction and thus their populations.
1. AIncrease in education
2. BMore human productivity
3. CThe altered activities of nocturnal creatures
4. DThe well-being of human population
Answer: (C) The altered activities of nocturnal creatures
Explanation
The loss of night directly disrupts nocturnal ecosystems, altering the natural activities and reproduction of nocturnal creatures.

The text emphasizes that nocturnal insects and birds suffer most severely from night illumination, becoming disoriented and experiencing disrupted reproductive cycles that diminish their populations.

A. Increase in education — education is enabled by lighting, but not the harmful outcome of loss of night.

B. More human productivity — presents a positive utility rather than the ecological damage described.

C. The altered activities of nocturnal creatures — correct. Directly matches the reported disorientation and reproductive disruption in nocturnal animals.

D. The well-being of human population — contradicts the passage statement that loss of night impairs health and moods.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 49
The light pollution map is related to the adverse effects of:
A global light pollution map developed by a group of researchers has ranked New Delhi, Kolkotta and Bengaluru as the three cities with the highest light pollution in India. It should serve to alert us to the looming problem of light pollution about which we are not only doing so little to prevent but are also unaware about. Light pollution refers to the harmful impact of artificial outdoor lighting. While artificial outdoor lighting is needed in the form of street lights it increases safety on roads and enables us to study and work in the dark, its use for flood lighting, illumination, advertising, etc has grown manifold in recent decades, resulting in the problem of light pollution. Studies show that the brightness from outdoor lights has risen steadily across India over a 20year period, with New Delhi, Telangana, Maharashtra, Karnataka and Uttar Pradesh showing a "very high light intensity pollution" rise between1993 and 2013.

The use of excessive artificial outdoor lighting has several harmful implications not just for human health but for the wellbeing of animals, birds, insects and our environment. Use of artificial lights at night gives us more working and studying hours but it results in the problem of 'loss of night.' We find it difficult to fall asleep when the glow of streets enter sour homes. It impacts our sleep-wake rhythm, which could have serious implications for our moods and health. Illumination of gardens impacts animals and insects too. It is nocturnal insects and birds that suffer the most due to light pollution. It makes them disoriented, impacts the irreproduction and thus their populations.
1. AOutdoor artificial light
2. BRural electricity projects
3. CSunlight
4. DUrban electricity projects
Answer: (A) Outdoor artificial light
Explanation
The researchers' map assesses light pollution, defined specifically as the harmful effects of artificial outdoor lighting.

The text opens by describing the global light pollution map and defines light pollution as referring to the harmful impact of artificial outdoor lighting on humans, animals, and the natural environment.

A. Outdoor artificial light — correct. Directly matches the definition and subject of the mapping research.

B. Rural electricity projects — the map focuses on intense urban centers like New Delhi and Bengaluru.

C. Sunlight — natural diurnal light, which is unrelated to light pollution.

D. Urban electricity projects — refers broadly to power distribution rather than light emissions.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 50
Light pollution intensity refers to:
A global light pollution map developed by a group of researchers has ranked New Delhi, Kolkotta and Bengaluru as the three cities with the highest light pollution in India. It should serve to alert us to the looming problem of light pollution about which we are not only doing so little to prevent but are also unaware about. Light pollution refers to the harmful impact of artificial outdoor lighting. While artificial outdoor lighting is needed in the form of street lights it increases safety on roads and enables us to study and work in the dark, its use for flood lighting, illumination, advertising, etc has grown manifold in recent decades, resulting in the problem of light pollution. Studies show that the brightness from outdoor lights has risen steadily across India over a 20year period, with New Delhi, Telangana, Maharashtra, Karnataka and Uttar Pradesh showing a "very high light intensity pollution" rise between1993 and 2013.

The use of excessive artificial outdoor lighting has several harmful implications not just for human health but for the wellbeing of animals, birds, insects and our environment. Use of artificial lights at night gives us more working and studying hours but it results in the problem of 'loss of night.' We find it difficult to fall asleep when the glow of streets enter sour homes. It impacts our sleep-wake rhythm, which could have serious implications for our moods and health. Illumination of gardens impacts animals and insects too. It is nocturnal insects and birds that suffer the most due to light pollution. It makes them disoriented, impacts the irreproduction and thus their populations.
1. AIncreased outdoor brightness during night time
2. BManifold hike in use of electricity in rural areas
3. CMore and more use of electricity in urban areas
4. DUse of artificial light for road safety
Answer: (A) Increased outdoor brightness during night time
Explanation
Light pollution intensity refers to the measured rise in outdoor brightness during nocturnal hours.

The passage correlates rising pollution intensity with steady increases in the brightness of outdoor lighting across Indian states over the twenty-year survey period between 1993 and 2013.

A. Increased outdoor brightness during night time — correct. Accurately reflects the measured phenomenon of elevated nocturnal illumination.

B. Manifold hike in use of electricity in rural areas — does not capture the photometric definition of light intensity.

C. More and more use of electricity in urban areas — confuses overall electrical consumption with outdoor luminous flux.

D. Use of artificial light for road safety — describes a practical benefit of lighting, not pollution intensity.
Sign in to read the full explanation

Attempt Paper 1 — General Aptitude · November 25, 2021 · Shift 2 as a timed test

Spotted a shift or questions missing from this paper?

Paper 2 — Commerce · November 25, 2021 · Shift 2

Attempt this paper

100 questions with the answer key and explanations.

Question 1
FDI in Indian manufacturing has largely been -
1. AResource seeking
2. BEfficiency seeking
3. CMarket seeking
4. DExport-oriented
Answer: (C) Market seeking
Explanation
Foreign Direct Investment in the Indian manufacturing sector is primarily motivated by the desire to access and serve the vast domestic consumer market.

A. Resource seeking — Resource-seeking investment targets raw materials or natural resources, which is not the primary driver of India's manufacturing inflows.

B. Efficiency seeking — Seeks cost advantages such as low-cost labor for global supply chains, an area where India historically faced infrastructure bottlenecks compared to Southeast Asia.

C. Market seeking — correct. India's massive population, rising disposable incomes, and expanding middle class make capturing domestic market share the dominant objective for multinational manufacturing firms.

D. Export-oriented — Focuses on establishing production bases purely for export to third countries, which has represented a smaller share of manufacturing FDI compared to domestic market sales.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 2
Occasional sale of a commodity at a lower price abroad in order to unload an unforeseen and temporary surplus of the commodity without reducing domestic prices is called:
1. APersistent dumping
2. BPredatory dumping
3. CExport subsidies
4. DSporadic dumping
Answer: (D) Sporadic dumping
Explanation
Selling unforeseen and temporary excess inventory abroad at reduced prices without disrupting domestic price stability constitutes sporadic dumping.

A. Persistent dumping — Continuous and permanent sale of products abroad at lower prices than in the domestic market to maximize international profits.

B. Predatory dumping — Deliberately selling goods at a substantial loss in an overseas market to drive local competitors out of business and establish a monopoly.

C. Export subsidies — Direct or indirect government financial assistance given to domestic firms to encourage exports, not a pricing strategy by private producers.

D. Sporadic dumping — correct. Occurs intermittently and temporarily when domestic producers face unanticipated overproduction and sell surpluses overseas below domestic prices to protect domestic market margins.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 3
Which of the following countries/territories is not a member of the WTO?
1. AChina
2. BRussia
3. CIran
4. DTaiwan
Answer: (C) Iran
Explanation
Iran remains an observer government and has not attained full membership in the World Trade Organization.

A. China — Became an official member of the WTO on 11 December 2001.

B. Russia — Formally acceded to the WTO on 22 August 2012 after protracted negotiations.

C. Iran — correct. Iran submitted its accession application in 1996 and was granted observer status in 2005, but geopolitical challenges have prevented completion of full accession.

D. Taiwan — Acceded to the WTO under the designation Separate Customs Territory of Taiwan, Penghu, Kinmen and Matsu (Chinese Taipei) on 1 January 2002.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 4
Which of the following entity has recently been negotiated to replace NAFTA with effect from July 2020?
1. AQuad group of countries
2. BUSMCA
3. CShanghai cooperation organisation
4. DTrans-Atlantic organisation
Answer: (B) USMCA
Explanation
The United States-Mexico-Canada Agreement modernized and superseded the North American Free Trade Agreement on 1 July 2020.

A. Quad group of countries — Informal strategic security dialogue between Australia, India, Japan, and the United States, completely unrelated to North American regional trade pacts.

B. USMCA — correct. The United States-Mexico-Canada Agreement was renegotiated between 2017 and 2019 and officially entered into force on 1 July 2020, replacing NAFTA.

C. Shanghai cooperation organisation — Eurasian political, economic, and security alliance formed by China, Russia, and Central Asian states.

D. Trans-Atlantic organisation — General term referring to transatlantic alliances such as NATO or historical trade initiatives, not the specific North American replacement agreement.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 5
Amalgamation adjustment account is used for recording:
1. ACapital Reserve in the books of the transferee company
2. BGeneral Reserve in the books of the transferee company
3. CStatutory Reserve in the books of the transferee company
4. DRevenue Reserve in the books of the transferee company
Answer: (C) Statutory Reserve in the books of the transferee company
Explanation
Under Accounting Standard 14, an Amalgamation Adjustment Account is opened to carry forward mandatory statutory reserves of the transferor company.

A. Capital Reserve in the books of the transferee company — Capital reserve arises directly when net assets taken over exceed purchase consideration, requiring no adjustment account.

B. General Reserve in the books of the transferee company — General reserves of the vendor are incorporated into the purchasing company only in amalgamation in the nature of merger.

C. Statutory Reserve in the books of the transferee company — correct. In an amalgamation in the nature of purchase, statutory reserves like investment allowance or export development reserves must be preserved for legal compliance by debiting Amalgamation Adjustment Account and crediting Statutory Reserve.

D. Revenue Reserve in the books of the transferee company — Free revenue reserves do not require creation of an amalgamation adjustment account in purchase method accounting.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 6
The accounting standard AS3 (Revised) has become mandatory w.e.f. accounting periods beginning from 01.04.2001 for which of the following enterprise?
1. ACommercial, industrial and business reporting enterprise whose turnover for the accounting period exceeds Rs 50 crore.
2. BEnterprise whose debt or equity securities are not listed on a recognized stock exchange.
3. CAll enterprises whose turnover exceeds Rs 2 crores.
4. DOnly banking and insurance.
Answer: (A) Commercial, industrial and business reporting enterprise whose turnover for the accounting period exceeds Rs 50 crore.
Explanation
Revised AS 3 on Cash Flow Statements was made mandatory from 1 April 2001 for commercial enterprises categorized as Level I whose annual turnover exceeds Rs 50 crore.

A. Commercial, industrial and business reporting enterprise whose turnover for the accounting period exceeds Rs 50 crore. — correct. Level I enterprises subject to mandatory AS 3 compliance included listed entities as well as commercial enterprises with turnover exceeding Rs 50 crore during the accounting year.

B. Enterprise whose debt or equity securities are not listed on a recognized stock exchange. — Unlisted status alone does not trigger Level I applicability unless turnover or borrowing thresholds are breached.

C. All enterprises whose turnover exceeds Rs 2 crores. — The threshold for Level I classification under ICAI guidelines was Rs 50 crore, not Rs 2 crore.

D. Only banking and insurance. — Mandate covered listed companies and large commercial enterprises broadly, not solely banking and insurance institutions.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 7
CCA method of inflation accounting is as a result of the recommendation of?
1. AWandilands Committee
2. BTandlelands Committee
3. CSandilands Committee
4. DMarrylands Committee
Answer: (C) Sandilands Committee
Explanation
The Current Cost Accounting system of inflation accounting was formulated based on the UK Sandilands Committee report published in 1975.

A. Wandilands Committee — Distractor name created by altering the committee title.

B. Tandlelands Committee — Distractor name created by altering the committee title.

C. Sandilands Committee — correct. Chaired by Francis Sandilands, this committee recommended Current Cost Accounting (CCA) as a realistic replacement for historical cost accounting in inflationary periods.

D. Marrylands Committee — Fictional committee name having no connection with inflation accounting frameworks.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 8
The net profits of a partnership business, after providing for income tax for the last five years were: Rs 80,000: Rs 1,00,000: Rs 1,20,000: Rs 1,25,000 and Rs 2,00,000. The capital employed in the business is Rs 10,00,000 and the normal rate of return is 10%. The value of goodwill on the basis of the annuity method; taking the present value of the annuity of Re 1 for 5 years at 10% is 3.7907 (approx..) will be
1. ARs 2,500 (approx)
2. BRs 79,225 (approx)
3. CRs 94,770 (approx)
4. DRs 2,25,000 (approx)
Answer: (C) Rs 94,770 (approx)
Explanation
Goodwill under the annuity method equals the super profit multiplied by the present value annuity factor.

Total profit over five years:
80,000 + 1,00,000 + 1,20,000 + 1,25,000 + 2,00,000 = Rs 6,25,000

Average annual profit:
6,25,000 / 5 = Rs 1,25,000

Normal profit on capital employed:
10% of Rs 10,00,000 = Rs 1,00,000

Annual super profit:
1,25,000 - 1,00,000 = Rs 25,000

Value of goodwill using annuity factor:
25,000 * 3.7907 = Rs 94,767.50, approximately Rs 94,770

A. Rs 2,500 (approx) — Incorrect arithmetic result.

B. Rs 79,225 (approx) — Miscalculates super profit or omits one year in the profit average.

C. Rs 94,770 (approx) — correct. Perfectly matches the product of Rs 25,000 super profit and the 3.7907 present value factor.

D. Rs 2,25,000 (approx) — Results from adding normal and super profit rather than applying the annuity formula.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 9
The cross elasticity of demand between the complementary products is:
1. APositive
2. BZero
3. CNegative
4. DInfinite
Answer: (C) Negative
Explanation
Because complementary goods are jointly consumed, an increase in the price of one good causes a decline in demand for the other good.

A. Positive — Characteristic of substitute goods where a price rise in one leads consumers to switch to the alternative good.

B. Zero — Occurs for completely unrelated goods whose consumption decisions have no interdependence.

C. Negative — correct. The price of one complement and the quantity demanded of the other move in opposite directions, producing an inverse relationship and negative elasticity.

D. Infinite — Represents perfect substitutes where a minute price differential shifts the entire market demand.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 10
Income effect of a price rise is greater than its substitution effect in case of:
1. AInferior goods
2. BGiffen goods
3. CStatus symbol goods
4. DPerishable goods
Answer: (B) Giffen goods
Explanation
A Giffen good is a special type of inferior good where the negative income effect outweighs the positive substitution effect.

A. Inferior goods — The income effect operates in the opposite direction of normal goods, but the substitution effect typically dominates, preserving a downward-sloping demand curve.

B. Giffen goods — correct. The negative real income effect from a price rise is so strong that it overpowers the substitution effect, leading to an upward-sloping demand curve.

C. Status symbol goods — Veblen goods derive appeal from conspicuous consumption rather than an income-substitution tradeoff.

D. Perishable goods — Goods with limited shelf life whose demand is determined by immediate utility and storage constraints.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 11
If the scale parameter(s) is greater than one (r > 1), the CES production function exhibits:
1. ADecreasing returns to scale
2. BConstant returns to scale
3. CNegative returns to scale
4. DIncreasing returns to scale
Answer: (D) Increasing returns to scale
Explanation
In the Constant Elasticity of Substitution production function, the parameter r represents the degree of returns to scale.

A. Decreasing returns to scale — Occurs when the returns to scale parameter r is strictly less than one (r < 1).

B. Constant returns to scale — Occurs when the returns to scale parameter r equals exactly one (r = 1).

C. Negative returns to scale — Theoretically implausible condition where output contracts as inputs expand, which is not represented by r > 1.

D. Increasing returns to scale — correct. A proportional increase in all inputs generates a more than proportional increase in output whenever r > 1.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 12
When demand is slack and the market is competitive, firms follow which of the following pricing methods?
1. APenetration pricing
2. BPeak-load pricing
3. CMarginal cost pricing
4. DSkimming pricing
Answer: (C) Marginal cost pricing
Explanation
During periods of slack demand in competitive markets, firms set prices equal to short-run marginal cost to cover variable expenses and maintain operations.

A. Penetration pricing — Low introductory pricing strategy used when entering a new market to establish initial customer adoption and market share.

B. Peak-load pricing — Charging premium prices during periods of peak capacity utilization and lower prices off-peak, inapplicable when overall demand is depressed.

C. Marginal cost pricing — correct. Setting price equal to marginal cost ensures variable costs are recovered while remaining competitive during industry downturns.

D. Skimming pricing — Setting high initial prices for innovative products targeting price-insensitive buyers, impossible in competitive markets with slack demand.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 13
What is the value of a levered firm “L” if it has the same EBIT as an unlevered firm “U” (with value of Rs 700 lac), has a debt of Rs 200 lac, tax rate is 35% under MM approach?
1. ARs 950 lac
2. BRs 630 lac
3. CRs 770 lac
4. DRs 525 lac
Answer: (C) Rs 770 lac
Explanation
Under the Modigliani-Miller theorem with corporate taxes, the value of a levered firm equals the value of an unlevered firm plus the present value of the interest tax shield.

Formula:
V_L = V_U + (Tax Rate * Debt)

Calculation:
V_L = 700 + (0.35 * 200)
V_L = 700 + 70 = Rs 770 lac

A. Rs 950 lac — Adds total debt of Rs 200 lac without applying the 35% tax shield rate (700 + 200 = 900) plus additional errors.

B. Rs 630 lac — Subtracts the tax shield value from unlevered firm value instead of adding it (700 - 70 = 630).

C. Rs 770 lac — correct. Accurately adds the Rs 70 lac interest tax shield to the unlevered firm value of Rs 700 lac.

D. Rs 525 lac — Multiplies unlevered firm value by after-tax proportion (700 * 0.75), which misapplies the formula.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 14
_____________ is the percentage discount rate used in capital investment appraisals which brings the cost of a project and its future cash inflows into equality.
1. AAccounting rate of return
2. BInternal rate of return
3. CProfitability Index
4. DNet present value
Answer: (B) Internal rate of return
Explanation
The Internal Rate of Return is the discount rate that equates the present value of expected cash inflows with the initial capital expenditure.

A. Accounting rate of return — Ratio of average accounting profit after tax to average investment, ignoring the time value of money.

B. Internal rate of return — correct. The internal rate of return equates discounted future cash inflows with project cost, bringing net present value to zero.

C. Profitability Index — Relative benefit-cost ratio calculated by dividing present value of cash inflows by initial investment outlay.

D. Net present value — Absolute rupee difference between discounted cash inflows and cash outflows evaluated at a predetermined hurdle rate.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 15
The theory which explains the effect of devaluation on balance of trade is known as:
1. APhillips Curve Theory
2. BMundell-Tobin Hypothesis
3. CJ Curve Theory
4. DK Curve Theory
Answer: (C) J Curve Theory
Explanation
The J-curve hypothesis models the temporal lag through which currency devaluation worsens the trade balance before export-import adjustments improve it.

A. Phillips Curve Theory — Macroeconomic model depicting an inverse relationship between inflation and unemployment.

B. Mundell-Tobin Hypothesis — Monetary theory examining how expected inflation alters real interest rates and capital accumulation.

C. J Curve Theory — correct. Due to sticky import prices and volume inertia, devaluation initially widens the trade deficit before elasticities take effect and generate a surplus, forming a J-shaped curve.

D. K Curve Theory — Nonexistent theoretical concept in international trade economics.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 16
The annual demand for an item is 3,200 units. The unit cost is Rs 6 and inventory carrying charges 25% p.a. If the cost of one procurement is Rs 150, determine number of orders per year:
1. A3
2. B4
3. C6
4. D800
Answer: (B) 4
Explanation
The optimal number of orders per year is obtained by dividing annual demand by the Economic Order Quantity.

Given data:
Annual demand (D) = 3,200 units
Ordering cost per order (S) = Rs 150
Unit cost (C) = Rs 6
Carrying cost percentage (I) = 25%
Carrying cost per unit (H) = 0.25 * 6 = Rs 1.50

EOQ calculation:
EOQ = sqrt((2 * D * S) / H)
EOQ = sqrt((2 * 3200 * 150) / 1.5)
EOQ = sqrt(960000 / 1.5) = sqrt(640000) = 800 units

Orders per year:
Number of orders = D / EOQ = 3200 / 800 = 4 orders

A. 3 — Results from rounding error or using incorrect carrying charges.

B. 4 — correct. Dividing annual demand of 3,200 units by the EOQ of 800 units yields exactly 4 procurement cycles annually.

C. 6 — Result of miscalculating the square root in the EOQ formula.

D. 800 — Represents the lot size per order (EOQ) in units rather than the frequency of orders placed per year.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 17
If each value in a given set of data is divided by 4, how will it affect Karl Pearson’s coefficient of Skewness?
1. AIt will reduce the value of co-efficient to one-fourth
2. BIt will increase the value of co-efficient to four times
3. CIt will not affect the co-efficient of Skewness value
4. DNothing can be said about the change
Answer: (C) It will not affect the co-efficient of Skewness value
Explanation
Karl Pearson's coefficient of skewness is a pure dimensionless number that is completely independent of changes in scale.

Formula:
Sk = (Mean - Mode) / Standard Deviation

Scale effect:
When every observation is divided by a constant c (here c = 4), Mean, Mode, and Standard Deviation are each divided by c.

Result:
New Sk = ((Mean / 4) - (Mode / 4)) / (Standard Deviation / 4) = (Mean - Mode) / Standard Deviation

A. It will reduce the value of co-efficient to one-fourth — Incorrectly treats coefficient of skewness as an absolute measure rather than a relative ratio.

B. It will increase the value of co-efficient to four times — Erroneously assumes an inverse scaling relationship.

C. It will not affect the co-efficient of Skewness value — correct. Scaling both numerator and denominator by 1/4 leaves the relative ratio unchanged.

D. Nothing can be said about the change — The mathematical properties of Pearsonian skewness provide a definitive invariance result.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 18
A coin and pair of dice are tossed together, the total number of possible outcome for an experiment is:
1. A12
2. B72
3. C36
4. D24
Answer: (B) 72
Explanation
By the fundamental counting principle of probability, total compound outcomes equal the product of the individual outcomes.

Outcome breakdown:
A fair coin has 2 possible outcomes (Heads or Tails)
A standard pair of six-sided dice has 6 * 6 = 36 possible outcomes

Total sample space:
Total outcomes = 2 * 36 = 72

A. 12 — Simply multiplies coin outcomes by faces of one die (2 * 6).

B. 72 — correct. Multiplying 2 coin outcomes by 36 pair-of-dice outcomes produces 72 distinct experimental possibilities.

C. 36 — Accounts only for the pair of dice while omitting coin outcomes.

D. 24 — Erroneously computes 2 * 12 or adds dimensions incorrectly.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 19
Each of the values of a series is decreased by K. Which of the following does not hold in the context?
1. AThe quartile deviation does not change.
2. BThe co-efficient of quartile deviation remain unchanged.
3. CThe lower and upper quartile values each increases by K
4. DThe quartile coefficient of dispersion rises.
Answer: (B) The co-efficient of quartile deviation remain unchanged.
Explanation
Quartile deviation is independent of change of origin, whereas relative measures like the coefficient of quartile deviation change when values shift.

Mathematical effect of decreasing values by K:
New quartiles are Q1' = Q1 - K and Q3' = Q3 - K
Absolute quartile deviation = (Q3' - Q1') / 2 = (Q3 - Q1) / 2 (remains constant)
Coefficient of quartile deviation = (Q3' - Q1') / (Q3' + Q1') = (Q3 - Q1) / (Q3 + Q1 - 2K)

Because the denominator decreases while the numerator is unchanged, the coefficient rises and does not remain unchanged.

A. The quartile deviation does not change. — True statement because subtracting a constant shifts both quartiles equally, leaving their spread unaffected.

B. The co-efficient of quartile deviation remain unchanged. — correct (does not hold). The relative coefficient changes because the sum in the denominator shifts by 2K.

C. The lower and upper quartile values each increases by K — Contradicts the decrease premise, but in statistical examination keys B is the tested property regarding origin shifts.

D. The quartile coefficient of dispersion rises. — True statement for positive series because dividing a constant numerator by a smaller denominator increases the quotient.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 20
For Binomial distribution with n = 30, q = 0.7, the mean and variance will be equal to:
1. A21 and √6.3
2. B9 and √6.3
3. C9 and 6.3
4. D21 and 6.3
Answer: (C) 9 and 6.3
Explanation
In a binomial distribution with parameters n and failure probability q, the mean is np and variance is np*q.

Calculation:
Probability of success (p) = 1 - q = 1 - 0.7 = 0.3
Mean = n * p = 30 * 0.3 = 9
Variance = n * p * q = 30 * 0.3 * 0.7 = 6.3

A. 21 and √6.3 — Miscalculates mean as n * q (30 * 0.7 = 21) and states standard deviation rather than variance.

B. 9 and √6.3 — Calculates mean correctly as 9, but gives standard deviation (√6.3) instead of variance.

C. 9 and 6.3 — correct. Accurately determines mean as 9 and variance as 6.3.

D. 21 and 6.3 — Uses q instead of p to compute mean, leading to an incorrect mean of 21.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 21
A type of validity based on showing that scores on the test (Predictors) are related to job performance is:
1. ATest validity
2. BCriterion validity
3. CContent validity
4. DConstruct validity
Answer: (B) Criterion validity
Explanation
Criterion validity assesses how accurately a test score correlates with an external performance outcome or work standard.

A. Test validity — Broad overarching term describing whether a measurement procedure achieves its intended evaluation, not a specific statistical relationship.

B. Criterion validity — correct. Demonstrates a direct statistical correlation between predictor test results and actual on-the-job performance criteria (via concurrent or predictive designs).

C. Content validity — Evaluates whether test items provide an adequate, representative sample of the specific tasks, duties, and behaviors in the job domain.

D. Construct validity — Confirms that a selection tool measures an underlying psychological trait or characteristic such as intelligence or emotional stability.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 22
Which of the following is NOT a characteristic of transactional leaders?
1. AGives personal attention, treats each employee individually.
2. BAbdicates responsibilities, avoid making decisions.
3. CIntervenes only when standards are not met.
4. DContracts exchange of reward for efforts.
Answer: (A) Gives personal attention, treats each employee individually.
Explanation
Individualized attention and treating employees uniquely is a core dimension of transformational leadership known as individualized consideration.

A. Gives personal attention, treats each employee individually. — correct (not transactional). Individualized consideration is a hallmark of transformational leadership, where mentors develop personal potential.

B. Abdicates responsibilities, avoid making decisions. — Reflects laissez-faire or passive management-by-exception, categorized under the broader transactional leadership continuum.

C. Intervenes only when standards are not met. — Represents passive management-by-exception, a classic transactional control mechanism.

D. Contracts exchange of reward for efforts. — Exemplifies contingent reward, the fundamental defining exchange mechanism of transactional leadership.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 23
Stretch goal that challenge people to achieve higher levels of success in current activities is known as:
1. AControl stretch goals
2. BCluster stretch goals
3. CVertical stretch goals
4. DHorizontal stretch goals
Answer: (C) Vertical stretch goals
Explanation
Vertical stretch goals push individuals and teams to reach breakthrough performance levels within their current functional activities.

A. Control stretch goals — Fictitious classification in organizational goal-setting literature.

B. Cluster stretch goals — Fictitious classification in organizational goal-setting literature.

C. Vertical stretch goals — correct. Vertical stretch goals raise performance expectations within existing products, processes, and responsibilities.

D. Horizontal stretch goals — Challenge individuals or units to tackle completely new activities, roles, skills, or cross-functional responsibilities.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 24
Usually in which of the following performance appraisal technique, subjects self-ratings are negatively correlated with their subsequent performance in an assessment center?
1. AAppraisal by subordinates
2. B360 – Degree feedback
3. CSelf-ratings
4. DPeer Appraisals
Answer: (C) Self-ratings
Explanation
Empirical assessment center research shows that self-ratings frequently suffer from severe leniency bias and show negative correlation with objective performance evaluations.

A. Appraisal by subordinates — Upward feedback reflects managerial interpersonal effectiveness and generally correlates positively with assessment center leadership criteria.

B. 360 – Degree feedback — Aggregates multi-source perspectives from supervisors, peers, and subordinates, neutralizing individual perceptual distortions.

C. Self-ratings — correct. Candidates frequently overrate their competencies due to self-serving bias, resulting in an inverse or negative correlation with subsequent rigorous objective assessment center ratings.

D. Peer Appraisals — Peer assessments typically demonstrate high predictive validity and positive correlation with assessment center exercises.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 25
Which one of the following statements is true about the risk considered for capital requirement under Basel II?
1. ACredit risk, interest rate risk and foreign exchange risk
2. BCredit risk, market risk and operational risk
3. CCredit risk, political risk and country risk
4. DCredit risk, interest risk and political risk
Answer: (B) Credit risk, market risk and operational risk
Explanation
Pillar 1 of the Basel II framework mandates regulatory capital requirements specifically covering credit risk, market risk, and operational risk.

A. Credit risk, interest rate risk and foreign exchange risk — Interest rate risk in the banking book is assessed under Pillar 2 supervisory review rather than the core Pillar 1 formula.

B. Credit risk, market risk and operational risk — correct. Basel II established explicit minimum capital charges for credit risk, market risk, and newly introduced operational risk under Pillar 1.

C. Credit risk, political risk and country risk — Political and country risks are treated as components of broader credit exposure or examined under Pillar 2 supervisory oversight.

D. Credit risk, interest risk and political risk — Omits market and operational risks, which are statutory components of the Pillar 1 capital ratio.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 26
Which one of the following is not the characteristic of mutual funds?
1. AConsistent Investment process
2. BStrong fund management
3. CDiversity in interest rates
4. DDifferences from the benchmark
Answer: (C) Diversity in interest rates
Explanation
Mutual funds pool investor capital to invest in diversified portfolios and deliver market-linked returns rather than offering diverse fixed interest rates.

A. Consistent Investment process — Professional mutual funds operate with defined investment mandates and disciplined processes.

B. Strong fund management — Full-time professional portfolio managers actively supervise asset allocation and security selection.

C. Diversity in interest rates — correct (not a characteristic). Mutual funds do not provide fixed interest rates. their returns fluctuate with changes in the Net Asset Value of portfolio holdings.

D. Differences from the benchmark — Fund returns naturally deviate from baseline indices through tracking error or active portfolio alpha generation.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 27
Which of the following statements is false?
1. ACapital market is a market for medium- and long-term funds.
2. BGDR is a negotiable instrument issued by a US bank.
3. CMany publicly listed companies in India trades their shares through Bombay stock exchange or national stock exchange.
4. DSecurities that are listed on various stock exchanges are eligible for being traded there, are called listed securities.
Answer: (B) GDR is a negotiable instrument issued by a US bank.
Explanation
A Global Depository Receipt is issued by an international depository bank typically outside the United States, whereas American Depository Receipts are issued by US banks.

A. Capital market is a market for medium- and long-term funds. — True statement defining the primary and secondary capital market.

B. GDR is a negotiable instrument issued by a US bank. — correct (false statement). An American Depository Receipt is issued by a US bank for trading on US exchanges, whereas a GDR is issued by an international bank for trading across European and global markets.

C. Many publicly listed companies in India trades their shares through Bombay stock exchange or national stock exchange. — True statement describing share trading on the BSE and NSE.

D. Securities that are listed on various stock exchanges are eligible for being traded there, are called listed securities. — True statement defining admitted listed securities.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 28
Which of the following is not the service provided under NBFC?
1. ALeasing services
2. BImplementing modernization
3. CAsset management services
4. DMutual benefit finance services bank
Answer: (B) Implementing modernization
Explanation
Non-Banking Financial Companies provide specialized financial and investment intermediation rather than direct industrial operational implementation.

A. Leasing services — Equipment lease financing is a recognized core business activity of asset finance NBFCs.

B. Implementing modernization — correct (not an NBFC service). Executing technological modernization is an internal engineering and managerial responsibility of industrial enterprises.

C. Asset management services — Portfolio management and asset management are standard financial services provided by registered NBFCs.

D. Mutual benefit finance services bank — Nidhi companies and mutual benefit financial entities operate within the broader NBFC regulatory umbrella.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 29
Which of the followings can be categorized as information processing services?
1. ALegal services
2. BHealth care
3. CEducation
4. DManagement consultancy
Answer: (A) Legal services
Explanation
In Christopher Lovelock's service taxonomy, information processing services comprise intangible actions directed at customer assets such as legal rights and data.

A. Legal services — correct. Legal counsel involves processing information regarding contracts, statutes, and legal claims on behalf of clients.

B. Health care — Categorized as people processing because actions are directed physically at the customer's body.

C. Education — Categorized as mental stimulus processing because actions are directed at customer minds.

D. Management consultancy — Focuses heavily on mental stimulus and strategic diagnostic advice, while legal services are the classic textbook instance of pure information processing.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 30
Which of the following is NOT true about rural markets?
1. APrint media is not necessarily impactful in rural markets
2. BRural customer is price sensitive
3. CNo significant change may be required in the advertising copy
4. DProducts should be simpler, easy to use, service and maintain
Answer: (A) Print media is not necessarily impactful in rural markets
Explanation
Regional language newspapers and rural periodicals have proven highly impactful and effective in reaching literate rural households and opinion leaders.

A. Print media is not necessarily impactful in rural markets — correct (treated as not true in examination keys). Vernacular print publications enjoy high credibility and circulation in rural communities, making this assertion untrue.

B. Rural customer is price sensitive — True statement reflecting high price elasticity and preference for value-for-money offerings among rural buyers.

C. No significant change may be required in the advertising copy — While real-world localization is vital, standardized test items contrast print impact against general product features.

D. Products should be simpler, easy to use, service and maintain — True statement emphasizing durability and straightforward maintenance for rural operating conditions.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 31
Which of the following is NOT true for Supply Chain Management approach?
1. AJoint reduction in channel inventories.
2. BLarge breadth of supplier base to increase competition and spread risk.
3. CRisk and rewards are shared over long term.
4. DCompanies use intermodal transportation to reach to their markets.
Answer: (B) Large breadth of supplier base to increase competition and spread risk.
Explanation
Modern supply chain management focuses on building collaborative long-term relationships with a rationalized, lean base of core suppliers.

A. Joint reduction in channel inventories. — A fundamental goal of SCM to minimize bullwhip effects and working capital across channel partners.

B. Large breadth of supplier base to increase competition and spread risk. — correct (not true for SCM). Traditional purchasing pitted multiple suppliers against each other, whereas SCM favors a smaller, closely integrated supplier network.

C. Risk and rewards are shared over long term. — Genuine supply chain partnerships are built on transparent sharing of operational gains, technological investments, and demand risks.

D. Companies use intermodal transportation to reach to their markets. — Integrated multimodal logistics is widely utilized to optimize distribution efficiency.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 32
Which of the following is true for consumers?
1. AConsumers are rational and think in a linear manner.
2. BCulture and society have relationship to consumers’ thoughts and feelings.
3. CConsumers can be motivated to believe and internalize messages the way the marketer desires.
4. DConsumers can explain their thought and behaviour.
Answer: (B) Culture and society have relationship to consumers’ thoughts and feelings.
Explanation
Consumer thoughts, values, and emotional responses are fundamentally shaped by cultural norms and social environment.

A. Consumers are rational and think in a linear manner. — Behavioural economics demonstrates that consumers rely on emotional heuristics and non-linear cognitive biases.

B. Culture and society have relationship to consumers’ thoughts and feelings. — correct. Cultural context, family socialization, and reference groups directly influence how consumers interpret product symbolism.

C. Consumers can be motivated to believe and internalize messages the way the marketer desires. — Consumers actively filter, resist, or reinterpret promotional messages through selective perception.

D. Consumers can explain their thought and behaviour. — Many purchasing motivations are unconscious or emotionally driven, making self-reporting incomplete.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 33
The amount of penalty for making a false statement to the “Competition Commission” by a person who is a party to a combination shall be between
1. A20 lakhs to 50 lakhs
2. B50 lakhs to 1 crore
3. C8 lakhs to 10 lakhs
4. D70 lakhs to 1 crore
Answer: (B) 50 lakhs to 1 crore
Explanation
Under Section 44 of the Competition Act 2002, submitting a false statement regarding a combination attracts a statutory fine of Rs 50 lakhs up to Rs 1 crore.

A. 20 lakhs to 50 lakhs — Below the statutory minimum threshold prescribed under Section 44.

B. 50 lakhs to 1 crore — correct. The Act explicitly specifies that the penalty shall not be less than fifty lakh rupees but may extend to one crore rupees.

C. 8 lakhs to 10 lakhs — Incorrect lower monetary penalty range.

D. 70 lakhs to 1 crore — Misstates the minimum statutory baseline of Rs 50 lakhs.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 34
'A' Minor takes a loan of Rs.4,000/- from 'B' during his minority, on attaining majority, he applies to 'B' for a further loan of Rs. 3,000/- 'B' gives this loan and obtains from 'A' a combined promissory note of Rs.7,000/- for the two loans. This is considered as:
1. AVoid Contract
2. BValid Contract
3. CIllegal Contract
4. DUnilateral Contract
Accepted answers: (A) Void Contract, (B) Valid Contract
Explanation
Under the Indian Contract Act 1872, an agreement with a minor is void from the beginning and cannot be ratified upon attaining majority.

A. Void Contract — correct. A debt incurred during minority cannot serve as valid consideration for a subsequent promise upon attaining majority, rendering a combined promissory note covering past minority debt legally void.

B. Valid Contract — Marked in certain preliminary keys based on the presence of fresh Rs 3,000 consideration, but legally untenable under the Mohori Bibee doctrine.

C. Illegal Contract — Agreements with minors are void but not forbidden by criminal law or punishable as illegal.

D. Unilateral Contract — A promissory note creates obligations upon the promisor, but validity remains constrained by consideration requirements.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 35
Which among the following essence of the Information Technology Act is not a correct statement?
1. ALegal Recognition of Electronic documents.
2. BAny contract for the sale or conveyance of immovable property or any interest in such property.
3. CLegal Recognition of Digital signatures.
4. DJustice Dispensation system for cybercrimes.
Answer: (B) Any contract for the sale or conveyance of immovable property or any interest in such property.
Explanation
Section 1(4) of the Information Technology Act 2000 explicitly excludes contracts for the sale or conveyance of immovable property from its scope.

A. Legal Recognition of Electronic documents. — Enshrined under Section 4, granting electronic records identical legal status to physical paper documents.

B. Any contract for the sale or conveyance of immovable property or any interest in such property. — correct (not a correct statement of applicability). First Schedule exclusions specifically exclude real estate conveyancing and property contracts from electronic execution under the Act.

C. Legal Recognition of Digital signatures. — Enshrined under Section 5, authenticating electronic signatures on parity with handwritten signatures.

D. Justice Dispensation system for cybercrimes. — Established through Adjudicating Officers and the Cyber Appellate Tribunal under Chapter IX and X.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 36
Which one of the following is not included in the term “Work” under Copyright Act 1957?
1. AA Cinematographic film
2. BLayout designs of integrated circuits
3. CA sound recording
4. DA dramatic work
Answer: (B) Layout designs of integrated circuits
Explanation
Layout designs of semiconductor integrated circuits are protected under dedicated sui generis legislation rather than the Copyright Act.

A. A Cinematographic film — Explicitly included under Section 2(y)(ii) of the Copyright Act 1957.

B. Layout designs of integrated circuits — correct (not included). Governed separately under the Semiconductor Integrated Circuits Layout-Design Act 2000.

C. A sound recording — Explicitly included under Section 2(y)(iii) of the Copyright Act 1957.

D. A dramatic work — Explicitly included under Section 2(y)(i) along with literary, musical, and artistic works.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 37
Tax audit is compulsory in case of a person in a profession whose gross receipts from the profession exceed:
1. ARs 1 crore
2. BRs 40 lakh
3. CRs 60 lakh
4. DRs 50 lakh
Answer: (D) Rs 50 lakh
Explanation
Under Section 44AB(b) of the Income-tax Act 1961, tax audit is mandatory for professionals whose gross receipts exceed Rs 50 lakh in the previous year.

A. Rs 1 crore — Applies as the baseline turnover threshold for businesses under Section 44AB(a), not professions.

B. Rs 40 lakh — Historical threshold that was enhanced in earlier Finance Acts.

C. Rs 60 lakh — Arbitrary monetary figure not specified in Section 44AB.

D. Rs 50 lakh — correct. The statutory threshold for professional gross receipts requiring a compulsory tax audit is precisely Rs 50 lakh.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 38
Maximum tax-free limit for payment received under voluntary retirement scheme is:
1. ARs 4,00,000
2. BRs 5,00,000
3. CRs 8,00,000
4. DRs 10,00,000
Answer: (B) Rs 5,00,000
Explanation
Section 10(10C) of the Income-tax Act 1961 caps the lifetime tax exemption for voluntary retirement compensation at Rs 5,00,000.

A. Rs 4,00,000 — Below the statutory limit provided by the statute.

B. Rs 5,00,000 — correct. Compensation received upon voluntary retirement in compliance with prescribed guidelines is exempt up to a maximum ceiling of Rs 5,00,000.

C. Rs 8,00,000 — Incorrect monetary figure without basis in Section 10(10C).

D. Rs 10,00,000 — Represents historical exemption limits for gratuity under earlier schedules.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 39
A is Resident in India aged 60 years earned agricultural income of Rs 5,00,000 and non-agricultural income Rs 3,00,000 during the previous year 2019-20. What is tax liability of A?
1. ARs 72,000
2. BRs 72,100
3. CRs 2000
4. DNil
Answer: (D) Nil
Explanation
Partial integration of agricultural income applies only if non-agricultural income exceeds the basic exemption limit.

Analysis for Assessment Year 2020-21:
Individual A is a senior citizen (aged 60 years) whose basic exemption threshold is Rs 3,00,000.
Because non-agricultural income of Rs 3,00,000 does not exceed the basic exemption limit of Rs 3,00,000, partial integration rules do not trigger.

Calculation under integration:
Step 1: Tax on (5,00,000 + 3,00,000 = 8,00,000) = Rs 70,000
Step 2: Tax on (5,00,000 + 3,00,000 = 8,00,000) = Rs 70,000
Step 3: Tax liability = 70,000 - 70,000 = Nil

A. Rs 72,000 — Tax computed on gross combined income including cess while failing to subtract rebate or step two tax.

B. Rs 72,100 — Incorrect intermediate calculation.

C. Rs 2000 — Arbitrary figure not reflecting senior citizen slab rates.

D. Nil — correct. With non-agricultural income exactly matching the exemption threshold, total tax liability is zero.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 40
Any planning of tax which aims at reducing tax liability in legally recognized permissible way can be termed as an instance of:
1. ATax planning
2. BTax avoidance
3. CTax evasion
4. DTax management
Answer: (A) Tax planning
Explanation
Tax planning reduces tax liability through legitimate methods that fully align with the intent and framework of the law.

A. Tax planning — correct. Involves taking full advantage of statutory exemptions, deductions, rebates, and reliefs expressly permitted by taxation laws.

B. Tax avoidance — Involves bending the law by exploiting legal loopholes to defeat the legislative intent.

C. Tax evasion — Unlawful reduction of tax through fraudulent suppression of facts, falsification of accounts, or intentional non-disclosure.

D. Tax management — Procedural compliance with tax provisions including timely filing of returns, payment of advance tax, and deducting tax at source.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 41
Identity the principles of trade policy framework from the followings under the WTO:
(1) Reciprocity and transparent
(2) Benefactory and resilient
(3) Non - discriminatory
(4) Binding and enforceable commitments
(5) Protective and benevolent
Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. A1, 2 and 3 only
2. B3, 4 and 5 only
3. C1, 3 and 4 only
4. D2, 4 and 5 only
Answer: (C) 1, 3 and 4 only
Explanation
The World Trade Organization trade framework is governed by foundational principles of non-discrimination, transparency, reciprocity, and binding commitments.

Analysis of statements:
(1) Reciprocity and transparent — Recognized principle ensuring mutual concessions and published trade rules.
(2) Benefactory and resilient — Not a recognized legal principle of the WTO multilateral agreements.
(3) Non - discriminatory — The cornerstone principle comprising Most-Favoured-Nation and National Treatment.
(4) Binding and enforceable commitments — Tariff bindings and the Dispute Settlement Mechanism guarantee enforcement.
(5) Protective and benevolent — Contrary to the WTO objective of removing unjustified protectionist trade barriers.

A. 1, 2 and 3 only — Erroneously includes non-existent principle 2.

B. 3, 4 and 5 only — Erroneously includes protectionist principle 5 while omitting reciprocity and transparency.

C. 1, 3 and 4 only — correct. Accurately selects the genuine core principles of the multilateral trading system.

D. 2, 4 and 5 only — Combines ungrounded and contradictory terms.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 42
The rights of the consumer as enunciated under section 6 of the Consumer Protection Act, 1986 include:
(1) To be protected against the marketing of goods and services which are hazardous to life and property
(2) To be assured of the competitive price and low cost quality products and services
(3) To be assured that consumers' interests will service the due consideration at appropriate forums
(4) To be protected for multiple use of products. profits. diversity and equity
(5) To be informed about the quality. potency, purity and price of goods or service
Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. A1, 2 and 3 only
2. B2, 3 and 4 only
3. C3, 4 and 5 only
4. D1, 3 and 5 only
Answer: (D) 1, 3 and 5 only
Explanation
Section 6 of the Consumer Protection Act 1986 explicitly enumerates fundamental statutory rights of consumers.

Analysis of rights:
(1) Protection against hazardous goods and services (Section 6(a) - Right to Safety).
(2) Assured competitive price and low-cost quality — Distorts Section 6(c) which guarantees access to variety at competitive prices, not guaranteed low cost.
(3) Due consideration at appropriate forums (Section 6(d) - Right to be Heard).
(4) Protection for multiple use and profits — Irrelevant corporate concepts not included in consumer rights.
(5) Information on quality, quantity, potency, purity, standard, and price (Section 6(b) - Right to be Informed).

A. 1, 2 and 3 only — Incorrectly includes distorted statement 2.

B. 2, 3 and 4 only — Omits core safety and information rights while including false items.

C. 3, 4 and 5 only — Incorrectly includes distorted statement 4.

D. 1, 3 and 5 only — correct. Accurately combines the statutory rights to safety, representation, and information.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 43
Which of the following events after the balance sheet date would normally qualify as adjusting events according to AS-4 (Events after balance sheet date)?
(1) The insolvency of a customer on the balance sheet date
(2) A decline in the market value of investments
(3) The declaration of an ordinary dividend
(4) The determination of the cost of assets purchased before the balance sheet date
Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. A1, 3 and 4 only
2. B1 and 2 only
3. C2 and 3 only
4. D1 and 4 only
Answer: (D) 1 and 4 only
Explanation
Under AS 4, adjusting events are those that provide additional evidence of conditions existing on the balance sheet date.

Analysis of events:
(1) Insolvency of a customer — Confirms loss existing on the balance sheet date, requiring adjustment to bad debt provisions.
(2) Decline in market value of investments — Reflects market changes occurring in the subsequent period and constitutes a non-adjusting event.
(3) Declaration of ordinary dividend — Occurs after balance sheet date and is treated as a non-adjusting event disclosed in notes.
(4) Determination of cost of assets purchased before balance sheet date — Establishes purchase consideration for transactions completed before year-end and requires adjustment.

A. 1, 3 and 4 only — Erroneously classifies proposed dividend declaration as an adjusting event.

B. 1 and 2 only — Erroneously includes market investment fluctuations occurring post-closing.

C. 2 and 3 only — Consists exclusively of non-adjusting subsequent events.

D. 1 and 4 only — correct. Accurately identifies both genuine adjusting events under AS 4 principles.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 44
Management Accounting information is used for which of the following distinctive purposes
(1) Measurement
(2) Control
(3) Recording transactions
(4) Alternative choices
Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. A1, 2 and 3 only
2. B2, 3 and 4 only
3. C1, 2 and 4 only
4. D1 and 3 only
Answer: (C) 1, 2 and 4 only
Explanation
Management accounting serves internal managerial planning, performance evaluation, control, and strategic decision-making.

Analysis of purposes:
(1) Measurement — Quantifies performance and economic resource utilization across departments.
(2) Control — Enables budgetary control, standard costing, and corrective actions through variance analysis.
(3) Recording transactions — Primary objective of financial accounting and bookkeeping rather than management accounting.
(4) Alternative choices — Supplies relevant cost and differential revenue data to guide managerial choice among alternatives.

A. 1, 2 and 3 only — Erroneously attributes primary transaction recording to management accounting.

B. 2, 3 and 4 only — Omits measurement while retaining routine transaction recording.

C. 1, 2 and 4 only — correct. Accurately captures the three distinctive managerial purposes of measurement, control, and alternative decision-making.

D. 1 and 3 only — Incomplete selection that includes bookkeeping transactions.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 45
A U-shaped long-run average cost curve is based on the assumptions that:
(1) Greater division of labor and specialization accrue to larger firms
(2) Minimum cost of production at various levels of output
(3) Economies of scale prevail at small levels of output
(4) It becomes more difficult to manage the firm effectively as it grows bigger
(5) Diseconomies of scale prevail at larger level of output
Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. A1, 2 and 3 only
2. B2, 3 and 4 only
3. C2, 3, 4 and 5 only
4. D1, 3, 4 and 5 only
Answer: (D) 1, 3, 4 and 5 only
Explanation
The traditional U-shape of the long-run average cost curve is driven by initial internal economies of scale followed by managerial diseconomies of scale.

Economic factors:
(1) Division of labor and specialization — Drives unit costs downward as plant scale expands initially.
(3) Economies of scale at small levels — Explains the declining downward-sloping segment of the LRAC curve.
(4) Managerial coordination difficulties — Complex communication and bureaucracy increase unit overhead in oversized organizations.
(5) Diseconomies of scale at larger levels — Causes the long-run average cost curve to turn upward.
Statement (2) describes envelope curve points rather than the explanatory cause of cost behavior.

A. 1, 2 and 3 only — Covers only the decreasing cost segment while omitting diseconomies.

B. 2, 3 and 4 only — Includes descriptive point 2 while omitting labor specialization.

C. 2, 3, 4 and 5 only — Includes descriptive point 2 while omitting labor specialization.

D. 1, 3, 4 and 5 only — correct. Thoroughly captures both internal economies of scale and subsequent managerial diseconomies.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 46
Identify the necessary conditions for price discrimination:
(1) There should be imperfect competition in markets
(2) Markets must be separable
(3) Differentiated products and interdependence between firms
(4) Elasticity of demand must be different in different markets
Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. A1, 2 and 3 only
2. B1, 3 and 4 only
3. C2, 3 and 4 only
4. D1, 2 and 4 only
Answer: (D) 1, 2 and 4 only
Explanation
Price discrimination requires market power, sub-market separation to prevent arbitrage, and varying price elasticities of demand.

Conditions for price discrimination:
(1) Imperfect competition — The seller must have monopoly or price-setting power to control market prices.
(2) Separable markets — Sub-markets must be strictly divided by geography or consumer category so buyers cannot resale the good.
(4) Differing demand elasticities — The seller charges higher prices where elasticity is low and lower prices where elasticity is high.
Statement (3) describes oligopolistic market competition rather than price discrimination requirements for a firm.

A. 1, 2 and 3 only — Includes oligopolistic feature 3 while omitting essential demand elasticity.

B. 1, 3 and 4 only — Omits market separation, without which arbitrage destroys price differentials.

C. 2, 3 and 4 only — Includes oligopolistic product differentiation.

D. 1, 2 and 4 only — correct. Accurately identifies the three classical economic prerequisites for third-degree price discrimination.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 47
Which of the following explains the downward slope of an ordinary demand curve?
(1) Income effect of price change
(2) Substitution effect of price change
(3) Utility Maximizing behavior of consumer
(4) Risk-averse behavior of consumer
Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. A1 and 2 only
2. B2, 3 and 4 only
3. C1, 2 and 3 only
4. D1, 3 and 4 only
Answer: (C) 1, 2 and 3 only
Explanation
An ordinary downward-sloping demand curve is derived from substitution effects, income effects, and utility-maximizing behavior under diminishing marginal utility.

Underlying economic forces:
(1) Income effect — A price reduction increases real purchasing power, enabling higher consumption of normal goods.
(2) Substitution effect — A cheaper product is substituted for relatively more expensive goods.
(3) Utility maximizing behavior — Consumers equate marginal utility per rupee across purchases, requiring lower prices to absorb additional units.
Statement (4) concerns choice under risk and uncertainty rather than deterministic demand curves.

A. 1 and 2 only — Incomplete because utility-maximizing behavior underlies both effects.

B. 2, 3 and 4 only — Omits real income effects while incorrectly including risk aversion.

C. 1, 2 and 3 only — correct. Accurately groups the classical microeconomic foundations of downward-sloping demand.

D. 1, 3 and 4 only — Omits substitution effects while incorrectly including risk aversion.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 48
The reasons put forth for the control over the activities of the international banks are:
(1) These banks encourage inflation by adding stock of money supply through credit creation
(2) These banks some times are responsible for bank failures that mar the interest of the depositors
(3) They cause unmanageable indebtedness among the borrowing governments by charging high interest rates
(4) They do not adhere to the credit allocation policy of the host government
Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. A1, 2 and 3 only
2. B1, 3 and 4 only
3. C2, 3 and 4 only
4. D1, 2, 3 and 4 only
Answer: (D) 1, 2, 3 and 4 only
Explanation
Governments and central banks regulate international banks to manage macroeconomic stability, systemic risk, and credit priorities.

Regulatory rationales:
(1) Excessive credit creation by multinational banks expands local money supply and fuels inflationary pressure.
(2) Cross-border contagion and international banking crises jeopardize domestic depositor funds.
(3) Aggressive lending to developing governments can precipitate sovereign debt crises.
(4) International banks often allocate credit toward commercial multinationals rather than host government priority sectors.

A. 1, 2 and 3 only — Omits host government credit allocation policy concerns.

B. 1, 3 and 4 only — Omits systemic bank failure and depositor protection.

C. 2, 3 and 4 only — Omits inflationary money supply expansion.

D. 1, 2, 3 and 4 only — correct. Comprehensive assessment of all four major arguments supporting regulation of international banks.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 49
The new issue debt or shares will invariably involve floatation costs in the form of:
(1) Legal fees
(2) Administrative expenses
(3) Brokerage
(4) Underwriting
(5) Risk premium
Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. A1, 2, 4 and 5 only
2. B1 and 3 only
3. C1, 2, 3 and 4 only
4. D1, 2, 3, 4 and 5
Answer: (C) 1, 2, 3 and 4 only
Explanation
Flotation costs consist of direct operational expenses incurred by an issuing corporation to bring new securities to the capital market.

Cost components:
(1) Legal fees — Direct expenses paid to legal counsel for prospectus preparation and regulatory filings.
(2) Administrative expenses — Printing, postage, listing fees, and registrar charges.
(3) Brokerage — Commissions paid to distribution brokers.
(4) Underwriting — Fees paid to merchant bankers to guarantee security subscription.
(5) Risk premium — A determinant of the cost of capital and investor return, not a flotation cost.

A. 1, 2, 4 and 5 only — Incorrectly treats risk premium as a flotation cost while omitting brokerage.

B. 1 and 3 only — Incomplete list omitting underwriting and administrative fees.

C. 1, 2, 3 and 4 only — correct. Accurately includes all four direct issuing expenses while excluding cost of capital risk premiums.

D. 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 — Erroneously includes investment risk premium.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 50
Which of the following are the reasons for raising funds via securitization?
(1) To raise capital using non-conventional sources
(2) To accelerate earnings for financial reporting purposes
(3) To diversify funding resources
(4) The potential for reducing funding cost
Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. A1, 3 and 4 only
2. B2, 3 and 4 only
3. C3 and 4 only
4. D1, 2 and 4 only
Answer: (B) 2, 3 and 4 only
Explanation
Securitization enables originating financial institutions to monetize illiquid assets, accelerate earnings recognition, and lower funding costs.

Benefits of securitization:
(2) Accelerate earnings — Originators can recognize gains on sale immediately on derecognition of financial assets.
(3) Diversify funding resources — Taps institutional capital markets beyond conventional bank loans and deposits.
(4) Potential for reducing funding cost — High credit ratings on ring-fenced collateralized debt lower interest spreads.
Securitization is an established mainstream structured finance technique rather than an experimental non-conventional source.

A. 1, 3 and 4 only — Retains term 1 while omitting immediate earnings recognition.

B. 2, 3 and 4 only — correct. Accurately highlights the balance sheet, earnings, and cost optimization advantages of securitization.

C. 3 and 4 only — Incomplete by omitting earnings acceleration benefits.

D. 1, 2 and 4 only — Retains term 1 while omitting investor base diversification.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 51
Non-sampling errors may arise because of:
(1) Vague definitions used in data collection
(2) Defective method of data collection
(3) Incomplete coverage of the population
(4) Wrong entry made in the questionnaire
(5) Only a part of the population is observed and expected to avoid census study
Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. A1, 2, 3 and 4 only
2. B1, 3, 4 and 5 only
3. C2, 3, 4 and 5 only
4. D1, 2, 4 and 5 only
Answer: (D) 1, 2, 4 and 5 only
Explanation
Non-sampling errors occur during the preparation, recording, processing, or specification phases of statistical investigations.

Analysis of statements:
(1) Vague definitions — Ambiguity in concepts leads to inconsistent respondent interpretation and reporting errors.
(2) Defective method of data collection — Biased interview techniques or inappropriate measurement instruments introduce systematic non-sampling error.
(4) Wrong entry made in the questionnaire — Recording and data entry mistakes constitute operational non-sampling errors.
(5) Observing only a part of the population — Exam keys incorporate non-coverage and substitution practices under non-sampling sources.

A. 1, 2, 3 and 4 only — Standard statistical definition where statement 5 is viewed as pure sampling error, but omitted in official key.

B. 1, 3, 4 and 5 only — Omits defective data collection methods.

C. 2, 3, 4 and 5 only — Omits definitional ambiguity.

D. 1, 2, 4 and 5 only — correct. Designates the specific combination accepted by examination authorities.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 52
Which of the following are the correct statements with regard to positive skewed distribution?
(1) Mean > Median > Mode
(2) Mean < Median < Mode
(3) Q₃-Median < Median- Q₁
(4) Q₃-Median > Median- Q₁
(5) Mean = Median = Mode
Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. A1 and 4 only
2. B1 and 3 only
3. C2, 3 and 4 only
4. D2, 3, 4 and 5 only
Answer: (A) 1 and 4 only
Explanation
A positively skewed distribution has an elongated right-hand tail that pulls the mean and upper quartile away from the center.

Statistical relationships:
(1) Mean > Median > Mode — Extreme high values pull the mean further to the right than the median and mode.
(4) Q₃ - Median > Median - Q₁ — The distance between the third quartile and the median is greater than the distance between the median and the first quartile.
Statements 2 and 3 describe a negatively skewed distribution, while statement 5 defines a symmetrical distribution.

A. 1 and 4 only — correct. Precisely identifies both foundational mathematical properties of positive skewness.

B. 1 and 3 only — Statement 3 incorrectly asserts left skewness.

C. 2, 3 and 4 only — Combines contradictory negative skewness statements.

D. 2, 3, 4 and 5 only — Includes mutually exclusive symmetrical and negative skewness properties.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 53
Use of Focus Groups and collaboration tools as training needs assessment technique has the following disadvantages:
(1) Time consuming or organize
(2) Unuseful with complex or controversial issues that one person may be unable or unwilling to explore
(3) Questions cannot be modified to explore unanticipated issues
(4) Group members provide only information they think you want to hear
Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. A1 and 2 only
2. B2 and 3 only
3. C1 and 4 only
4. D3 and 4 only
Answer: (C) 1 and 4 only
Explanation
Focus groups require extensive coordination time and are prone to conformity pressures that distort participant responses.

Disadvantages of focus groups:
(1) Time consuming to organize — Scheduling multiple qualified participants and synthesizing open-ended dialogue demands significant lead time.
(4) Group conformity bias — Participants often engage in groupthink and provide socially acceptable answers they believe researchers desire.
Statements 2 and 3 are incorrect because focus groups excel at delving into complex dynamics and allow flexible probing of unanticipated issues.

A. 1 and 2 only — Incorrectly claims focus groups cannot explore complex issues.

B. 2 and 3 only — Focus groups actually provide high flexibility to modify questions dynamically.

C. 1 and 4 only — correct. Accurately isolates the core logistical hurdle and social desirability limitation of focus group methodology.

D. 3 and 4 only — Contradicts the inherent adaptability of qualitative focus group facilitation.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 54
Principles of Management are important and useful on account of the following reasons:
1. To increase managerial efficiency
2. To attain social objectives
3. To train managers
4. To improve research
5. To coordinate material and human resources
  Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. A1 and 5 only
2. B2 and 4 only
3. C2, 3 and 4 only
4. D1, 2, 3, 4 and 5
Answer: (D) 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5
Explanation
Management principles provide universal guidelines that enhance administrative efficiency, social accountability, and managerial capability.

Significance of management principles:

Increasing efficiency — Guides decision-making through systematic cause-and-effect understanding.

Attaining social objectives — Aligns corporate actions with social welfare and consumer interests.

Training managers — Forms the academic curriculum and professional knowledge base for executive education.

Improving research — Provides structured hypotheses and conceptual frameworks for ongoing management studies.

Coordinating resources — Integrates physical, financial, and human capital toward common organizational goals.

A. 1 and 5 only — Incomplete view omitting social, training, and research contributions.

B. 2 and 4 only — Incomplete view omitting core operational efficiency.

C. 2, 3 and 4 only — Omits direct efficiency and resource coordination benefits.

D. 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 — correct. Comprehensive recognition of all five vital dimensions of management principles.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 55
Which of the followings is not an approach to the structure of Indian Financial system?
(1) A brokerage can be either full service or discount
(2) The financial system is concerned about money. credit and finance. the three terms are intimately related yet are somewhat different from each other
(3) Housing finance simply refers to providing finance for venture capital
(4) Financial instruments may also be divided according to asset class. which depends on whether they are debt-based or equity based
Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. A1, 3 and 4 only
2. B2 and 4 only
3. C3 only
4. D1 and 3 only
Answer: (C) 3 only
Explanation
Housing finance is dedicated to residential real estate lending and is completely distinct from venture capital financing.

Evaluation of statements:
(1) Brokerage classification — True description of full-service versus discount brokerage models.
(2) Financial conceptual scope — True representation of money, credit, and finance relationships.
(3) Housing finance definition — Completely false statement because housing finance provides credit for purchasing or constructing homes, while venture capital finances early-stage high-growth enterprises.
(4) Asset class categorization — True division of instruments into debt, equity, and hybrid asset classes.

A. 1, 3 and 4 only — Erroneously includes valid structural descriptions 1 and 4.

B. 2 and 4 only — Identifies accurate structural statements rather than the incorrect approach.

C. 3 only — correct. Accurately isolates the single incorrect definition that mischaracterizes housing finance.

D. 1 and 3 only — Erroneously includes the valid brokerage structure.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 56
Which of the following statements is/are correct regarding application of data mining techniques?
(1) Predicting future trends based on information available
(2) Electronic data interchange
(3) Analysing demographic information about customers
(4) Credit risk analysis
Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. A2 and 4 only
2. B1, 2, 3 and 4 only
3. C1, 2 and 4 only
4. D1, 3 and 4 only
Answer: (D) 1, 3 and 4 only
Explanation
Data mining applies statistical algorithms to uncover hidden patterns and predictive relationships in large datasets.

Applications of data mining:
(1) Predicting future trends — Predictive analytics models forecast sales, churn, and demand based on historical patterns.
(3) Analysing demographic information — Cluster analysis segments customers based on age, income, and purchasing habits.
(4) Credit risk analysis — Classification models evaluate borrower default probabilities from past payment history.
Electronic Data Interchange (2) is a telecommunication protocol for transmitting standardized business documents, not an analytical data mining technique.

A. 2 and 4 only — Omits customer analytics and trend forecasting while including EDI.

B. 1, 2, 3 and 4 only — Incorrectly includes communication protocol EDI.

C. 1, 2 and 4 only — Incorrectly includes EDI while omitting demographic analysis.

D. 1, 3 and 4 only — correct. Accurately identifies the three genuine analytical applications of data mining.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 57
Skimming pricing strategy delivers results:
(1) When the size of the market is large and it is a growing market
(2) When the product is perceived as enhancing the customer's status in society
(3) When the firm uses it as an entry strategy
(4) When the target market associates quality of the products with its price
Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. A1 and 2 only
2. B2 and 4 only
3. C2 and 3 only
4. D1, 3 and 4 only
Answer: (B) 2 and 4 only
Explanation
Price skimming succeeds when high initial prices signal premium prestige and buyers perceive superior quality.

Prerequisites for skimming pricing:
(2) Status enhancement — Inelastic early adopters purchase luxury or cutting-edge products to signal social prestige.
(4) Price-quality association — Target buyers interpret high price as an indicator of premium craftsmanship and superior performance.
In contrast, large growing markets (1) and aggressive mass-market entry (3) call for penetration pricing rather than skimming.

A. 1 and 2 only — Erroneously includes large growing markets which favor penetration pricing.

B. 2 and 4 only — correct. Precisely combines the status signaling and price-quality heuristic conditions essential for skimming.

C. 2 and 3 only — General entry strategies rely on low penetration prices unless specifically targeting luxury niches.

D. 1, 3 and 4 only — Includes contradictory mass-market conditions.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 58
Requirements for effective market segmentation are:
1. Accessibility
2. Differentiation
3. Measurable
4. Vioble
5. Intensity in competition
  Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. A1 and 2 only
2. B2, 3 and 5 only
3. C1, 3 and 4 only
4. D1, 3, 4 and 5 only
Answer: (D) 1, 3, 4 and 5 only
Explanation
In marketing theory, effective market segmentation requires distinct criteria to ensure segments are actionable and commercially viable.

Evaluation of criteria:

Accessibility — Segments must be effectively reached and served through distribution channels.

Measurable — Size, purchasing power, and characteristics of the segment can be quantified.

Vioble (Viable / Substantial) — Segments must be sufficiently large and profitable to warrant specialized programs.

Intensity in competition — Evaluating competitive structure ensures segment feasibility and defensibility.

A. 1 and 2 only — Incomplete selection omitting measurability and viability.

B. 2, 3 and 5 only — Omits accessibility.

C. 1, 3 and 4 only — Standard academic criteria set, but designated alternative option in examination key includes competitive assessment.

D. 1, 3, 4 and 5 only — correct. Represents the accepted answer code under official examination evaluation.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 59
Environmental characteristics/factors influencing distribution decisions are:
(1) Government policy
(2) State of economy
(3) Social activistism
(4) Technological and infrastructure developments
(5) Statutory provisions
Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. A1 and 4 only
2. B2, 3 and 5 only
3. C1, 3 and 4 only
4. D1, 2, 4 and 5 only
Answer: (D) 1, 2, 4 and 5 only
Explanation
Channel distribution strategies must adapt to broad macroeconomic, legal, regulatory, and infrastructural forces.

Environmental factors influencing distribution:
(1) Government policy — Tariffs, retail trade regulations, and public distribution priorities direct channel choice.
(2) State of economy — Purchasing power, inflation, and credit availability dictate intermediary feasibility.
(4) Technological and infrastructure developments — Transportation networks, cold storage, and e-commerce logistics redefine routing.
(5) Statutory provisions — State taxation, licensing requirements, and transport regulations impose structural constraints.

A. 1 and 4 only — Incomplete set omitting economic and statutory forces.

B. 2, 3 and 5 only — Omits core technological and infrastructural logistics drivers.

C. 1, 3 and 4 only — Omits statutory provisions.

D. 1, 2, 4 and 5 only — correct. Comprehensive coverage of the four major institutional and economic distribution drivers.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 60
Which of the following statements are true regarding the objectives of Right to Information Act? Indicate the correct code:
(1) To operationalize the fundamental right to information
(2) To set up system and mechanisms that facilitate people's easy access to information
(3) To promote transparency and accountability in governance
(4) To minimize corruption and inefficiency in public offices and ensure people participation in governance and decision making
Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. A2, 3 and 4 only
2. B1, 2, 3 and 4 only
3. C1, 2 and 3 only
4. D1, 2 and 4 only
Answer: (B) 1, 2, 3 and 4 only
Explanation
The Preamble to the Right to Information Act 2005 articulates transparency, citizen empowerment, and democratic accountability as its core mandates.

Statutory objectives:
(1) Operationalize fundamental right to know — Emanating from freedom of speech and expression under Article 19(1)(a).
(2) Establishing access mechanisms — Mandatory designation of Public Information Officers and statutory timelines.
(3) Promoting transparency and accountability — Opening administrative decisions to public scrutiny.
(4) Minimizing corruption and enabling participation — Deterring malpractices while fostering participatory democracy.

A. 2, 3 and 4 only — Omits the fundamental rights foundation of the Act.

B. 1, 2, 3 and 4 only — correct. Confirms that all four statements faithfully represent the statutory objectives of the RTI Act.

C. 1, 2 and 3 only — Omits anti-corruption and public participation purposes.

D. 1, 2 and 4 only — Omits the core governance principle of transparency.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 61
Which of the following taxes have been replaced by the GST? Indicate the correct code:
(1) Central Excise duty
(2) Service tax
(3) Taxes on advertisements
(4) Duties of Excise-Medicinal and toilet preparations
Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. A1, 2 and 4 only
2. B1 and 2 only
3. C2, 3 and 4 only
4. DAll of the above
Answer: (D) All of the above
Explanation
The Goods and Services Tax implemented on 1 July 2017 subsumed major indirect levies enacted by the Central and State governments.

Taxes subsumed under GST:
(1) Central Excise duty — Replaced by CGST.
(2) Service tax — Replaced by CGST and IGST.
(3) Taxes on advertisements — State indirect tax subsumed under SGST.
(4) Duties of Excise (Medicinal and Toilet Preparations) — Central excise levy subsumed under CGST.

A. 1, 2 and 4 only — Incomplete selection omitting state advertisement taxes.

B. 1 and 2 only — Omits medicinal excise and state advertisement taxes.

C. 2, 3 and 4 only — Omits central excise duty.

D. All of the above — correct. Accurately recognizes that all four indirect levies were replaced by GST.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 62
On which of the following grounds, the Tribunal may order for the winding-up-of a company or a petition submitted to it. Indicate the correct code:
(1) Passing of special resolution for the winding up
(2) Conducting affairs in a fraudulent manner
(3) Reduction in membership
(4) Inability to pay debts
Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. A1, 2 and 3 only
2. B1, 2 and 4 only
3. C1, 2, 3 and 4
4. D2, 3 and 4 only
Answer: (C) 1, 2, 3 and 4
Explanation
Under Indian corporate law statutory provisions, the National Company Law Tribunal can order compulsory winding up across multiple grounds.

Grounds for winding up:
(1) Special resolution — Shareholders resolve by special resolution that the company be wound up by the Tribunal.
(2) Fraudulent conduct — Conducting business affairs in a fraudulent or unlawful manner justifies winding up under just and equitable grounds.
(3) Reduction in membership — Falling below the statutory threshold (two for private companies, seven for public companies).
(4) Inability to pay debts — Classic commercial insolvency ground established under the Companies Act.

A. 1, 2 and 3 only — Omits the fundamental insolvency ground of inability to pay debts.

B. 1, 2 and 4 only — Omits statutory reduction in membership.

C. 1, 2, 3 and 4 — correct. Confirms all four listed scenarios as recognized statutory grounds for tribunal winding-up petitions.

D. 2, 3 and 4 only — Omits voluntary initiation via special resolution.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 63
Which of the following income is generally chargeable under the head of income from other sources?
(1) Income from subletting house property
(2) Director fee
(3) Ground Rent
(4) Agricultural Income from outside India
(5) Insurance commission
(6) Income from sale of securities
Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. A1, 2, 4 and 5 only
2. B2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 only
3. C1, 2, 3, 5 and 6 only
4. D1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 only
Answer: (D) 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 only
Explanation
Section 56 of the Income-tax Act 1961 taxes receipts that do not fall under salaries, house property, business profits, or capital gains.

Classification of incomes:
(1) Subletting house property — Assessed under other sources because the taxpayer is not the owner of the property.
(2) Director fee — Taxable under other sources when no employer-employee relationship exists.
(3) Ground rent — Derived from leasing vacant land without buildings and taxed under other sources.
(4) Foreign agricultural income — Lacks domestic exemption under Section 10(1) and is taxed under other sources.
(5) Insurance commission — Taxable under other sources unless carried on as an organized commercial agency business.
Income from sale of securities (6) is chargeable under Capital Gains (or Business Profits for traders).

A. 1, 2, 4 and 5 only — Omits ground rent.

B. 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 only — Erroneously includes securities sale while omitting subletting.

C. 1, 2, 3, 5 and 6 only — Erroneously includes securities sale while omitting foreign agriculture.

D. 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 only — correct. Accurately selects the five incomes assessed under residual other sources.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 64
Which of the following are included in person under section 17 (1)?
(1) A Hindu Undivided Family (HUF)
(2) A company
(3) A firm
(4) An individual
(5) A local authority
(6) An association of persons
Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. A1, 3, 4 and 6 only
2. B3, 4, 5 and 6 only
3. C2, 4, 5 and 6 only
4. D1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 only
Answer: (D) 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 only
Explanation
The statutory definition of person under the Income-tax Act encompasses distinct taxable legal entities.

Taxable entities defined as person:
(1) Hindu Undivided Family
(2) Company
(3) Partnership Firm
(4) Individual
(5) Local Authority
(6) Association of Persons
All six entities are recognized assessable legal units under Indian taxation law.

A. 1, 3, 4 and 6 only — Omits companies and local authorities.

B. 3, 4, 5 and 6 only — Omits individuals and HUFs.

C. 2, 4, 5 and 6 only — Omits HUFs and firms.

D. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 only — correct. Confirms that all six categories are integral components of the taxable person definition.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 65
The exemption with respect to HRA is based upon the following factors?
(1) Rent paid
(2) Place of Residence
(3) Salary
(4) HRA Received
(5) Fair Rent
(6) Market Rent
Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. A1, 2, 3 and 4 only
2. B1, 3, 4 and 6 only
3. C1, 2, 3 and 6 only
4. D1, 2, 5 and 6 only
Answer: (A) 1, 2, 3 and 4 only
Explanation
Under Section 10(13A) read with Rule 2A, House Rent Allowance exemption is determined strictly from actual rent, location, salary, and allowance received.

Factors governing HRA exemption:
(1) Rent paid — Necessary to compute excess of rent paid over 10% of salary.
(2) Place of residence — Determines whether 50% (metro cities) or 40% (non-metro) of salary applies.
(3) Salary — Defines the percentage thresholds for retirement benefits salary.
(4) HRA received — Acts as the maximum ceiling for exemption.
Fair rent (5) and Market rent (6) are valuation mechanisms for annual value of house property under Section 23, having no role in HRA exemption.

A. 1, 2, 3 and 4 only — correct. Accurately restricts determinants to the four statutory variables defined in Rule 2A.

B. 1, 3, 4 and 6 only — Erroneously includes market rent.

C. 1, 2, 3 and 6 only — Omits place of residence while adding market rent.

D. 1, 2, 5 and 6 only — Confuses house property valuation terms with employment allowance exemptions.
Sign in to read the full explanation

Question 66

Match List I with List II:

List I	List II
a. International Finance Corporation	i. 1944
b. International Development Association	ii. 1967
c. World Intellectual Property Organisation	iii. 1956
d. International Bank for Reconstruction and Development	iv. 1960

Aa-iv, b-i, c-iii, d-ii
Ba-ii, b-iv, c-i, d-iii
Ca-iii, b-ii, c-iv, d-i
Da-iii, b-iv, c-ii, d-i

Answer: (D) a-iii, b-iv, c-ii, d-i

Explanation

International institutions and multilateral organizations were founded across landmark post-war diplomatic conferences.

Institutional chronology:

a. International Finance Corporation — Established in 1956 to foster private sector investment in developing nations (matches iii).
b. International Development Association — Founded in 1960 as the World Bank's concessional lending arm for poorest countries (matches iv).
c. World Intellectual Property Organisation — Created by the WIPO Convention in 1967 to promote intellectual property protection (matches ii).
d. International Bank for Reconstruction and Development — Conceived at the Bretton Woods Conference in 1944 to finance post-war reconstruction (matches i).
A. a-iv, b-i, c-iii, d-ii — Inverts establishment dates across agencies.
B. a-ii, b-iv, c-i, d-iii — Confuses WIPO and IFC inception years.
C. a-iii, b-ii, c-iv, d-i — Misaligns IDA with 1967.
D. a-iii, b-iv, c-ii, d-i — correct. Matches every international agency with its exact historical founding year.

Question 67

Match List I with List II:

List I	List II
a. Bonus shares	i. Invitation to existing shareholders to purchase additional new shares
b. Demat shares	ii. Issue is made to existing members free of charge
c. Right issue	iii. Shares issues by a company to its employees/directors at a discount for providing know-how
d. Sweat equity share	iv. Shares in electronic form

Aa-ii, b-iv, c-i, d-iii
Ba-ii, b-i, c-iii, d-iv
Ca-iv, b-iii, c-ii, d-i
Da-iv, b-i, c-ii, d-iii

Answer: (A) a-ii, b-iv, c-i, d-iii

Explanation

Corporate equity issuances are classified based on issuance mode, regulatory form, and subscriber entitlement.

Matching equity forms:

a. Bonus shares — Issued to existing shareholders free of charge through capitalization of accumulated reserves (matches ii).
b. Demat shares — Maintained in paperless electronic form within a registered depository system (matches iv).
c. Right issue — Pre-emptive invitation to existing shareholders to purchase additional new shares proportionally (matches i).
d. Sweat equity share — Issued to directors or employees at a discount or for non-cash consideration for technical know-how (matches iii).
A. a-ii, b-iv, c-i, d-iii — correct. Accurately maps each share type to its formal legal and financial definition.
B. a-ii, b-i, c-iii, d-iv — Confuses rights issue with demat shares.
C. a-iv, b-iii, c-ii, d-i — Misidentifies bonus shares as electronic shares.
D. a-iv, b-i, c-ii, d-iii — Inverts bonus and rights issuance definitions.

Question 68

Match List I with List II:

List I (Objectives of business firm)	List II (Economists)
a. Long-Run Survival	i. Marris, Robin
b. Sales Revenue maximisation	ii. Williamson, D.E.
c. Firm’s Growth Rate maximisation	iii. Rothschild, K.W.
d. Managerial utility Function maximization	iv. Baumol, W.J.

Aa-ii, b-iii, c-iv, d-i
Ba-iv, b-ii, c-iii, d-i
Ca-iii, b-iv, c-i, d-ii
Da-ii, b-iii, c-i, d-iv

Answer: (C) a-iii, b-iv, c-i, d-ii

Explanation

Managerial and behavioral economists formulated distinct alternative models to traditional profit maximization.

Economist attributions:

a. Long-Run Survival — Proposed by K.W. Rothschild, emphasizing security and long-run survival over short-term optimization (matches iii).
b. Sales Revenue maximisation — Formulated by W.J. Baumol, asserting that managers prioritize top-line sales revenue subject to minimum profit constraints (matches iv).
c. Firm’s Growth Rate maximisation — Formulated by Robin Marris, balancing balanced growth rate of demand and capital (matches i).
d. Managerial utility Function maximization — Formulated by Oliver Williamson (cited as Williamson, D.E.), where managers maximize utility through staff expenditure and perks (matches ii).
A. a-ii, b-iii, c-iv, d-i — Assigns survival to Williamson and revenue to Rothschild.
B. a-iv, b-ii, c-iii, d-i — Confuses Baumol with long-run survival.
C. a-iii, b-iv, c-i, d-ii — correct. Accurately links each alternative corporate objective to its theoretical pioneer.
D. a-ii, b-iii, c-i, d-iv — Misattributes Rothschild and Baumol frameworks.

Question 69

Match List I with List II:

List I (Methods of Inventory Control)	List II (Explanation)
a. JIT system	i. Divide the items into the categories in the descending order of their usage rate.
b. ABC Analysis	ii. Divide items into categories in the descending order of their critical use.
c. FSND Analysis	iii. Inventory arrive to the manufacturing sites just few hours before they are put to use.
d. VED Analysis	iv. The items of inventory are classified according to value of usage.

Aa-i, b-ii, c-iii, d-iv
Ba-ii, b-iii, c-iv, d-i
Ca-iii, b-iv, c-i, d-ii
Da-iv, b-iii, c-ii, d-i

Answer: (C) a-iii, b-iv, c-i, d-ii

Explanation

Inventory management techniques categorize stock items through selective control criteria.

Inventory control mechanisms:

a. JIT system — Pull-based production where inventory arrives at assembly lines only hours before utilization (matches iii).
b. ABC Analysis — Classifies items by annual usage value based on Pareto's principle (matches iv).
c. FSND Analysis — Classifies inventory into fast-moving, slow-moving, normal-moving, and dead stock in descending order of usage rate (matches i).
d. VED Analysis — Categorizes items as vital, essential, or desirable in descending order of critical importance to operations (matches ii).
A. a-i, b-ii, c-iii, d-iv — Inverts operational mechanisms across categories.
B. a-ii, b-iii, c-iv, d-i — Assigns criticality to JIT.
C. a-iii, b-iv, c-i, d-ii — correct. Accurately links all four selective control techniques with their operational classifications.
D. a-iv, b-iii, c-ii, d-i — Associates value usage with JIT systems.

Question 70

Match List I with List II:

List I	List II
a. Probability distribution	i. σ = √((b−a)²/12)
b. Binomial distribution	ii. σ = √(∑p(x − μ)²)
c. Hyper geometric distribution	iii. σ = √npq
d. Uniform distribution	iv. σ = √[n(N₁/N)(N₂/N)((N−n)/(N−1))]

Aa-ii, b-iii, c-iv, d-i
Ba-ii, b-iii, c-i, d-iv
Ca-ii, b-i, c-iii, d-iv
Da-i, b-ii, c-iii, d-iv

Answer: (A) a-ii, b-iii, c-iv, d-i

Explanation

Theoretical probability distributions possess distinctive closed-form formulas for standard deviation.

Standard deviation expressions:

a. Probability distribution — General formula for standard deviation of a discrete random variable is sqrt(sum(p * (x - mu)^2)) (matches ii).
b. Binomial distribution — Standard deviation is given by sqrt(n * p * q) (matches iii).
c. Hyper geometric distribution — Finite population standard deviation is sqrt(n * (N1/N) * (N2/N) * ((N-n)/(N-1))) (matches iv).
d. Uniform distribution — Continuous rectangular uniform distribution standard deviation on interval [a, b] is sqrt((b - a)^2 / 12) (matches i).
A. a-ii, b-iii, c-iv, d-i — correct. Matches every theoretical probability distribution to its definitive variance formula.
B. a-ii, b-iii, c-i, d-iv — Confuses uniform distribution with hypergeometric.
C. a-ii, b-i, c-iii, d-iv — Assigns uniform formula to binomial.
D. a-i, b-ii, c-iii, d-iv — Inverts continuous uniform and general distribution.

Question 71

Match the following:

List I	List II
a. Learning organization	i. Flexibility in the structure or lack of structure.
b. Spaghetti organization	ii. Linking of separate parts of the same organization or networking of separate organizations to accomplish a common goal.
c. Fishnet organisation	iii. The ability to continually change structure and internal process to conform to feedback with the environment.
d. Network structure	iv. Flexible, adaptable, rearranges itself quickly while retaining its inherent strength.

Aa-iii, b-ii, c-iv, d-i
Ba-iii, b-i, c-iv, d-ii
Ca-i, b-iv, c-iii, d-ii
Da-ii, b-i, c-iv, d-iii

Answer: (B) a-iii, b-i, c-iv, d-ii

Explanation

Modern organizational design employs non-hierarchical models to enhance adaptability and responsiveness.

Structural definitions:

a. Learning organization — Exhibits capacity to continuously adapt and conform internal processes to environmental feedback (matches iii).
b. Spaghetti organization — Pioneered at Oticon, characterized by extreme structural informality and deliberate lack of rigid hierarchy (matches i).
c. Fishnet organisation — Highly agile modular structure that rearranges resources rapidly while maintaining structural integrity (matches iv).
d. Network structure — Links internal units or external organizations into collaborative federations to achieve common goals (matches ii).
A. a-iii, b-ii, c-iv, d-i — Swaps network structure and spaghetti organization definitions.
B. a-iii, b-i, c-iv, d-ii — correct. Accurately links all contemporary organizational designs to their core behavioral attributes.
C. a-i, b-iv, c-iii, d-ii — Misattributes learning organization characteristics.
D. a-ii, b-i, c-iv, d-iii — Misattributes network structure.

Question 72
Match List I with List II:
List I List II
a. Hedgers i. Osaka
b. Financial derivatives in India ii. Increased volatility
c. Arbitrageurs iii. Commercial procedures
d. Commodity future in origin iv. Riskless profit
1. Aa-i, b-iv, c-ii, d-iii
2. Ba-iii, b-ii, c-iv, d-i
3. Ca-iv, b-iii, c-i, d-ii
4. Da-ii, b-i, c-iii, d-iv
Answer: (B) a-iii, b-ii, c-iv, d-i
Explanation
Derivative markets involve distinct participant motives and historical institutional milestones.

Derivative market mappings:

a. Hedgers — Utilize derivatives as commercial risk management procedures to neutralize cash-market price volatility (matches iii).

b. Financial derivatives in India — Associated with empirical debates over increased cash market volatility and regulatory supervision under SEBI (matches ii).

c. Arbitrageurs — Exploit simultaneous price discrepancies across markets to generate riskless profit (matches iv).

d. Commodity future in origin — Traces historical origin to the Doojima Rice Exchange in Osaka, Japan in 1730 (matches i).

A. a-i, b-iv, c-ii, d-iii — Assigns Osaka origins to hedgers.

B. a-iii, b-ii, c-iv, d-i — correct. Accurately matches market participants and market concepts with their financial counterparts.

C. a-iv, b-iii, c-i, d-ii — Inverts arbitrageurs and hedgers.

D. a-ii, b-i, c-iii, d-iv — Misattributes Osaka to financial derivatives in India.
Sign in to read the full explanation

Question 73

Match the following:

List I (Advertising Agency in 2020)	List II (Brand)
a. O&M (Ogilvy and Mather)	i. Mastercard
b. Mc Cann Erickson	ii. Nestle
c. Trikaya Grey	iii. Cadbury
d. JWT Hindustan Thompson Associates	iv. Proctor and Gamble

Aa-iii, b-ii, c-iv, d-i
Ba-iii, b-i, c-iv, d-ii
Ca-ii, b-iv, c-i, d-iii
Da-ii, b-iii, c-i, d-iv

Answer: (B) a-iii, b-i, c-iv, d-ii

Explanation

Leading advertising agencies manage hallmark marketing campaigns for global consumer brands.

Agency and brand accounts:

a. O&M (Ogilvy and Mather) — Iconic creator of legendary Cadbury advertising campaigns in India (matches iii).
b. Mc Cann Erickson — Global agency managing Mastercard's award-winning Priceless platform (matches i).
c. Trikaya Grey — Long-standing agency partnership handling major Procter & Gamble consumer brands (matches iv).
d. JWT Hindustan Thompson Associates — Pioneering advertising network managing flagship Nestle food and beverage accounts (matches ii).
A. a-iii, b-ii, c-iv, d-i — Swaps Mastercard and Nestle between agencies.
B. a-iii, b-i, c-iv, d-ii — correct. Accurately links each renowned advertising agency to its flagship client brand account.
C. a-ii, b-iv, c-i, d-iii — Inverts agency affiliations across brands.
D. a-ii, b-iii, c-i, d-iv — Misattributes Cadbury to McCann.

Question 74

Match List I with List II:

List I	List II
a. Actual Delivery	i. Delivery of means of obtaining possession of goods by the seller to the buyer.
b. Constructive Delivery	ii. Physical handling over of the possession of the goods by the seller to the buyer.
c. Symbolic Delivery	iii. Voluntary transfer of possession of goods from seller to buyer.
d. Delivery	iv. Acknowledgement by a third person in possession of goods to hold them on behalf of and at the disposal of the buyers.

Aa-iv, b-i, c-iii, d-ii
Ba-ii, b-iv, c-i, d-iii
Ca-i, b-iii, c-iv, d-ii
Da-iii, b-ii, c-iv, d-i

Answer: (B) a-ii, b-iv, c-i, d-iii

Explanation

The Sale of Goods Act 1930 recognizes distinct forms of delivery effecting the transfer of possession.

Legal forms of delivery:

a. Actual Delivery — Physical handing over of goods from seller to buyer (matches ii).
b. Constructive Delivery — Acknowledgement by a third-party bailee that goods are held on behalf of the buyer (matches iv).
c. Symbolic Delivery — Delivery of the means of obtaining possession, such as handing over warehouse keys or bills of lading (matches i).
d. Delivery — Defined under Section 2(2) as voluntary transfer of possession from one person to another (matches iii).
A. a-iv, b-i, c-iii, d-ii — Inverts constructive delivery and actual delivery.
B. a-ii, b-iv, c-i, d-iii — correct. Matches every legal delivery category with its exact statutory definition under the Sale of Goods Act.
C. a-i, b-iii, c-iv, d-ii — Confuses symbolic and actual delivery.
D. a-iii, b-ii, c-iv, d-i — Assigns general delivery definition to actual delivery.

Question 75

Match List I with List II:

List I	List II
a. Section 80 EE	i. Deduction in respect of rent paid.
b. Section 80 GG	ii. Deduction in respect of certain donations for scientific researchers.
c. Section 80 GGA	iii. Deduction in respect of interest on loan taken for residential house
d. Section 80 E	iv. Deduction in respect of payment of Interest on loan taken for Higher Education.

Aa-ii, b-iv, c-i, d-iii
Ba-iii, b-i, c-ii, d-iv
Ca-iii, b-i, c-iv, d-ii
Da-ii, b-iv, c-iii, d-i

Answer: (B) a-iii, b-i, c-ii, d-iv

Explanation

Chapter VI-A of the Income-tax Act 1961 provides targeted deductions from gross total income.

Statutory deduction sections:

a. Section 80EE — Deduction up to Rs 50,000 for interest on loan taken for acquisition of residential house property (matches iii).
b. Section 80GG — Deduction in respect of house rent paid by individuals who do not receive HRA (matches i).
c. Section 80GGA — Deduction for donations given toward scientific research or rural development funds (matches ii).
d. Section 80E — Deduction for interest paid on loans borrowed for pursuing higher education (matches iv).
A. a-ii, b-iv, c-i, d-iii — Confuses Section 80EE with scientific research.
B. a-iii, b-i, c-ii, d-iv — correct. Accurately aligns all four Chapter VI-A sections with their designated statutory tax relief purposes.
C. a-iii, b-i, c-iv, d-ii — Inverts higher education and scientific research deductions.
D. a-ii, b-iv, c-iii, d-i — Inverts housing interest and education deductions.

Question 76
Arrange the following countries in the ascending order of their contribution to the WTO budget 2020:
(1) China
(2) Japan
(3) Germany
(4) United States of America
(5) United Kingdom
Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. A1, 2, 4, 5 and 3
2. B4, 1, 2, 5 and 3
3. C5, 2, 3, 1 and 4
4. D4, 1, 2, 3 and 5
Answer: (C) 5, 2, 3, 1 and 4
Explanation
Member contributions to the WTO annual budget are calculated proportionately based on each nation's share of total international trade.

Ranking by 2020 trade share in ascending order:
(5) United Kingdom (approx. 3.8%)
(2) Japan (approx. 4.0%)
(3) Germany (approx. 7.1%)
(1) China (approx. 10.7%)
(4) United States of America (approx. 11.7%)

Ascending sequence: 5 -> 2 -> 3 -> 1 -> 4

A. 1, 2, 4, 5 and 3 — Inverts the ranking by placing top trading nations first.

B. 4, 1, 2, 5 and 3 — Arranges contributors in descending order rather than ascending order.

C. 5, 2, 3, 1 and 4 — correct. Accurately arranges member states from lowest to highest budgetary contributor according to 2020 trade shares.

D. 4, 1, 2, 3 and 5 — Inverts the order of the United States and United Kingdom.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 77
The assets of the Partnership firm, including any sums contributed by the partners to make-up deficiencies of capital at the time of dissolution, shall be applied in the following manner and order:
(1) In paying each partner rateably what is due to him for advances as distinguished from capital.
(2) In paying to each partner rateably what is due to him on account of capital.
(3) In paying the debts of the firm to third parties.
(4) Dividing among the partners in the proportion in which they were entitled to share profits.
Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. A3, 1, 2, 4
2. B3, 2, 1, 4
3. C1, 2, 3, 4
4. D2, 3, 1, 4
Answer: (A) 3, 1, 2, 4
Explanation
Section 48(b) of the Indian Partnership Act 1932 defines the mandatory statutory priority for distributing firm assets upon dissolution.

Statutory settlement hierarchy:
First: Discharging debts and liabilities owed to outside third parties (3)
Second: Paying rateably to each partner loans or advances made beyond their agreed capital (1)
Third: Repaying to each partner their contributed capital balances (2)
Fourth: Distributing any remaining surplus among partners in their profit-sharing ratio (4)

A. 3, 1, 2, 4 — correct. Conforms strictly to the statutory settlement sequence enacted under Section 48(b).

B. 3, 2, 1, 4 — Improperly prioritizes partner capital ahead of partner loans and advances.

C. 1, 2, 3, 4 — Unlawfully satisfies partner claims prior to external third-party creditors.

D. 2, 3, 1, 4 — Places partner capital above external liabilities and advances.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 78
Arrange the following market structures in the increasing order of the price elasticity of products:
(1) Perfect competition
(2) Monopoly
(3) Monopolistic competition
(4) Oligopoly
(5) Duopoly
Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. A3, 4, 5, 2, 1
2. B2, 5, 4, 3, 1
3. C3, 5, 4, 1, 2
4. D1, 3, 4, 5, 2
Answer: (B) 2, 5, 4, 3, 1
Explanation
Price elasticity of demand increases as the availability of close competitor substitutes expands across market forms.

Elasticity progression from lowest to highest:
(2) Monopoly — Single producer with no close substitutes faces relatively inelastic demand.
(5) Duopoly — Only two rival firms control supply.
(4) Oligopoly — Small group of sellers where interdependent firms face a kinked demand curve.
(3) Monopolistic competition — Numerous firms selling differentiated goods create high demand elasticity.
(1) Perfect competition — Homogeneous products and infinite substitutes result in perfectly elastic horizontal demand.

Increasing sequence: 2 -> 5 -> 4 -> 3 -> 1

A. 3, 4, 5, 2, 1 — Misplaces monopolistic competition at the lowest elasticity tier.

B. 2, 5, 4, 3, 1 — correct. Accurately orders market structures from least elastic (monopoly) to infinitely elastic (perfect competition).

C. 3, 5, 4, 1, 2 — Places perfect competition below monopoly.

D. 1, 3, 4, 5, 2 — Inverts the ranking by ordering from highest to lowest elasticity.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 79
The cash flow approach to assessing debt capacity involves the following steps: arrange these steps in a correct sequence:
(1) Specify the tolerance limit on the probability of default.
(2) Estimate the probability distribution of cash flows, taking into account the projected performance of the firm.
(3) Calculate the fixed charges by way of interest payment and principal repayment associated with various levels of debt.
(4) Estimate the debt capacity of the firm as the highest level of debt which is acceptable.
Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. A4, 3, 1, 2
2. B1, 2, 3, 4
3. C2, 3, 4, 1
4. D4, 1, 3, 2
Answer: (B) 1, 2, 3, 4
Explanation
Gordon Donaldson's cash flow approach evaluates corporate debt capacity through cash flow probability distributions and acceptable default risk.

Sequential steps:
(1) Formulating risk tolerance — Management establishes the maximum acceptable probability threshold for cash inadequacy or financial default.
(2) Cash flow forecasting — Developing probability distributions of operational cash flows across prospective economic conditions.
(3) Debt servicing schedules — Calculating fixed cash commitments for interest and principal repayment across debt levels.
(4) Determining optimal borrowing capacity — Selecting the highest debt volume that keeps default probability within policy limits.

A. 4, 3, 1, 2 — Places the final capacity estimate at the beginning.

B. 1, 2, 3, 4 — correct. Follows the logical chronological sequence from risk tolerance policy to final debt capacity determination.

C. 2, 3, 4, 1 — Places risk tolerance limit after final debt capacity.

D. 4, 1, 3, 2 — Begins with the concluding decision.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 80
Arrange the following steps of formulating research proposal in a logical sequential order:
(1) Defining Research problem
(2) Formula of Hypothesis
(3) Review of literature
(4) Collection of data
(5) Research design
Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. A1, 2, 3, 4, 5
2. B1, 5, 2, 3, 4
3. C1, 5, 3, 4, 2
4. D1, 3, 2, 5, 4
Answer: (D) 1, 3, 2, 5, 4
Explanation
A formal scientific research proposal progresses systematically from problem definition through literature review to operational data gathering.

Logical research formulation sequence:
(1) Defining Research problem — Stating the core investigative issue and study boundaries.
(3) Review of literature — Surveying existing literature and prior research to identify knowledge gaps.
(2) Formulation of Hypothesis — Constructing testable relational propositions based on literature insights.
(5) Research design — Developing sampling frameworks, instruments, and analytical methodologies.
(4) Collection of data — Gathering empirical primary or secondary information in the field.

A. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 — Postpones literature review until after hypothesis formulation.

B. 1, 5, 2, 3, 4 — Precipitously introduces research design before surveying scholarly literature.

C. 1, 5, 3, 4, 2 — Places hypothesis formulation at the conclusion after data collection.

D. 1, 3, 2, 5, 4 — correct. Accurately maps the universal scientific methodology sequence for proposal formulation.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 81
Arrange the following stages of the process of organizational change in the sequential order:
1. Detailed consideration of the proposed change.
2. Collection of detailed information and development of alternative approaches in relation to the problem or issues.
3. Evaluation of various alternatives and framing a proposal.
4. Vocalization of the need to change.
5. Search for the main cause underlying the symptoms encountered.
  Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. A4, 5, 2, 1, 3
2. B4, 1, 5, 2, 3
3. C1, 5, 4, 3, 2
4. D2, 5, 4, 1, 3
Answer: (B) 4, 1, 5, 2, 3
Explanation
Organizational change frameworks guide leadership from initial recognition of distress to structured implementation proposals.

Sequential change stages:
4. Vocalization of the need to change — Articulating dissatisfaction with current performance and voicing urgency.

Detailed consideration of the proposed change — Deliberating organizational scope and strategic implications.

Search for underlying cause — Diagnostic probing to identify systemic root causes beneath observable symptoms.

Information collection and alternative development — Gathering operational data to formulate prospective solutions.

Evaluating alternatives and framing proposal — Weighing tradeoffs to finalize the actionable change proposal.

A. 4, 5, 2, 1, 3 — Places detailed consideration after development of alternatives.

B. 4, 1, 5, 2, 3 — correct. Conforms to the standard administrative decision process sequence accepted in examination benchmarks.

C. 1, 5, 4, 3, 2 — Begins with detailed consideration before articulating the need to change.

D. 2, 5, 4, 1, 3 — Precipitously starts with data collection before identifying underlying issues.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 82
Arrange the following steps. in a logical sequence of debt recovery by financial institutions through Debt Recovery Tribunals (DRTs)?
(1) Restrain him from dealing with/disposing of the concerned assets/properties pending at the hearing of the application.
(2) Direct him to disclose particulars of properties other than those specified by the applicant bank.
(3) Show cause within 30 days as to why the relief should not be granted to the bank.
Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. A2, 1, 3
2. B1, 2, 3
3. C2, 3, 1
4. D3, 2, 1
Answer: (D) 3, 2, 1
Explanation
Section 19 of the Recovery of Debts and Bankruptcy Act 1993 outlines judicial procedures for applications filed before Debt Recovery Tribunals.

Procedural sequence upon receiving application:
(3) Show-cause notice — Issuing summons requiring the defendant to show cause within 30 days why relief should not be granted.
(2) Asset disclosure directive — Directing the defendant to disclose particulars of other properties not listed by the applicant bank.
(1) Interim injunction — Restraining the borrower from alienating, transferring, or disposing of charged or disclosed assets pending final adjudication.

Sequence: 3 -> 2 -> 1

A. 2, 1, 3 — Summons to show cause must initiate proceedings before asset disclosure is ordered.

B. 1, 2, 3 — Restraining injunctions follow rather than precede show cause notices.

C. 2, 3, 1 — Summons to show cause must precede asset disclosures.

D. 3, 2, 1 — correct. Accurately maps statutory DRT procedure from initial notice through asset disclosure to interim property restraint.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 83
Arrange the following steps of market feasibility study in the sequential order:
(1) Based on the cost and anticipated sales revenue, calculating the break-even price and the sales volume.
(2) Forecasting sales based on demand estimation and competitive analysis.
(3) Estimation of demand in the target market. of different price levels.
(4) Estimating the cost of serving the market segment.
Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. A2, 3, 4, 1
2. B3, 2, 4, 1
3. C2, 4, 1, 3
4. D3, 2, 1, 4
Answer: (B) 3, 2, 4, 1
Explanation
Market feasibility studies assess commercial viability by moving from market demand estimation to break-even financial modeling.

Sequential analytical steps:
(3) Estimating market demand — Measuring overall potential demand across multiple price points.
(2) Forecasting market sales — Refining potential demand into expected firm sales based on competitor share.
(4) Estimating serving costs — Calculating production, marketing, and distribution expenses required for the target segment.
(1) Calculating break-even — Combining estimated costs and anticipated revenues to determine break-even price and sales volume.

Sequence: 3 -> 2 -> 4 -> 1

A. 2, 3, 4, 1 — Demand estimation must precede sales forecasting.

B. 3, 2, 4, 1 — correct. Logically proceeds from market demand estimation and sales projections to cost calculation and break-even analysis.

C. 2, 4, 1, 3 — Demand estimation cannot appear as the final step after break-even calculation.

D. 3, 2, 1, 4 — Break-even analysis requires cost data and must occur after estimating serving costs.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 84
Arrange the following procedure for the grant of patent in a proper sequence:
(1) The true and first owner shall apply in form I and legal representative of true owner shall apply in form II.
(2) A complete specification shall be filled with a fee of Rs. 50/- within 12 months from the date of filing of application.
(3) The first inventor of the work who claims to be true and first owner or his legal representative.
(4) For each invention separate application for a patent shall be made.
Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. A1, 4, 3, 2
2. B3, 4, 1, 2
3. C2, 1, 4, 3
4. D2, 4, 3, 1
Answer: (B) 3, 4, 1, 2
Explanation
Under the Patents Act 1970, patent grant procedures follow defined statutory stages from qualifying applicants to formal specification filings.

Procedural sequence:
(3) Establishing applicant eligibility — Identifying the true and first inventor or legal representative entitled to apply.
(4) Singularity of invention — Mandating that a distinct separate application be made for each independent invention.
(1) Formal application submission — Filing prescribed statutory forms (Form 1 by inventor or Form 2 by legal representative).
(2) Filing complete specification — Submitting complete specification within 12 months of provisional application.

Sequence: 3 -> 4 -> 1 -> 2

A. 1, 4, 3, 2 — Prematurely places formal form filing before determining applicant eligibility.

B. 3, 4, 1, 2 — correct. Accurately orders statutory steps from legal standing through application requirements to complete specification filing.

C. 2, 1, 4, 3 — Specification filing concludes rather than begins patent application proceedings.

D. 2, 4, 3, 1 — Commences with specification filing.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 85
Sequence the steps for computing depreciation in income from Business and Profession:
(1) The written down value of each block as on the last day of previous year.
(2) Find the value of each block at the beginning of each year.
(3) The money received along with scrap value if any in respect of the same blocks which are sold/ discarded during the year.
(4) Assets required during the year in the respective blocks to which the new assets belong.
Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. A1, 2, 3, 4
2. B2, 4, 3, 1
3. C1, 2, 4, 3
4. D4, 2, 3, 1
Answer: (B) 2, 4, 3, 1
Explanation
Section 43(6)(c) of the Income-tax Act 1961 establishes the exact four-step computational mechanism for determining the written down value of a block of assets.

Computational sequence:
(2) Find opening value — Determine the written down value of the block at the beginning of the previous year.
(4) Add acquisitions — Add the actual cost of new assets acquired during the year belonging to the same block.
(3) Deduct realizations — Deduct moneys payable or scrap value realized on assets sold, discarded, or demolished during the year.
(1) Conclude closing WDV — Arrive at the closing written down value on the last day of the year upon which statutory depreciation percentages are applied.

Sequence: 2 -> 4 -> 3 -> 1

A. 1, 2, 3, 4 — Inverts the process by starting with closing written down value.

B. 2, 4, 3, 1 — correct. Conforms strictly to the statutory accounting sequence under Section 43(6) of the Income-tax Act.

C. 1, 2, 4, 3 — Places closing WDV before opening adjustments.

D. 4, 2, 3, 1 — Positions in-year acquisitions ahead of the opening block balance.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 86
Assertion (A): Foreign investment is playing an increasing role in economic development and contributes to a significant share of the domestic investment, employment generation and exports.
Reason (R): Substantial increase in the magnitude of capital inflows have remarkably improved the balance of payments and foreign exchange reserve position.
In the light of the statements, choose the most appropriate answer from the options given below:
1. ABoth A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A
2. BBoth A and R are correct and R is not the correct explanation of A
3. CA is correct but R is not correct
4. DA is not correct but R is correct
Answer: (B) Both A and R are correct and R is not the correct explanation of A
Explanation
Both statements accurately describe benefits of foreign capital inflows, but external balance improvements do not explain domestic real economy growth.

Evaluation of statements:

Assertion A — True statement because foreign direct investment provides supplementary capital, creates direct and indirect employment, and expands export competitiveness.

Reason R — True statement because robust capital inflows strengthen the capital account, bolster foreign currency reserves, and stabilize the balance of payments.
Reason R describes macroeconomic external reserves rather than explaining why FDI creates domestic employment and exports.

A. Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A — Fails to recognize that forex reserve accumulation is not the causal mechanism for domestic factory employment.

B. Both A and R are correct and R is not the correct explanation of A — correct. Both assertions are historically valid economic facts, but R does not serve as the direct cause of A.

C. A is correct but R is not correct — Erroneously considers external sector improvement invalid.

D. A is not correct but R is correct — Denies the acknowledged role of FDI in domestic capital formation.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 87
Given below are two statements:
Statement I: If firms are disproportionately powerful, the market leader makes the first move and captures two-thirds of the market share, while the follower firm gets only a third of the market share.
Statement II: Oligopolist firms do better by cooperating than following its dominant strategy.
In the light of the above statements. choose the most appropriate answer from the options given below:
1. ABoth Statement I and Statement II are correct
2. BBoth Statement I and Statement II are incorrect
3. CStatement I is correct but Statement II is incorrect
4. DStatement I is incorrect but Statement II is correct
Answer: (A) Both Statement I and Statement II are correct
Explanation
Game theory models demonstrate that first-mover advantages secure market dominance, whereas collusive cooperation outperforms competitive dominant strategies in oligopoly.

Theoretical analysis:

Statement I — In the Stackelberg duopoly model with linear demand and symmetric costs, the first-moving leader firm produces twice the quantity of the follower, capturing precisely two-thirds of the total industry output while the follower receives one-third.

Statement II — In prisoner's dilemma situations typical of oligopoly, collusive cooperation (joint monopoly pricing) yields higher payoffs than playing non-cooperative dominant strategies.

A. Both Statement I and Statement II are correct — correct. Accurately verifies the mathematical Stackelberg leader-follower equilibrium and the game-theoretic benefit of oligopoly cooperation.

B. Both Statement I and Statement II are incorrect — Rejects both well-established industrial organization theorems.

C. Statement I is correct but Statement II is incorrect — Denies the classic prisoner's dilemma payoff outcome.

D. Statement I is incorrect but Statement II is correct — Fails to recognize the standard 2/3 and 1/3 output distribution in Stackelberg equilibria.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 88
Assertion (A): Mean deviation is about 80% of Standard Deviation.
Reason (R): The quartile deviation is about 2/3 of the Standard Deviation.
In the light of the statements, choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. ABoth A and R are true and It is the correct explanation of A
2. BBoth A and R are true and R is NOT the correct explanation of A
3. CA is true but R is false
4. DA is false but R is true
Answer: (B) Both A and R are true and R is NOT the correct explanation of A
Explanation
In a symmetrical normal distribution, standard deviation, mean deviation, and quartile deviation share fixed mathematical proportional relationships.

Mathematical dispersion relationships in normal distributions:

Assertion A — Mean deviation equals sqrt(2/pi) * SD, which is approximately 0.7979 * SD or 4/5 (80%) of standard deviation (true).

Reason R — Quartile deviation equals approximately 0.6745 * SD, which is approximately 2/3 of standard deviation (true).
Both propositions are true properties derived from Gaussian density functions, but Reason R is an independent calculation for quartile deviation and does not serve as the causal explanation for the mean deviation ratio.

A. Both A and R are true and It is the correct explanation of A — Erroneously assumes that the quartile deviation ratio mathematically causes the mean deviation formula.

B. Both A and R are true and R is NOT the correct explanation of A — correct. Confirms that both statistical proportions are valid while recognizing that R is not the explanation of A.

C. A is true but R is false — Incorrectly rejects the established 2/3 quartile deviation property.

D. A is false but R is true — Incorrectly rejects the 80% mean deviation property.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 89
Given below are two statements:
Statement I: Capital market plays an important role in mobilising resources and diverting them in productive channels.
Statement II: Capital market is a market where buyers and sellers engage in trade of financial securities like bonds. stocks. etc.
In the light of the above statements. choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. ABoth Statement I and Statement II are true
2. BBoth Statement I and Statement II are false
3. CStatement I is true but Statement II is false
4. DStatement I is false but Statement II is true
Answer: (A) Both Statement I and Statement II are true
Explanation
The capital market serves as an institutional mechanism that channels long-term household savings into corporate and government investment.

Evaluation of statements:

Statement I — True statement because capital markets intermediate between surplus savers and productive industrial borrowers, optimizing resource allocation.

Statement II — True statement defining the capital market as the venue where equity shares, debentures, and long-term government bonds are issued and traded.

A. Both Statement I and Statement II are true — correct. Confirms that both statements accurately capture the economic purpose and structural definition of capital markets.

B. Both Statement I and Statement II are false — Contradicts established financial definitions.

C. Statement I is true but Statement II is false — Erroneously denies that equity and bond trading characterizes capital markets.

D. Statement I is false but Statement II is true — Erroneously rejects the resource mobilization role of capital markets.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 90
Assertion (A): A the owner of a ship by fraudulently representing her to be seaworthy induces B. on underwriter to insure the ship.
Reason (R): B can obtain cancellation of the policy, as it is a fraud on account of fraudulent misrepresentation under the contract act.
In the light of the statements, choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. ABoth A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
2. BBoth A and R are true and R is NOT the correct explanation of A
3. CA is true but R is false
4. DA is false but R is true
Answer: (A) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
Explanation
Contracts of marine insurance are contracts of utmost good faith (uberrimae fidei) where fraudulent misrepresentation gives the insurer the legal right to rescind.

Legal analysis under Indian Contract Act 1872:

Assertion A — The ship owner induced the underwriter to enter the policy through deliberate, fraudulent misrepresentation of a material fact (seaworthiness).

Reason R — Under Section 19, when consent to an agreement is caused by fraud or fraudulent misrepresentation, the contract is voidable at the option of the defrauded party B, entitling B to cancellation.
Reason R provides the precise legal doctrine that explains why underwriter B can obtain cancellation of the policy induced in Assertion A.

A. Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A — correct. Validates both statements and confirms that R provides the direct statutory justification for A.

B. Both A and R are true and R is NOT the correct explanation of A — Fails to see that the legal doctrine of fraud in R directly explains the insurer's remedy in A.

C. A is true but R is false — Misunderstands statutory remedies for fraud.

D. A is false but R is true — Erroneously rejects the initial contractual scenario.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 91
Which country outlined in the world in terms of FDI inflows in ICT and pharmaceutical sector?
Recuperating of the impact of Covid-19, India attained 13% growth boosted by investments in the digital sector. Infrastructure and energy deals also propped up M&A deals in India. As a result India could achieve 13% growth in Foreign Direct Investment (FDI) in 2020. Amidst global collapse, China is the only other country that has shown remarkably high FDI growth.

An Investment trends monitor issued by the United Nations Conference on Trade and Development (UNCTAD) pointed out, global FDI collapsed in 2020 by 42% to an estimated USD 859 billion from USD 1.5 trillion in 2019. China and India were two major outliers in a gloomy year for foreign direct investment.

India achieved positive growth (13%), boosted by investments in the digital sector where the investments continued particularly through acquisition. Cross border M&A grew 83% to 327 billion. Infrastructure and energy deals also propped up M&A deals in India. India and Turkey are attracting good numbers of deals in IT consulting and digital sectors, including e-commerce platforms, data processing services and digital payments. In terms of individual nations in ICT and pharmaceutical sector, China was the world's largest FDI recipient with flows to the Asian giant rising by 4% to billion. High-tech industries saw an increase of 11% in 2020. and cross-border M&As rose by 54%.

Although their investment activity slowed down initially in 2020, they are now set to take advantage of low interest rates and increasing market values to acquire assets in overseas markets for expansion, as well as rivals and smaller innovative companies affected by the crisis.
1. AIndia
2. BUSA
3. CIsrael
4. DChina
Answer: (D) China
Explanation
According to the passage, China was the premier global recipient of foreign direct investment in technology and pharmaceutical sectors.

Passage citation:
"In terms of individual nations in ICT and pharmaceutical sector, China was the world's largest FDI recipient with flows to the Asian giant rising by 4% to billion."

A. India — Ranked as an outlier with 13% overall growth boosted by digital acquisitions, but was not the largest recipient in ICT and pharmaceuticals.

B. USA — Not identified in the passage as the leading recipient for these sectors.

C. Israel — Not mentioned in the provided text.

D. China — correct. Explicitly identified as the world's largest FDI recipient in ICT and pharmaceuticals with inflows reaching billion.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 92
The author opines in the paragraph that which of the following has helped to acquire assets in overseas markets for expansion.
Recuperating of the impact of Covid-19, India attained 13% growth boosted by investments in the digital sector. Infrastructure and energy deals also propped up M&A deals in India. As a result India could achieve 13% growth in Foreign Direct Investment (FDI) in 2020. Amidst global collapse, China is the only other country that has shown remarkably high FDI growth.

An Investment trends monitor issued by the United Nations Conference on Trade and Development (UNCTAD) pointed out, global FDI collapsed in 2020 by 42% to an estimated USD 859 billion from USD 1.5 trillion in 2019. China and India were two major outliers in a gloomy year for foreign direct investment.

India achieved positive growth (13%), boosted by investments in the digital sector where the investments continued particularly through acquisition. Cross border M&A grew 83% to 327 billion. Infrastructure and energy deals also propped up M&A deals in India. India and Turkey are attracting good numbers of deals in IT consulting and digital sectors, including e-commerce platforms, data processing services and digital payments. In terms of individual nations in ICT and pharmaceutical sector, China was the world's largest FDI recipient with flows to the Asian giant rising by 4% to billion. High-tech industries saw an increase of 11% in 2020. and cross-border M&As rose by 54%.

Although their investment activity slowed down initially in 2020, they are now set to take advantage of low interest rates and increasing market values to acquire assets in overseas markets for expansion, as well as rivals and smaller innovative companies affected by the crisis.
1. ALow interest rates and increasing market values
2. Blow per capita incomes and high resources
3. CAttractive markets and overseas valuations
4. DGovernmental support and incentivization to promote cross border trade.
Answer: (A) Low interest rates and increasing market values
Explanation
The concluding sentence of the passage highlights low borrowing costs and rising asset values as key enablers for cross-border expansion.

Passage citation:
"...they are now set to take advantage of low interest rates and increasing market values to acquire assets in overseas markets for expansion..."

A. Low interest rates and increasing market values — correct. Directly matches the explicit textual explanation provided in the final paragraph.

B. low per capita incomes and high resources — Unrelated economic indicators not cited as drivers of cross-border acquisitions.

C. Attractive markets and overseas valuations — General phrases not specified in the text.

D. Governmental support and incentivization to promote cross border trade. — Not mentioned in the text as the operational mechanism for foreign acquisitions.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 93
Annual increase/decrease in India’s annual FDI inflows and Global FDI flows, respectively are:
Recuperating of the impact of Covid-19, India attained 13% growth boosted by investments in the digital sector. Infrastructure and energy deals also propped up M&A deals in India. As a result India could achieve 13% growth in Foreign Direct Investment (FDI) in 2020. Amidst global collapse, China is the only other country that has shown remarkably high FDI growth.

An Investment trends monitor issued by the United Nations Conference on Trade and Development (UNCTAD) pointed out, global FDI collapsed in 2020 by 42% to an estimated USD 859 billion from USD 1.5 trillion in 2019. China and India were two major outliers in a gloomy year for foreign direct investment.

India achieved positive growth (13%), boosted by investments in the digital sector where the investments continued particularly through acquisition. Cross border M&A grew 83% to 327 billion. Infrastructure and energy deals also propped up M&A deals in India. India and Turkey are attracting good numbers of deals in IT consulting and digital sectors, including e-commerce platforms, data processing services and digital payments. In terms of individual nations in ICT and pharmaceutical sector, China was the world's largest FDI recipient with flows to the Asian giant rising by 4% to billion. High-tech industries saw an increase of 11% in 2020. and cross-border M&As rose by 54%.

Although their investment activity slowed down initially in 2020, they are now set to take advantage of low interest rates and increasing market values to acquire assets in overseas markets for expansion, as well as rivals and smaller innovative companies affected by the crisis.
1. AUSD 27 billion and USD 163 billion
2. B+13% and -42%
3. C-4% and +11%
4. DData not available
Answer: (B) +13% and -42%
Explanation
The passage explicitly reports that India recorded a 13% positive growth while global foreign direct investment contracted by 42% in 2020.

Passage citations:
"India achieved positive growth (13%), boosted by investments in the digital sector..."
"...global FDI collapsed in 2020 by 42% to an estimated USD 859 billion from USD 1.5 trillion in 2019."

A. USD 27 billion and USD 163 billion — Cites absolute dollar figures for other transactions and Chinese inflows rather than percentage growth rates.

B. +13% and -42% — correct. Accurately reports India's 13% expansion alongside the 42% global contraction.

C. -4% and +11% — Inverts and alters the figures cited for China and high-tech industries.

D. Data not available — Directly contradicted by prominent figures given in the first and second paragraphs.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 94
India and Turkey are attracting record numbers of deals in-
Recuperating of the impact of Covid-19, India attained 13% growth boosted by investments in the digital sector. Infrastructure and energy deals also propped up M&A deals in India. As a result India could achieve 13% growth in Foreign Direct Investment (FDI) in 2020. Amidst global collapse, China is the only other country that has shown remarkably high FDI growth.

An Investment trends monitor issued by the United Nations Conference on Trade and Development (UNCTAD) pointed out, global FDI collapsed in 2020 by 42% to an estimated USD 859 billion from USD 1.5 trillion in 2019. China and India were two major outliers in a gloomy year for foreign direct investment.

India achieved positive growth (13%), boosted by investments in the digital sector where the investments continued particularly through acquisition. Cross border M&A grew 83% to 327 billion. Infrastructure and energy deals also propped up M&A deals in India. India and Turkey are attracting good numbers of deals in IT consulting and digital sectors, including e-commerce platforms, data processing services and digital payments. In terms of individual nations in ICT and pharmaceutical sector, China was the world's largest FDI recipient with flows to the Asian giant rising by 4% to billion. High-tech industries saw an increase of 11% in 2020. and cross-border M&As rose by 54%.

Although their investment activity slowed down initially in 2020, they are now set to take advantage of low interest rates and increasing market values to acquire assets in overseas markets for expansion, as well as rivals and smaller innovative companies affected by the crisis.
1. AOverall production
2. BIT consulting and digital sectors
3. CPharmaceutical and allied sectors
4. DGDP and Per Capita Income
Answer: (B) IT consulting and digital sectors
Explanation
The third paragraph explicitly specifies the business domains driving transaction deal volumes in India and Turkey.

Passage citation:
"India and Turkey are attracting good numbers of deals in IT consulting and digital sectors, including e-commerce platforms, data processing services and digital payments."

A. Overall production — Manufacturing and overall production deals are not mentioned for Turkey.

B. IT consulting and digital sectors — correct. Accurately identifies the specific consulting and digital technology sectors highlighted in the passage.

C. Pharmaceutical and allied sectors — Mentioned exclusively in relation to Chinese FDI inflows in the subsequent sentence.

D. GDP and Per Capita Income — National income accounting aggregates rather than deal-making sectors.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 95
Which statement is not true about China?
Recuperating of the impact of Covid-19, India attained 13% growth boosted by investments in the digital sector. Infrastructure and energy deals also propped up M&A deals in India. As a result India could achieve 13% growth in Foreign Direct Investment (FDI) in 2020. Amidst global collapse, China is the only other country that has shown remarkably high FDI growth.

An Investment trends monitor issued by the United Nations Conference on Trade and Development (UNCTAD) pointed out, global FDI collapsed in 2020 by 42% to an estimated USD 859 billion from USD 1.5 trillion in 2019. China and India were two major outliers in a gloomy year for foreign direct investment.

India achieved positive growth (13%), boosted by investments in the digital sector where the investments continued particularly through acquisition. Cross border M&A grew 83% to 327 billion. Infrastructure and energy deals also propped up M&A deals in India. India and Turkey are attracting good numbers of deals in IT consulting and digital sectors, including e-commerce platforms, data processing services and digital payments. In terms of individual nations in ICT and pharmaceutical sector, China was the world's largest FDI recipient with flows to the Asian giant rising by 4% to billion. High-tech industries saw an increase of 11% in 2020. and cross-border M&As rose by 54%.

Although their investment activity slowed down initially in 2020, they are now set to take advantage of low interest rates and increasing market values to acquire assets in overseas markets for expansion, as well as rivals and smaller innovative companies affected by the crisis.
1. AFDI inflows increase by 4%
2. BInternational M&A increase by 54%
3. CHighest FDI in ICT and Pharmaceutical sector
4. DUSD 1.5 Trillion sized economy
Answer: (D) USD 1.5 Trillion sized economy
Explanation
In the passage, USD 1.5 trillion represents total global foreign direct investment in 2019 rather than the size of China's economy.

Passage textual evidence:
China experienced flows rising by 4% to billion (Statement A is true).
Cross-border M&As involving China rose by 54% (Statement B is true).
China was the world's largest recipient in ICT and pharmaceuticals (Statement C is true).
Paragraph two states that global FDI collapsed from USD 1.5 trillion in 2019, making Statement D untrue regarding China.

A. FDI inflows increase by 4% — True statement directly reported in paragraph three.

B. International M&A increase by 54% — True statement directly reported in paragraph three.

C. Highest FDI in ICT and Pharmaceutical sector — True statement directly confirmed in paragraph three.

D. USD 1.5 Trillion sized economy — correct (not true about China). Misattributes the 2019 worldwide FDI total to China's gross domestic product.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 96
Statement I: Management is the ultimate tool for achieving business goals.
Statement II: It was management only which initiated the industrial revolution.
In the light of the statements, choose the correct answer:
Management theories help organizations to focus, communicate, and evolve. Using management theory in the workplace allows leadership to focus on their main goals. When a management style or theory is implemented, it automatically streamlines the top priorities for the organization. Management theory also allows us to better communicate with people we work with which in turn allows us to work more efficiently. By understanding management theory, basic assumptions about management styles and goals can be assumed and can save time during daily interactions and meetings within an organization.

Theories can only reach so far, and management theories are no exception. There is no such thing as a one-size-fits-all management theory. What may work for one organization may not be relevant for another. Therefore. when one theory does not fit a particular situation. it is important to explore the option of developing a new theory that would lead in a new, more applicable direction. While some theories can stand the test of time, other theories may grow to be irrelevant and new theories will develop in their place.

From the late 1700s through the early 1900s. the Industrial Revolution brought extraordinary change to the workplace and forever transformed the way companies operate. The Industrial Revolution brought better and faster technology allowing companies to perform more efficiently than ever before and giving them the ability to dramatically increase their output. In order to meet demand, company leadership had to ensure their employees were productive.
1. ABoth Statement I and Statement II are true
2. BBoth Statement I and Statement II are false
3. CStatement I is true but Statement II is false
4. DStatement I is false but Statement II is true
Answer: (C) Statement I is true but Statement II is false
Explanation
Management theory guides leadership in achieving corporate goals, but the Industrial Revolution was ignited by technology and mechanical inventions rather than management alone.

Analysis from passage text:

Statement I — The passage affirms that management theory allows leadership to focus on main goals and streamline top priorities, functioning as an essential organizational tool (true).

Statement II — The passage explains that the Industrial Revolution brought better and faster technology that transformed operating practices, rather than management being the sole initiator (false).

A. Both Statement I and Statement II are true — Erroneously considers Statement II valid despite technological origins.

B. Both Statement I and Statement II are false — Fails to recognize the acknowledged efficacy of management in achieving goals.

C. Statement I is true but Statement II is false — correct. Accurately distinguishes the proven value of management tools from the technological origins of industrialization.

D. Statement I is false but Statement II is true — Inverts the truth value of both assertions.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 97
What helps leadership to focus on their main goal?
(1) Management theories
(2) Organizational structure
(3) Inter-personal relations
(4) Effective HR policies
(5) Government Directives
Choose the correct answer:
Management theories help organizations to focus, communicate, and evolve. Using management theory in the workplace allows leadership to focus on their main goals. When a management style or theory is implemented, it automatically streamlines the top priorities for the organization. Management theory also allows us to better communicate with people we work with which in turn allows us to work more efficiently. By understanding management theory, basic assumptions about management styles and goals can be assumed and can save time during daily interactions and meetings within an organization.

Theories can only reach so far, and management theories are no exception. There is no such thing as a one-size-fits-all management theory. What may work for one organization may not be relevant for another. Therefore. when one theory does not fit a particular situation. it is important to explore the option of developing a new theory that would lead in a new, more applicable direction. While some theories can stand the test of time, other theories may grow to be irrelevant and new theories will develop in their place.

From the late 1700s through the early 1900s. the Industrial Revolution brought extraordinary change to the workplace and forever transformed the way companies operate. The Industrial Revolution brought better and faster technology allowing companies to perform more efficiently than ever before and giving them the ability to dramatically increase their output. In order to meet demand, company leadership had to ensure their employees were productive.
1. A1, 2 and 3 only
2. B2, 3 and 4 only
3. C1 and 2 only
4. D1 only
Answer: (D) 1 only
Explanation
The opening paragraph explicitly identifies management theories as the specific mechanism enabling leadership focus.

Passage citation:
"Using management theory in the workplace allows leadership to focus on their main goals."

A. 1, 2 and 3 only — Adds organizational structure and inter-personal relations which are not stated as the source of leadership goal focus.

B. 2, 3 and 4 only — Omits management theories entirely.

C. 1 and 2 only — Extends beyond the specific passage statement.

D. 1 only — correct. Directly matches the unambiguous assertion in sentence two of the passage.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 98
In the paragraph, what is meant by “There is no such thing as a non-size fits all management theory”
(1) Management theories keeps on changing.
(2) There are different theories for different situations.
(3) A business can’t grow without management theories.
(4) Management theories are non-scientific.
Choose the correct answer:
Management theories help organizations to focus, communicate, and evolve. Using management theory in the workplace allows leadership to focus on their main goals. When a management style or theory is implemented, it automatically streamlines the top priorities for the organization. Management theory also allows us to better communicate with people we work with which in turn allows us to work more efficiently. By understanding management theory, basic assumptions about management styles and goals can be assumed and can save time during daily interactions and meetings within an organization.

Theories can only reach so far, and management theories are no exception. There is no such thing as a one-size-fits-all management theory. What may work for one organization may not be relevant for another. Therefore. when one theory does not fit a particular situation. it is important to explore the option of developing a new theory that would lead in a new, more applicable direction. While some theories can stand the test of time, other theories may grow to be irrelevant and new theories will develop in their place.

From the late 1700s through the early 1900s. the Industrial Revolution brought extraordinary change to the workplace and forever transformed the way companies operate. The Industrial Revolution brought better and faster technology allowing companies to perform more efficiently than ever before and giving them the ability to dramatically increase their output. In order to meet demand, company leadership had to ensure their employees were productive.
1. A1, 2 and 3 only
2. B2, 3 and 4 only
3. C3 and 4 only
4. D1 and 2 only
Answer: (D) 1 and 2 only
Explanation
The passage underscores the situational contingency and continual evolution of management theories.

Passage textual evidence:
"What may work for one organization may not be relevant for another... when one theory does not fit a particular situation, it is important to explore... other theories may grow to be irrelevant and new theories will develop in their place."
This directly demonstrates that different situations require different theories (2) and that theories evolve and change over time (1).

A. 1, 2 and 3 only — Incorrectly incorporates statement 3 which is not part of the one-size-fits-all critique.

B. 2, 3 and 4 only — Statement 4 is ungrounded as theories are not labeled non-scientific.

C. 3 and 4 only — Omits both genuine situational and evolutionary meanings.

D. 1 and 2 only — correct. Accurately links situational diversity and evolutionary change to the passage's rejection of universal theories.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 99
Assertion (A): The industrial revolution brought better and faster technology allowing companies to perform more efficiently than ever before and gave them ability to dramatically increase their output.
Reason (R): In order to meet demand, company leadership had to ensure their employees were productive.
In the light of the statements, choose the most appropriate answer:
Management theories help organizations to focus, communicate, and evolve. Using management theory in the workplace allows leadership to focus on their main goals. When a management style or theory is implemented, it automatically streamlines the top priorities for the organization. Management theory also allows us to better communicate with people we work with which in turn allows us to work more efficiently. By understanding management theory, basic assumptions about management styles and goals can be assumed and can save time during daily interactions and meetings within an organization.

Theories can only reach so far, and management theories are no exception. There is no such thing as a one-size-fits-all management theory. What may work for one organization may not be relevant for another. Therefore. when one theory does not fit a particular situation. it is important to explore the option of developing a new theory that would lead in a new, more applicable direction. While some theories can stand the test of time, other theories may grow to be irrelevant and new theories will develop in their place.

From the late 1700s through the early 1900s. the Industrial Revolution brought extraordinary change to the workplace and forever transformed the way companies operate. The Industrial Revolution brought better and faster technology allowing companies to perform more efficiently than ever before and giving them the ability to dramatically increase their output. In order to meet demand, company leadership had to ensure their employees were productive.
1. ABoth A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A
2. BBoth A and R are correct and R is NOT the correct explanation of A
3. CA is correct but R is not correct
4. DA is not correct but R is correct
Answer: (B) Both A and R are correct and R is NOT the correct explanation of A
Explanation
Both statements represent accurate historical observations from the passage, but employee productivity pressure does not explain technological innovation.

Textual evaluation:

Assertion A — The Industrial Revolution introduced advanced technology that dramatically enhanced operational efficiency and output volume (true).

Reason R — Surging market demand required company leadership to maximize employee productivity (true).
Reason R explains the managerial imperative to supervise worker labor, whereas the efficiency gains in Assertion A were caused by technological inventions.

A. Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A — Fails to recognize that labor productivity demands did not cause the emergence of steam and mechanical technology.

B. Both A and R are correct and R is NOT the correct explanation of A — correct. Confirms the textual accuracy of both claims while demonstrating that R is not the explanation of A.

C. A is correct but R is not correct — Disregards the verified accuracy of Reason R.

D. A is not correct but R is correct — Disregards the verified accuracy of Assertion A.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 100
Which of the following is NOT a correct statement?
Management theories help organizations to focus, communicate, and evolve. Using management theory in the workplace allows leadership to focus on their main goals. When a management style or theory is implemented, it automatically streamlines the top priorities for the organization. Management theory also allows us to better communicate with people we work with which in turn allows us to work more efficiently. By understanding management theory, basic assumptions about management styles and goals can be assumed and can save time during daily interactions and meetings within an organization.

Theories can only reach so far, and management theories are no exception. There is no such thing as a one-size-fits-all management theory. What may work for one organization may not be relevant for another. Therefore. when one theory does not fit a particular situation. it is important to explore the option of developing a new theory that would lead in a new, more applicable direction. While some theories can stand the test of time, other theories may grow to be irrelevant and new theories will develop in their place.

From the late 1700s through the early 1900s. the Industrial Revolution brought extraordinary change to the workplace and forever transformed the way companies operate. The Industrial Revolution brought better and faster technology allowing companies to perform more efficiently than ever before and giving them the ability to dramatically increase their output. In order to meet demand, company leadership had to ensure their employees were productive.
1. AIndustrial revolution was a turning point in Business operations.
2. BManagement theories are ever-changing.
3. CGood management makes communication flow better.
4. DManagement always moves in a straight line.
Answer: (D) Management always moves in a straight line.
Explanation
Management is inherently situational, contingency-based, and evolutionary rather than rigid or rectilinear.

Evaluation of statements:

A. Industrial revolution was a turning point in Business operations. — True statement directly supported by paragraph three.

B. Management theories are ever-changing. — True statement affirmed by paragraph two regarding theory evolution.

C. Good management makes communication flow better. — True statement affirmed in paragraph one regarding streamlined workplace communication.

D. Management always moves in a straight line. — correct (not a correct statement). Contradicts the fundamental premise that management must continually adapt and explore new directions when situations change.

A. Industrial revolution was a turning point in Business operations. — Accurate historical fact.

B. Management theories are ever-changing. — Accurate characterization of dynamic theory evolution.

C. Good management makes communication flow better. — Accurate reflection of organizational benefits.

D. Management always moves in a straight line. — Incorrect and rigid claim.
Sign in to read the full explanation

Attempt Paper 2 — Commerce · November 25, 2021 · Shift 2 as a timed test

Spotted a shift or questions missing from this paper?

Paper 1 — General Aptitude · November 26, 2021 · Shift 1

Attempt this paper

50 questions with the answer key and explanations.

Question 1
Find out the difference between the average export and average import for the country P.
The following table shows the total Exports and Imports of 5 countries over 4 years (in Rs Crore):

Country 2017 I 2017 E 2018 I 2018 E 2019 I 2019 E 2020 I 2020 E
P 25 30 24 32 28 36 22 32
Q 28 26 26 31 29 37 26 34
R 24 32 28 25 32 36 28 34
S 22 28 18 28 16 21 23 32
T 26 31 16 33 12 23 21 28

(I = Import, E = Export)
1. A8.25
2. B7.75
3. C8.50
4. D7.25
Answer: (B) 7.75
Explanation
The difference between the average export and average import for Country P is 7.75 crore rupees.

Exports of Country P across 2017–2020:
Total exports = 30 + 32 + 36 + 32 = 130 crore
Average export = 130 / 4 = 32.50 crore

Imports of Country P across 2017–2020:
Total imports = 25 + 24 + 28 + 22 = 99 crore
Average import = 99 / 4 = 24.75 crore

Difference = 32.50 - 24.75 = 7.75 crore

A. 8.25 — represents an arithmetic slip in calculating Country P's total imports as 97 instead of 99.

B. 7.75 — correct. Exactly equals the difference between the four-year average export (32.50) and average import (24.75).

C. 8.50 — represents an error by omitting the 2019 import value of 28.

D. 7.25 — represents miscalculating total exports as 128 instead of 130.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 2
Which country has the maximum percentage of profit increase from 2019 to 2020?

(Profit = Export - Import)
The following table shows the total Exports and Imports of 5 countries over 4 years (in Rs Crore):

Country 2017 I 2017 E 2018 I 2018 E 2019 I 2019 E 2020 I 2020 E
P 25 30 24 32 28 36 22 32
Q 28 26 26 31 29 37 26 34
R 24 32 28 25 32 36 28 34
S 22 28 18 28 16 21 23 32
T 26 31 16 33 12 23 21 28

(I = Import, E = Export)
1. AP
2. BQ
3. CR
4. DS
Answer: (D) S
Explanation
Country S has the maximum percentage profit increase from 2019 to 2020 at 80%.

Profit calculations for each option country (Profit = Export - Import):

Country P:
2019 Profit = 36 - 28 = 8 crore
2020 Profit = 32 - 22 = 10 crore
Increase = 10 - 8 = 2 crore
Percentage increase = (2 / 8) * 100 = 25%

Country Q:
2019 Profit = 37 - 29 = 8 crore
2020 Profit = 34 - 26 = 8 crore
Increase = 8 - 8 = 0 crore (0% increase)

Country R:
2019 Profit = 36 - 32 = 4 crore
2020 Profit = 34 - 28 = 6 crore
Increase = 6 - 4 = 2 crore
Percentage increase = (2 / 4) * 100 = 50%

Country S:
2019 Profit = 21 - 16 = 5 crore
2020 Profit = 32 - 23 = 9 crore
Increase = 9 - 5 = 4 crore
Percentage increase = (4 / 5) * 100 = 80%

Comparing all countries, Country S achieved the largest relative gain (80%).

A. P — achieved a 25% increase in profit.

B. Q — showed zero growth with identical profit of 8 crore in both years.

C. R — achieved a 50% increase in profit.

D. S — correct. Highest profit growth at 80%.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 3
Which year has the maximum export?
The following table shows the total Exports and Imports of 5 countries over 4 years (in Rs Crore):

Country 2017 I 2017 E 2018 I 2018 E 2019 I 2019 E 2020 I 2020 E
P 25 30 24 32 28 36 22 32
Q 28 26 26 31 29 37 26 34
R 24 32 28 25 32 36 28 34
S 22 28 18 28 16 21 23 32
T 26 31 16 33 12 23 21 28

(I = Import, E = Export)
1. A2017
2. B2018
3. C2019
4. D2020
Answer: (D) 2020
Explanation
The year 2020 recorded the highest total exports among all five countries at 160 crore rupees.

Total exports across all five countries by year:

2017: 30 + 26 + 32 + 28 + 31 = 147 crore
2018: 32 + 31 + 25 + 28 + 33 = 149 crore
2019: 36 + 37 + 36 + 21 + 23 = 153 crore
2020: 32 + 34 + 34 + 32 + 28 = 160 crore

Year 2020 surpasses all previous years.

A. 2017 — total exports were 147 crore.

B. 2018 — total exports were 149 crore.

C. 2019 — total exports were 153 crore.

D. 2020 — correct. Total exports reached the maximum value of 160 crore.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 4
Which year has the minimum average import?
The following table shows the total Exports and Imports of 5 countries over 4 years (in Rs Crore):

Country 2017 I 2017 E 2018 I 2018 E 2019 I 2019 E 2020 I 2020 E
P 25 30 24 32 28 36 22 32
Q 28 26 26 31 29 37 26 34
R 24 32 28 25 32 36 28 34
S 22 28 18 28 16 21 23 32
T 26 31 16 33 12 23 21 28

(I = Import, E = Export)
1. A2017
2. B2018
3. C2019
4. D2020
Answer: (B) 2018
Explanation
The year 2018 had the lowest average import across the five countries at 22.4 crore rupees.

Since the number of countries is constant (5), the year with the lowest total import also has the lowest average import.

Total and average imports by year:

2017: 25 + 28 + 24 + 22 + 26 = 125 crore (Average = 25.0 crore)
2018: 24 + 26 + 28 + 18 + 16 = 112 crore (Average = 22.4 crore)
2019: 28 + 29 + 32 + 16 + 12 = 117 crore (Average = 23.4 crore)
2020: 22 + 26 + 28 + 23 + 21 = 120 crore (Average = 24.0 crore)

Year 2018 has the lowest total (112 crore) and lowest average (22.4 crore).

A. 2017 — average import was 25.0 crore.

B. 2018 — correct. Lowest average import of 22.4 crore.

C. 2019 — average import was 23.4 crore.

D. 2020 — average import was 24.0 crore.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 5
Find out the ratio of export done by country S and T during 2017-2020.
The following table shows the total Exports and Imports of 5 countries over 4 years (in Rs Crore):

Country 2017 I 2017 E 2018 I 2018 E 2019 I 2019 E 2020 I 2020 E
P 25 30 24 32 28 36 22 32
Q 28 26 26 31 29 37 26 34
R 24 32 28 25 32 36 28 34
S 22 28 18 28 16 21 23 32
T 26 31 16 33 12 23 21 28

(I = Import, E = Export)
1. A109/115
2. B111/115
3. C108/117
4. D107/117
Answer: (A) 109/115
Explanation
The ratio of exports done by country S to country T during 2017–2020 is 109/115.

Total exports for Country S (2017–2020):
28 + 28 + 21 + 32 = 109 crore

Total exports for Country T (2017–2020):
31 + 33 + 23 + 28 = 115 crore

Ratio = 109 / 115

A. 109/115 — correct. Matches the four-year export totals for S (109) and T (115).

B. 111/115 — results from miscalculating country S exports as 111.

C. 108/117 — results from summing import data instead of export data.

D. 107/117 — results from arithmetic slips in both numerator and denominator.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 6
Which region of brain is involved in our ability to learn new information, particularly if it is verbal?
1. ACerebrum
2. BHippocampus
3. CPons
4. DThalamus
Answer: (B) Hippocampus
Explanation
The hippocampus is the primary brain structure responsible for encoding and consolidating new information into long-term memory, especially verbal information.

Cognitive psychology and neuroscience establish that the hippocampus (specifically in the medial temporal lobe, with the left hippocampus specializing in verbal memory) is critical for converting short-term memories into permanent storage.

A. Cerebrum — oversees higher cognitive functions, motor control, and sensory perception broadly, but consolidation of new verbal memories is localized to the hippocampus.

B. Hippocampus — correct. Central organ for learning new facts and consolidating verbal declarations.

C. Pons — serves as a relay between the cerebellum and cerebral cortex and regulates autonomic functions such as breathing and sleep cycles.

D. Thalamus — acts as the main sensory relay station directing sensory inputs to the cortex rather than encoding new verbal memory.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 7
mooKIT platform uses ________, an open source content management system.
1. ADRUPAL
2. BJOOMLA
3. CSAKAI
4. DMoodle
Answer: (A) DRUPAL
Explanation
The mooKIT massive open online course platform is built upon Drupal as its underlying content management framework.

Developed by the Indian Institute of Technology Kanpur (IIT Kanpur), mooKIT is designed to deliver lightweight, scalable online courses tailored for low-bandwidth environments, utilizing Drupal to organize content, user permissions, and instructional workflows.

A. DRUPAL — correct. The open-source CMS powering the backend of IIT Kanpur's mooKIT architecture.

B. JOOMLA — an independent open-source CMS not used in mooKIT's implementation.

C. SAKAI — an open-source learning management system that was tested in earlier online learning trials at IIT Kanpur before mooKIT was engineered.

D. Moodle — an independent, widely deployed LMS framework distinct from the mooKIT system.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 8
INFLIBNET Centre, which is an autonomous Inter-University Centre of the University Grants Commission, maintains
1. ASwayam Prabha
2. Be-Pathshala
3. Ce-Gyankosh
4. DShodhganga
Answer: (D) Shodhganga
Explanation
Shodhganga is the flagship digital repository maintained by the INFLIBNET Centre to archive Indian doctoral theses and dissertations.

The Information and Library Network (INFLIBNET) Centre, an autonomous Inter-University Centre located in Gandhinagar, Gujarat, was mandated by UGC to operate Shodhganga as an open-access platform to curb plagiarism and share research findings.

A. Swayam Prabha — a group of 34 educational DTH TV channels whose content generation is coordinated primarily by CEC and NPTEL.

B. e-Pathshala — a joint digital textbook and educational resources initiative launched by the Ministry of Education and NCERT.

C. e-Gyankosh — a national digital repository storing self-instructional learning materials developed by IGNOU.

D. Shodhganga — correct. The designated UGC-mandated repository of full-text theses created and hosted by INFLIBNET.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 9
Given below are two statements

Statement I: According to Piaget, the ability to solve conservation problems depends on having an understanding of three basic aspects of reasoning: identity, compensation, and reversibility.

Statement II: The stage of classification does not depend on a student's ability to focus on a single characteristic of objects in a set and group the objects according to that characteristic.

In light of the above statements, choose the most appropriate answer from the options given below
1. ABoth Statement I and Statement II are correct
2. BBoth Statement I and Statement II are incorrect
3. CStatement I is correct but Statement II is incorrect
4. DStatement I is incorrect but Statement II is correct
Answer: (C) Statement I is correct but Statement II is incorrect
Explanation
Statement I is correct because Jean Piaget identified identity, compensation, and reversibility as the three cognitive operations essential for mastering conservation.

Statement II is incorrect because classification in Piagetian cognitive development fundamentally requires the learner to identify a common attribute and categorize items based on that single characteristic.

Statement I is correct — conservation in the concrete operational stage requires grasping that quantity remains identical despite transformations (identity), that changes in one dimension offset another (compensation), and that actions can be mentally undone (reversibility).

Statement II is incorrect — early classification directly relies on focusing on a defining characteristic (such as color or shape) to group objects together systematically.

A. Both Statement I and Statement II are correct — incorrect because Statement II denies the defining role of single-attribute focus in grouping.

B. Both Statement I and Statement II are incorrect — incorrect because Statement I accurately states Piaget's core criteria for conservation.

C. Statement I is correct but Statement II is incorrect — correct. Evaluates the accuracy of each developmental principle.

D. Statement I is incorrect but Statement II is correct — incorrect because it inverts the truth value of both propositions.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 10
According to Urie Bronfenbrenner's biological model of human development, microsystem constitutes ________.

A. Immediate family
B. School
C. Beliefs
D. Customs
E. Neighbourhood

Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. AA, B and C only
2. BA, C and E only
3. CA, B and E only
4. DC, D and E only
Answer: (C) A, B and E only
Explanation
In Bronfenbrenner's ecological systems theory, the microsystem consists of the immediate, face-to-face settings in which the child directly interacts: family, school, and neighborhood.

Urie Bronfenbrenner organized human development into nested environmental layers:

Microsystem: immediate environments with direct social interaction (Immediate family, School, Neighbourhood).

Mesosystem: interactions between microsystems (such as family-school relationships).

Exosystem: external settings that indirectly affect the child (such as parental workplaces).

Macrosystem: overarching cultural values, beliefs, customs, and laws (Beliefs and Customs belong here).

Therefore, only items A, B, and E belong to the microsystem.

A. A, B and C only — incorrectly includes cultural beliefs, which belong to the macrosystem.

B. A, C and E only — omits school and mistakenly incorporates macrosystem beliefs.

C. A, B and E only — correct. Identifies the three direct micro-environments.

D. C, D and E only — erroneously bundles macrosystem elements (C and D) into the microsystem.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 11
Which one of the following is an important characteristic of the researchers involved in qualitative study?
1. ANon-partisan
2. BReflexivity
3. CTransparency
4. DEnthusiasm
Answer: (B) Reflexivity
Explanation
Reflexivity is the central epistemological practice whereby qualitative researchers critically examine their own biases, assumptions, and positioning relative to the study.

In qualitative inquiry, the researcher serves as the primary instrument of data collection and interpretation, making continuous self-reflection on subjective influence indispensable.

A. Non-partisan — refers to political detachment, whereas qualitative inquiry acknowledges that researchers cannot be entirely detached from social contexts.

B. Reflexivity — correct. Recognizes self-awareness and transparent accounting of the researcher's background and subjective influence.

C. Transparency — a general methodological norm applicable across all empirical disciplines, not the signature identity of qualitative researchers.

D. Enthusiasm — a personal emotional disposition rather than an established research standard.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 12
Some of the types of hypothesis are as follows:

A. Descriptive
B. Null
C. Confounding
D. Intervening
E. Explanatory (Causal)

Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. AA, B and C only
2. BB, C and D only
3. CA, B and D only
4. DA, B and E only
Answer: (D) A, B and E only
Explanation
Descriptive, null, and explanatory (causal) are recognized types of hypotheses, whereas confounding and intervening are classifications of variables.

Classification in research methodology:

Hypotheses: Descriptive (stating expected characteristics), Null (stating no relationship or difference), and Explanatory/Causal (predicting cause-and-effect relationships).

Variables: Confounding (extraneous factors distorting the relationship) and Intervening (mediating links connecting independent and dependent variables).

Therefore, only A, B, and E are hypotheses.

A. A, B and C only — wrongly includes confounding, which is an extraneous variable.

B. B, C and D only — combines one hypothesis with two variable classifications.

C. A, B and D only — mistakenly categorizes intervening variables as hypotheses.

D. A, B and E only — correct. Accurately isolates the three valid hypothesis categories.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 13
Given below are two statements

Statement I: Exploration is particularly useful when researchers lack a clear idea of the problems they will meet during the study.

Statement II: Through exploration, researchers develop concepts more clearly, establish priorities, develop operational definitions, and improve the final research design.

In light of the above statements, choose the correct answer from the options given below
1. ABoth Statement I and Statement II are true
2. BBoth Statement I and Statement II are false
3. CStatement I is true but Statement II is false
4. DStatement I is false but Statement II is true
Answer: (A) Both Statement I and Statement II are true
Explanation
Both statements accurately articulate the core purpose and methodological benefits of exploratory research design.

Exploratory research is undertaken when little is known about a phenomenon or the problem is poorly understood:

Statement I is true: it provides flexibility when the boundaries of the investigation are vague.

Statement II is true: it clarifies ambiguous concepts, establishes inquiry priorities, refines operational definitions, and lays the foundation for rigorous subsequent designs.

A. Both Statement I and Statement II are true — correct. Accurately describes exploratory research objectives.

B. Both Statement I and Statement II are false — incorrect because both statements represent textbook tenets of exploratory studies.

C. Statement I is true but Statement II is false — incorrect because exploratory work explicitly serves to sharpen concepts and operational definitions.

D. Statement I is false but Statement II is true — incorrect because exploration is specifically designed for situations lacking initial clarity.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 14
Survey research is based on which of the following?
1. AConstructivism
2. BInterpretivism
3. CPositivism
4. DHermeneutics
Answer: (C) Positivism
Explanation
Survey research is grounded in positivism, which emphasizes empirical observation, quantitative measurement, and generalizable objective findings.

Positivist philosophy asserts that social reality can be studied using scientific, objective methods:

Standardized questionnaires and large-scale sampling generate quantifiable data to test deductive hypotheses.

Constructivism, interpretivism, and hermeneutics are qualitative paradigms focused on subjective meanings, individual interpretation, and textual hermeneutics rather than quantitative surveys.

A. Constructivism — posits that knowledge is socially constructed through human interaction rather than measured through standardized surveys.

B. Interpretivism — prioritizes empathetic understanding (Verstehen) and qualitative depth over structured surveys.

C. Positivism — correct. Forms the epistemological foundation of quantitative, structured survey methodology.

D. Hermeneutics — the philosophical interpretation of literary, religious, or social texts.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 15
Which among the following are non-parametric statistics?

A. t-test
B. F-test
C. Spearman's rank order correlation
D. Mann-Whitney-Wilcoxon test
E. Kendall coefficient of concordance

Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. AA, B and C only
2. BB, C and D only
3. CB, D and E only
4. DC, D and E only
Answer: (D) C, D and E only
Explanation
Spearman's rank correlation, the Mann-Whitney-Wilcoxon test, and Kendall's coefficient of concordance are distribution-free non-parametric statistical techniques.

Statistical test classifications:

Parametric tests (require normal distribution and interval/ratio scales): Student's t-test (A) and Fisher's F-test / ANOVA (B).

Non-parametric tests (distribution-free, suitable for ranked/ordinal or non-normal data): Spearman's rank correlation (C), Mann-Whitney-Wilcoxon test (D), and Kendall's coefficient of concordance W (E).

Therefore, C, D, and E are the non-parametric statistics.

A. A, B and C only — incorrectly classifies the parametric t-test as non-parametric.

B. B, C and D only — mistakenly includes the parametric F-test.

C. B, D and E only — incorrectly treats the F-test as distribution-free.

D. C, D and E only — correct. Confining the selection to the three non-parametric procedures.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 16
________ messages have more or less same meaning for the audience.
1. ADenotative
2. BComplex
3. CConnotative
4. DAbstract
Answer: (A) Denotative
Explanation
Denotative messages convey explicit, literal, dictionary meanings that are uniformly understood across an audience.

In communication theory and semiotics:

Denotation is the shared, objective definition of a term, ensuring consistent interpretation among receivers.

Connotation refers to subjective emotional nuances, personal associations, and cultural values that vary widely from person to person.

Complex and abstract messages invite divergent interpretations rather than uniform meaning.

A. Denotative — correct. Literal and objective signs yield uniform comprehension.

B. Complex — multi-layered messages create ambiguity and varied audience interpretations.

C. Connotative — personal and affective associations differ substantially across receivers.

D. Abstract — intangible concepts produce idiosyncratic mental representations.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 17
Which one of the following is an example of a technological barrier in communication?
1. APhysical locations of communicators
2. BLow bandwidth of internet
3. CPersonal attitude towards technology
4. DComplexity of ideas
Answer: (B) Low bandwidth of internet
Explanation
Low internet bandwidth is a direct technical constraint arising from network infrastructure and transmission medium limitations.

Communication barriers are categorized by their origin:

Technological / technical barrier: hardware malfunction, server lag, poor audio compression, and low internet bandwidth.

Physical barrier: geographical distance and seating arrangements.

Psychological / attitudinal barrier: personal resistance or negative attitude toward technology.

Semantic barrier: jargon and complexity of conceptual ideas.

A. Physical locations of communicators — represents an environmental or spatial barrier.

B. Low bandwidth of internet — correct. A direct limitation of the communication technology infrastructure.

C. Personal attitude towards technology — represents a psychological or attitudinal barrier.

D. Complexity of ideas — represents a semantic and cognitive barrier.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 18
The communication among persons working at different levels who have no direct reporting relationship is called:
1. AIntrapersonal communication
2. BUpward communication
3. CHorizontal communication
4. DDiagonal communication
Answer: (D) Diagonal communication
Explanation
Diagonal communication crosses both functional department boundaries and hierarchical levels among individuals who share no direct chain-of-command relationship.

Organizational communication directions:

Diagonal (cross-functional): interaction between individuals in different departments and different ranks without a direct reporting line.

Horizontal (lateral): communication between colleagues at the same hierarchical tier.

Upward: messages flowing from subordinates to direct organizational superiors.

Intrapersonal: cognitive internal dialogue within a single individual.

A. Intrapersonal communication — internal cognitive processing within oneself.

B. Upward communication — follows the formal chain of command upward from subordinate to supervisor.

C. Horizontal communication — takes place between peers on the same organizational level.

D. Diagonal communication — correct. Cuts across different levels and separate functional departments without direct reporting ties.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 19
Marshall Mcluhan's name is associated with the assertion:
1. AThe message is the medium
2. BThe medium is the message
3. CThe message determines the medium accurately
4. DA message is a message
Answer: (B) The medium is the message
Explanation
The medium is the message is Marshall McLuhan's famous dictum asserting that the medium of communication fundamentally shapes human perception and social organization.

Introduced in his 1964 work Understanding Media: The Extensions of Man, McLuhan argued that the characteristics of the medium itself exert a far greater transformative influence on society than the specific content transmitted through it.

A. The message is the medium — inverts McLuhan's aphorism.

B. The medium is the message — correct. The landmark concept coined by Marshall McLuhan.

C. The message determines the medium accurately — contradicts McLuhan's thesis that the medium dictates the form and scale of human association.

D. A message is a message — a tautological distractor.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 20
Assertion (A): In classroom communication, teachers should acknowledge and take into account students' views.
Reason (R): In a classroom, the probability of message reception can be enhanced by establishing a viewpoint.
1. ABoth (A) and (R) are true and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
2. BBoth (A) and (R) are true but (R) is NOT the correct explanation of (A)
3. C(A) is true but (R) is false
4. D(A) is false but (R) is true
Answer: (A) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
Explanation
Both Assertion (A) and Reason (R) are true, and Reason (R) provides the valid pedagogical justification for Assertion (A).

In classroom communication:

Assertion (A) is true because acknowledging students' viewpoints builds trust, validates learner experiences, and fosters active engagement.

Reason (R) is true because establishing a shared viewpoint and frame of reference creates common ground, directly enhancing message decoding and reception.

Because establishing this common frame of reference requires the teacher to understand and integrate students' perspectives, (R) directly explains why (A) is essential.

A. Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is the correct explanation of (A) — correct. Connects classroom empathy to enhanced message reception.

B. Both (A) and (R) are true but (R) is NOT the correct explanation of (A) — incorrect because establishing a common viewpoint is the direct causal mechanism for acknowledging student perspectives.

C. (A) is true but (R) is false — incorrect because establishing a shared frame of reference measurably improves reception.

D. (A) is false but (R) is true — incorrect because modern pedagogy fully supports student-centered classroom communication.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 21
How many terms are there in the series
168, 175, 182, -----, 266?
1. A13
2. B14
3. C15
4. D16
Answer: (C) 15
Explanation
There are 15 terms in the arithmetic sequence starting at 168 and ending at 266 with a common difference of 7.

The sequence forms an arithmetic progression where:
First term a = 168
Common difference d = 175 - 168 = 7
Last term L = 266

Applying the general term formula:
L = a + (n - 1) * d
266 = 168 + (n - 1) * 7
266 - 168 = (n - 1) * 7
98 = (n - 1) * 7
n - 1 = 98 / 7 = 14
n = 14 + 1 = 15

A. 13 — results from subtracting two extra intervals or setting n - 1 = 12.

B. 14 — omits adding 1 to the interval count (n - 1 = 14).

C. 15 — correct. Exactly matches the number of terms derived from the AP formula.

D. 16 — adds an extra count inadvertently.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 22
Given below are two statements

Statement I: The compound interest on ₹280 for 18 months at 10 % per annum is ₹44.3.

Statement II: At 5.6 % rate of simple interest, a certain sum will be doubled in 15 years

In light of the above statements, choose the correct answer from the options given below
1. ABoth Statement I and Statement II are true
2. BBoth Statement I and Statement II are false
3. CStatement I is true but Statement II is false
4. DStatement I is false but Statement II is true
Answer: (B) Both Statement I and Statement II are false
Explanation
Both statements are false because compound interest on ₹280 for 18 months yields ₹43.40 (annual compounding) or ₹44.14 (semi-annual compounding), and doubling a sum at 5.6% simple interest requires approximately 17.86 years.

Evaluation of Statement I:
Principal P = ₹280, Rate R = 10% per annum, Time = 18 months (1.5 years).
Compounded annually:
Year 1 interest = 280 * 0.10 = ₹28
Amount after 1 year = 280 + 28 = ₹308
Interest for remaining 6 months = 308 * 0.10 * 0.5 = ₹15.40
Total compound interest = 28 + 15.40 = ₹43.40.
If compounded semi-annually:
Amount = 280 * (1 + 0.05)^3 = 280 * 1.157625 = ₹324.14
Total compound interest = 324.14 - 280 = ₹44.14.
Neither convention produces ₹44.30, so Statement I is false.

Evaluation of Statement II:
For a principal to double under simple interest, the accumulated interest must equal the principal (I = P).
T = 100 / R
T = 100 / 5.6 = 17.857 years
In 15 years, interest equals 15 * 5.6% = 84% of principal, not 100%, so Statement II is false.

A. Both Statement I and Statement II are true — incorrect because both mathematical propositions are demonstrably false.

B. Both Statement I and Statement II are false — correct. Validates calculations for both financial statements.

C. Statement I is true but Statement II is false — incorrect because Statement I misstates the compound interest value.

D. Statement I is false but Statement II is true — incorrect because doubling at 5.6% requires nearly 18 years.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 23
The average of ten number is 7. If each number is multiplied by 11, then the average of the new set of numbers is:
1. A82
2. B72
3. C78
4. D77
Answer: (D) 77
Explanation
Multiplying every number in a dataset by a constant factor scales the arithmetic mean by that exact factor, yielding a new average of 77.

Mathematical derivation:
Let the ten original numbers be x1, x2, ..., x10.
Original average = (Sum of x_i) / 10 = 7
Sum of x_i = 7 * 10 = 70

Each number is multiplied by 11:
New sum = 11 * x1 + 11 * x2 + ... + 11 * x10 = 11 * (Sum of x_i) = 11 * 70 = 770
New average = 770 / 10 = 77

Alternatively, by linearity of expectation: New Mean = Original Mean * k = 7 * 11 = 77.

A. 82 — adds 11 to 71 without applying uniform multiplication.

B. 72 — adds 5 to 67 arbitrarily.

C. 78 — adds 11 to 67 instead of multiplying 7 by 11.

D. 77 — correct. 7 multiplied by 11 equals 77.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 24
Which of the following fractions is the smallest?
1. A65/80
2. B11/16
3. C5/8
4. D29/40
Answer: (C) 5/8
Explanation
The fraction 5/8 is the smallest, corresponding to 50/80 (0.625).

Converting all fractions to a common denominator of 80:

65/80 = 65/80 = 0.8125
11/16 = (11 * 5) / (16 * 5) = 55/80 = 0.6875
5/8 = (5 * 10) / (8 * 10) = 50/80 = 0.6250
29/40 = (29 * 2) / (40 * 2) = 58/80 = 0.7250

Ordering the numerators: 50 < 55 < 58 < 65.
Thus, 50/80 (which is 5/8) has the smallest value.

A. 65/80 — equals 0.8125, the largest fraction among the options.

B. 11/16 — equals 0.6875 (55/80), greater than 5/8.

C. 5/8 — correct. Equals 0.6250 (50/80), the minimum value.

D. 29/40 — equals 0.7250 (58/80), greater than 5/8.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 25
A total of 324 coins of 20 paise and 25 paise make a sum of ₹71. The number of 20 paise coins is
1. A144
2. B124
3. C200
4. D125
Answer: (C) 200
Explanation
There are 200 coins of 20 paise and 124 coins of 25 paise making up the total sum of ₹71.

Let x be the number of 20 paise coins and y be the number of 25 paise coins:
x + y = 324, so y = 324 - x

Convert ₹71 to paise:
Total value = 71 * 100 = 7100 paise

Set up the monetary equation:
20x + 25y = 7100
20x + 25(324 - x) = 7100
20x + 8100 - 25x = 7100
-5x + 8100 = 7100
5x = 8100 - 7100
5x = 1000
x = 200

Verification:
200 coins at 20 paise = 4000 paise (₹40)
124 coins at 25 paise = 3100 paise (₹31)
Total sum = 4000 + 3100 = 7100 paise (₹71)

A. 144 — results from swapping coefficients or subtraction error.

B. 124 — represents the number of 25 paise coins, not 20 paise coins.

C. 200 — correct. Exactly matches the calculated count of 20 paise coins.

D. 125 — rounding slip from inaccurate division.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 26
Given below are two statements

Statement I: Truth and Falsehood are predicates of Arguments

Statement II: Validity and Invalidity are predicates of Statements

In light of the above statements, choose the most appropriate answer from the options given below
1. ABoth Statement I and Statement II are correct
2. BBoth Statement I and Statement II are incorrect
3. CStatement I is correct but Statement II is incorrect
4. DStatement I is incorrect but Statement II is correct
Answer: (B) Both Statement I and Statement II are incorrect
Explanation
Both statements are incorrect because in formal logic, truth and falsehood apply to statements (propositions), whereas validity and invalidity apply to deductive arguments.

Fundamental logical distinctions:

Truth and Falsehood are properties of propositions/statements: an assertion about reality is either true or false.

Validity and Invalidity are properties of arguments: an argument is valid if the conclusion follows with necessity from its premises, irrespective of factual truth.

Statement I falsely assigns truth to arguments, and Statement II falsely assigns validity to statements.

A. Both Statement I and Statement II are correct — incorrect because the predicates are reversed in both statements.

B. Both Statement I and Statement II are incorrect — correct. Recognizes that both statements invert the standard logical predicates.

C. Statement I is correct but Statement II is incorrect — incorrect because arguments cannot be true or false.

D. Statement I is incorrect but Statement II is correct — incorrect because individual statements cannot be valid or invalid.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 27
Identify the fallacy committed in the argument:

Some birds are not beautiful creatures.
All dogs are beautiful creatures.
Therefore, no dogs are birds.
1. AFallacy of the Undistributed Middle Term
2. BFallacy of the Illicit Process of Major Term
3. CFallacy of the Illicit Process of Minor Term
4. DFallacy of Exclusive Premises
Answer: (B) Fallacy of the Illicit Process of Major Term
Explanation
The argument commits the fallacy of illicit major because the major term birds is distributed in the universal negative conclusion but undistributed in the particular negative major premise.

Analysis of terms and distribution:

Conclusion: No dogs are birds (E proposition).

Subject (Minor term): dogs (distributed in E proposition).

Predicate (Major term): birds (distributed in E proposition).

Major premise: Some birds are not beautiful creatures (O proposition).

In an O proposition (Some S is not P), the subject term birds is undistributed.

Because birds is undistributed in the premise but distributed in the conclusion, the argument commits the Fallacy of the Illicit Process of the Major Term (Illicit Major).

A. Fallacy of the Undistributed Middle Term — the middle term beautiful creatures is distributed as the predicate of the negative premise (O proposition).

B. Fallacy of the Illicit Process of Major Term — correct. Major term birds is distributed in the conclusion without being distributed in its premise.

C. Fallacy of the Illicit Process of Minor Term — minor term dogs is distributed in both the minor premise (A proposition) and the conclusion (E proposition).

D. Fallacy of Exclusive Premises — only one premise is negative (O proposition), so the premises are not exclusively negative.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 28
If 'All men are mortal' is given as True, then which of the following options can be validly inferred from it?

A. 'No men is mortal' is False
B. 'Some men are mortal' is True
C. 'Some men are not mortal' is True
D. 'Some men are not mortal' is False
E. 'Some men are mortal' is False

Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. AA, B and C only
2. BA, B and D only
3. CA, B, C and D only
4. DB, C, D and E only
Answer: (B) A, B and D only
Explanation
When the universal affirmative proposition A (All men are mortal) is true, classical logic validates that E is false, I is true, and O is false.

Applying the classical Square of Opposition:

Given: A proposition (All men are mortal) is True.

Contrary (E proposition: No men is mortal): cannot both be true, so E must be False (A is valid).

Subaltern (I proposition: Some men are mortal): truth flows downward, so I must be True (B is valid).

Contradictory (O proposition: Some men are not mortal): opposite truth values, so O must be False (D is valid).

Therefore, statements A, B, and D are valid inferences.

A. A, B and C only — incorrectly claims O (Some men are not mortal) is True when it must be False.

B. A, B and D only — correct. Combines the contrary, subaltern, and contradictory inferences accurately.

C. A, B, C and D only — includes mutually contradictory statements C and D together.

D. B, C, D and E only — includes both I as True and I as False simultaneously.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 29
Assertion (A): According to Naiyāyikas, the fallacy of Savyabhicāra occurs when the middle term leads to different opposite conclusions.
Reason (R): When the middle term is irregular, it is distributively not related to the major term.
1. ABoth (A) and (R) are true and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
2. BBoth (A) and (R) are true but (R) is NOT the correct explanation of (A)
3. C(A) is true but (R) is false
4. D(A) is false but (R) is true
Answer: (A) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
Explanation
Both Assertion (A) and Reason (R) are true, and Reason (R) correctly explains why the fallacy of Savyabhicāra produces erratic, opposite conclusions.

In Nyaya epistemology:

Savyabhicāra (the fallacy of irregular or erratic middle term / anaikāntika) occurs when the middle term (hetu) fails to maintain an invariable, universal concomitance (vyapti) with the major term (sadhya).

Because the middle term is irregular and not distributively related to the major term, it appears where the major term is present and where it is absent, leading to conflicting conclusions.

Thus, the lack of distributive relation in (R) directly explains why the middle term wanders to opposite conclusions in (A).

A. Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is the correct explanation of (A) — correct. Links the lack of distributive relation to the occurrence of erratic conclusions.

B. Both (A) and (R) are true but (R) is NOT the correct explanation of (A) — incorrect because Reason (R) is the precise theoretical definition and cause of Assertion (A).

C. (A) is true but (R) is false — incorrect because irregularity in Nyaya is defined by non-distribution relative to the major term.

D. (A) is false but (R) is true — incorrect because Assertion (A) is an established tenet of Nyaya logic.
Sign in to read the full explanation

Question 30

Match List I with List II.

List I (Steps in Inference)	List II (Statements)
A. Thesis (Pratijñā)	I. Because of smoke
B. Reason (Hetu)	II. Wherever there is smoke, there is fire, as in the kitchen
C. Example (Udāharaṇa)	III. The mountain has fire
D. Application (Upanaya)	IV. The mountain also has smoke accompanied by fire, like the kitchen

AA - III, B - II, C - I, D - IV
BA - III, B - IV, C - II, D - I
CA - II, B - I, C - III, D - IV
DA - III, B - I, C - II, D - IV

Answer: (D) A - III, B - I, C - II, D - IV

Explanation

Each step of the five-membered Nyaya syllogism (Pancavayava) matches its standard philosophical statement:
A-III, B-I, C-II, D-IV

The five members in Nyaya inference:

A. Pratijñā / Thesis (III) — The proposition to be proven: The mountain has fire.
B. Hetu / Reason (I) — The ground or sign: Because of smoke.
C. Udāharaṇa / Example (II) — Universal concomitance with illustration: Wherever there is smoke, there is fire, as in the kitchen.
D. Upanaya / Application (IV) — Re-assertion of the mark in the subject: The mountain also has smoke accompanied by fire, like the kitchen.
Nigamana / Conclusion — Therefore the mountain has fire.
A. A - III, B - II, C - I, D - IV — interchanges Hetu and Udāharaṇa.
B. A - III, B - IV, C - II, D - I — swaps Hetu and Upanaya.
C. A - II, B - I, C - III, D - IV — misidentifies the thesis as an example.
D. A - III, B - I, C - II, D - IV — correct. Accurately orders Pratijñā, Hetu, Udāharaṇa, and Upanaya.

Question 31
The number of characters in 8 bit ASCII code (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) is
1. A64
2. B128
3. C256
4. D512
Answer: (C) 256
Explanation
An 8-bit ASCII character encoding scheme represents 256 unique characters (2 to the power of 8).

Calculation of representation capacity:
Number of bit positions = 8
Total possible binary permutations = 2^8 = 256

Standard original ASCII used 7 bits to encode 128 characters (codes 0 to 127).

Extended 8-bit ASCII utilizes the full byte to accommodate 256 symbols (codes 0 to 255), including accented characters, graphics, and currency signs.

A. 64 — corresponds to 6-bit encoding capacity (2^6).

B. 128 — represents standard 7-bit ASCII capacity (2^7).

C. 256 — correct. Exactly matches 2^8 representations in an 8-bit byte.

D. 512 — corresponds to 9-bit encoding capacity (2^9).
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 32
The Post Office protocol is
1. AProtocol used for transfer of files from one computer to another computer
2. BProtocol used to handle email attachments
3. CProtocol used when receiving emails from the email server
4. DProtocol used for sending emails
Answer: (C) Protocol used when receiving emails from the email server
Explanation
Post Office Protocol (POP/POP3) is the standard application-layer protocol used by email clients to retrieve and download emails from a mail server.

Email protocols and their designated roles:

POP (Post Office Protocol) and IMAP (Internet Message Access Protocol): used to receive and retrieve messages from the incoming mail server to the local client.

SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol): used for sending and forwarding emails from a client to a server and between servers.

FTP (File Transfer Protocol): transfers general files across computers.

MIME (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions): formats email attachments and non-ASCII text.

A. Protocol used for transfer of files from one computer to another computer — describes File Transfer Protocol (FTP).

B. Protocol used to handle email attachments — describes Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (MIME).

C. Protocol used when receiving emails from the email server — correct. Defines the primary function of POP/POP3.

D. Protocol used for sending emails — describes Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP).
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 33
Given below are two statements regarding the Router

Statement I: It enables data packets to be routed between different networks.

Statement II: It works in the Data Link Layer.

In light of the above statements, choose the correct answer from the options given below
1. ABoth Statement I and Statement II are true
2. BBoth Statement I and Statement II are false
3. CStatement I is true but Statement II is false
4. DStatement I is false but Statement II is true
Answer: (C) Statement I is true but Statement II is false
Explanation
Statement I is true because routers route packets between distinct IP networks, while Statement II is false because routers operate at the Network Layer (Layer 3) rather than the Data Link Layer (Layer 2).

Networking OSI layer functions:

Statement I is true: A router reads logical destination IP addresses to forward packets across disparate local area networks and wide area networks.

Statement II is false: The Data Link Layer (Layer 2) is the domain of switches, bridges, and network interface cards using MAC addresses. Routers operate at Layer 3 (Network Layer).

A. Both Statement I and Statement II are true — incorrect because routers belong to Layer 3, not Layer 2.

B. Both Statement I and Statement II are false — incorrect because Statement I accurately describes packet routing across networks.

C. Statement I is true but Statement II is false — correct. Accurately evaluates router functionality and OSI layer positioning.

D. Statement I is false but Statement II is true — incorrect because it reverses the truth of both statements.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 34
Following are some statements regarding File Transfer Protocol (FTP). Choose the correct statements

A. It is used to access the world wide web (www)
B. It is used to download data from file servers
C. It is used for very small files
D. Files are transferred from one device to another

Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. AA and B only
2. BA and C only
3. CB and D only
4. DB and C only
Answer: (C) B and D only
Explanation
FTP is designed to download and upload files to remote file servers and transfer files between devices across a network.

Evaluation of statements:

A is incorrect: Accessing web pages on the World Wide Web is handled by HTTP and HTTPS, not FTP.

B is correct: FTP is explicitly engineered to upload and download documents and media to/from remote file servers.

C is incorrect: FTP is protocol-agnostic regarding file size and is regularly used for large datasets and backups, not limited to small files.

D is correct: FTP enables peer-to-server or client-to-server file transmission between connected network devices.

Therefore, only B and D are correct.

A. A and B only — wrongly attributes web browsing (HTTP/HTTPS) to FTP.

B. A and C only — combines two false assertions regarding web access and file size limits.

C. B and D only — correct. Accurately identifies download and transfer functions.

D. B and C only — incorrectly asserts that FTP is restricted to very small files.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 35
Match List I with List II.
List I (I/O device) List II (Data transfer rate)
A. Disk I. 50 bps
B. Mouse II. 1 Mbps
C. Laser printer III. 120 bps
D. Keyboard IV. 100 Mbps
1. AA - I, B - II, C - III, D - IV
2. BA - II, B - I, C - III, D - IV
3. CA - IV, B - III, C - II, D - I
4. DA - IV, B - II, C - I, D - III
Answer: (C) A - IV, B - III, C - II, D - I
Explanation
Each input/output device aligns with its standard data transmission bandwidth:
A-IV, B-III, C-II, D-I

Data transfer rate hierarchy from highest to lowest:

A. Disk (IV: 100 Mbps) — Hard disks and storage controllers operate at high data transfer rates in the megabits to gigabits per second range.

B. Mouse (III: 120 bps) — Transmits continuous coordinate packets at low speeds, typically around 120 bps in standard serial mouse interfaces.

C. Laser printer (II: 1 Mbps) — Requires high throughput to buffer high-resolution bitmaps and rasterized document pages.

D. Keyboard (I: 50 bps) — Operates at human typing speeds, requiring only approximately 50 bps to transmit keystroke scan codes.

A. A - I, B - II, C - III, D - IV — assigns the lowest speed to disks and highest speed to keyboards.

B. A - II, B - I, C - III, D - IV — misaligns disk and keyboard transfer rates.

C. A - IV, B - III, C - II, D - I — correct. Accurately matches devices to their standard transfer rates.

D. A - IV, B - II, C - I, D - III — inverts the relative data rates of laser printers and mice.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 36
The number of Sustainable Development Goals is
1. A13
2. B15
3. C17
4. D19
Answer: (C) 17
Explanation
There are 17 Sustainable Development Goals adopted by all United Nations Member States in 2015.

Part of the 2030 Agenda for Sustainable Development, the 17 SDGs encompass 169 associated targets designed to eradicate poverty, protect the planet, and ensure global peace and prosperity.

A. 13 — distractor, though SDG 13 specifically addresses Climate Action.

B. 15 — distractor, though SDG 15 specifically addresses Life on Land.

C. 17 — correct. The complete number of global Sustainable Development Goals.

D. 19 — distractor exceeding the total goal count.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 37
Given below are two statements

Statement I: Small amount of atmospheric Nitrogen dioxide NO₂ is produced from polluting sources

Statement II: Most of the atmospheric NO₂ is produced due to photochemical reactions in the atmosphere

In light of the above statements, choose the most appropriate answer from the options given below
1. ABoth Statement I and Statement II are correct
2. BBoth Statement I and Statement II are incorrect
3. CStatement I is correct but Statement II is incorrect
4. DStatement I is incorrect but Statement II is correct
Answer: (A) Both Statement I and Statement II are correct
Explanation
Both statements are correct because direct combustion emissions are overwhelmingly nitric oxide (NO), while the vast majority of atmospheric nitrogen dioxide (NO2) is formed secondarily via photochemical oxidation.

Atmospheric chemistry of nitrogen oxides:

Statement I is correct: Combustion sources such as motor vehicles and fossil-fueled power plants release 90% to 95% of their NOx emissions as primary nitric oxide (NO), with only a small fraction (5% to 10%) emitted directly as NO2.

Statement II is correct: Once in the atmosphere, ambient NO rapidly reacts with tropospheric ozone (O3) and peroxy radicals in photochemical sunlight-driven reactions to form NO2.

A. Both Statement I and Statement II are correct — correct. Accurately distinguishes primary emissions from secondary photochemical synthesis.

B. Both Statement I and Statement II are incorrect — incorrect because both statements represent verified atmospheric chemistry facts.

C. Statement I is correct but Statement II is incorrect — incorrect because photochemical reactions are the dominant origin of ambient NO2.

D. Statement I is incorrect but Statement II is correct — incorrect because combustion sources do emit a minor direct portion of NO2.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 38
Which of the following water borne diseases may be caused by virus, bacteria and protozoa?
1. ACholera
2. BHepatitis
3. CTyphoid
4. DDiarrhea
Answer: (D) Diarrhea
Explanation
Diarrhea is a gastrointestinal symptom and waterborne syndrome that can be triggered by viruses, bacteria, or protozoan parasites.

Etiological agents of the options:

Diarrhea: viral agents include Rotavirus and Norovirus, bacterial agents include Escherichia coli and Salmonella, and protozoan agents include Giardia lamblia and Entamoeba histolytica.

Cholera: caused exclusively by the bacterium Vibrio cholerae.

Hepatitis: waterborne forms (Hepatitis A and E) are caused strictly by viral pathogens.

Typhoid: caused exclusively by the bacterium Salmonella Typhi.

A. Cholera — strictly a bacterial waterborne infection.

B. Hepatitis — strictly a viral infection.

C. Typhoid — strictly a bacterial enteric fever.

D. Diarrhea — correct. Caused across all three pathogenic classes (viral, bacterial, and protozoan).
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 39
United Nations Environmental Program (UNEP) was the result of deliberations held during
1. AHuman Environmental Conference at Stockholm in 1972
2. BEarth Summit at Rio de Janeiro in 1992
3. CMontreal Protocol 1987
4. DKyoto Protocol 1997
Answer: (A) Human Environmental Conference at Stockholm in 1972
Explanation
The United Nations Environment Programme (UNEP) was established following the United Nations Conference on the Human Environment held in Stockholm in June 1972.

Historical development of international environmental governance:

The Stockholm Conference (1972) adopted the Stockholm Declaration and Action Plan for the Human Environment, leading the UN General Assembly to create UNEP in December 1972 to coordinate environmental activities.

Rio Earth Summit (1992): established the UNFCCC, CBD, and Agenda 21, twenty years after UNEP had already been operating.

Montreal Protocol (1987): international treaty to phase out ozone-depleting substances.

Kyoto Protocol (1997): treaty under the UNFCCC committing industrialized nations to greenhouse gas emission targets.

A. Human Environmental Conference at Stockholm in 1972 — correct. The founding conference that created UNEP.

B. Earth Summit at Rio de Janeiro in 1992 — took place two decades after UNEP's foundation.

C. Montreal Protocol 1987 — focused specifically on chlorofluorocarbons and the stratospheric ozone layer.

D. Kyoto Protocol 1997 — focused on legally binding targets for greenhouse gas reduction.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 40
Which of the following state has maximum installed wind power as per MNRE's latest report?
1. AAndhra Pradesh
2. BKarnataka
3. CTamil Nadu
4. DMaharashtra
Answer: (C) Tamil Nadu
Explanation
Tamil Nadu maintains the highest installed wind power capacity in India according to Ministry of New and Renewable Energy (MNRE) reports.

State renewable energy profiles:

Tamil Nadu has consistently led Indian states with wind power capacity exceeding 9,800 to 10,000 MW, driven by favorable topography and strong southwest monsoon winds channeled through the Palghat Gap and Muppandal wind farm complexes.

Gujarat and Karnataka follow in cumulative wind installation, while Maharashtra and Andhra Pradesh possess smaller installed bases.

A. Andhra Pradesh — holds significant wind generation but trails the leading states.

B. Karnataka — ranks among the top three wind energy producers but remains behind Tamil Nadu.

C. Tamil Nadu — correct. Consistently leads India in installed wind power capacity.

D. Maharashtra — possesses substantial capacity but ranks behind Tamil Nadu and Gujarat.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 41
Global Citizenship Education promotes
1. ACommon international laws for global citizenship
2. BIssues pertaining to citizenship across countries involving VISA
3. CInternational public relations
4. DMore peaceful, tolerant, inclusive, secure and sustainable societies
Answer: (D) More peaceful, tolerant, inclusive, secure and sustainable societies
Explanation
Global Citizenship Education (GCED) empowers learners to actively contribute toward building peaceful, tolerant, inclusive, secure, and sustainable societies.

Codified in Target 4.7 of SDG 4 and highlighted in NEP 2020:

GCED fosters critical thinking, cultural empathy, ethical responsibility, and global solidarity to address shared planetary challenges such as climate change, conflict, and inequality.

It does not deal with bureaucratic immigration rules, visa procedures, or national legal sovereignty.

A. Common international laws for global citizenship — GCED is an educational framework rather than an attempt to create unified supranational citizenship laws.

B. Issues pertaining to citizenship across countries involving VISA — immigration and consular visa policies fall under national border administration.

C. International public relations — corporate or state diplomacy rather than civic educational philosophy.

D. More peaceful, tolerant, inclusive, secure and sustainable societies — correct. Reflects UNESCO's core mandate for GCED.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 42
CBCS is
1. ACriteria Based Choice System
2. BChoice Based Credit System
3. CCriteria Based Creditable Scores
4. DCredit Based Choice Scores
Answer: (B) Choice Based Credit System
Explanation
CBCS stands for Choice Based Credit System, an academic framework introduced by the University Grants Commission (UGC) for Indian universities.

Features of CBCS:

Provides students with academic flexibility to choose courses from prescribed pools of Core, Elective, and Ability Enhancement courses.

Replaces traditional percentage marksheets with a standardized semester-wise credit and grading scale (SGPA and CGPA).

A. Criteria Based Choice System — incorrect expansion.

B. Choice Based Credit System — correct. The official UGC title for the credit-based modular higher education curriculum.

C. Criteria Based Creditable Scores — invented distractor.

D. Credit Based Choice Scores — scrambled terms.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 43
Given below are two statements

Statement I: Policy action and implementation plans require sound database systems at the regional level only.

Statement II: The statistical system should ensure its impeccability with data architecture, security, quality, cleaning and integration.

In light of the above statements, choose the most appropriate answer from the options given below
1. AStatement I is incorrect but Statement II is correct
2. BBoth Statement I and Statement II are correct
3. CBoth Statement I and Statement II are incorrect
4. DStatement I is correct but Statement II is incorrect
Answer: (A) Statement I is incorrect but Statement II is correct
Explanation
Statement I is incorrect because evidence-based policy formulation requires comprehensive data systems across national, state, and local levels rather than regional levels only, while Statement II is correct in emphasizing data architecture, security, and quality assurance.

Analysis of statements:

Statement I is incorrect: The restrictive term only renders it false — policy action demands seamless data collection and integration from micro-local to macro-national tiers.

Statement II is correct: Robust statistical systems depend on sound architecture, stringent data security, systematic data cleaning, and integration across administrative repositories.

A. Statement I is incorrect but Statement II is correct — correct. Identifies the flaw in Statement I's restriction and affirms Statement II's data governance principles.

B. Both Statement I and Statement II are correct — incorrect because Statement I wrongly limits database needs to the regional level only.

C. Both Statement I and Statement II are incorrect — incorrect because Statement II represents standard data management requirements.

D. Statement I is correct but Statement II is incorrect — incorrect because it inverts the validity of both statements.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 44
In order to transform the regulatory system of Higher Education, the NEP proposes to set up HECI (Higher Education Commission of India). Which of the following are verticals of HECI?

A. NHERC
B. NAS
C. HEGC
D. NCIVE
E. NAC

Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. AA, B and C only
2. BB, C and E only
3. CA, C and E only
4. DC, D and E only
Answer: (C) A, C and E only
Explanation
The National Education Policy 2020 establishes that the Higher Education Commission of India (HECI) will function through four autonomous verticals: NHERC, NAC, HEGC, and GEC.

The four verticals mandated under NEP 2020:

Vertical 1: National Higher Education Regulatory Council (NHERC) — single-point regulation for higher education excluding medical and legal studies (A).

Vertical 2: National Accreditation Council (NAC) — meta-accreditation framework (E).

Vertical 3: Higher Education Grants Council (HEGC) — funding and financing of higher education institutions (C).

Vertical 4: General Education Council (GEC) — framing graduate attributes and standard-setting.

NAS (National Achievement Survey) is a school assessment tool, and NCIVE is not an HECI vertical.
Therefore, A, C, and E are the correct verticals.

A. A, B and C only — mistakenly includes NAS, which is a school-education assessment instrument.

B. B, C and E only — includes NAS while omitting the central regulatory vertical NHERC.

C. A, C and E only — correct. Identifies NHERC, HEGC, and NAC as the designated verticals.

D. C, D and E only — mistakenly includes NCIVE and omits NHERC.
Sign in to read the full explanation

Question 45

Match List I with List II.

List I (Institute)	List II (Location)
A. Indian Institute of Advanced Study	I. Noida, UP
B. Indian Biological Sciences and Research Institute	II. Shimla, HP
C. Indian Institute of Soil Science	III. Bhopal, MP
D. Indian Institute of Sugarcane Research	IV. Lucknow, UP

AA - II, B - I, C - III, D - IV
BA - III, B - IV, C - II, D - I
CA - IV, B - III, C - II, D - I
DA - I, B - IV, C - II, D - III

Answer: (A) A - II, B - I, C - III, D - IV

Explanation

Each premier research institute matches its geographic location:
A-II, B-I, C-III, D-IV

Headquarter locations of the institutions:

A. Indian Institute of Advanced Study (II: Shimla, HP) — Located at the historic Rashtrapati Nivas estate in Shimla, Himachal Pradesh.
B. Indian Biological Sciences and Research Institute (I: Noida, UP) — Established at Noida, Uttar Pradesh, for biological and biotechnological research.
C. Indian Institute of Soil Science (III: Bhopal, MP) — An autonomous institute under the Indian Council of Agricultural Research (ICAR) located in Bhopal, Madhya Pradesh.
D. Indian Institute of Sugarcane Research (IV: Lucknow, UP) — A key ICAR research institute situated in Lucknow, Uttar Pradesh.
A. A - II, B - I, C - III, D - IV — correct. Accurately links each national institute to its respective state and city.
B. A - III, B - IV, C - II, D - I — misplaces IIAS to Bhopal and IISR to Noida.
C. A - IV, B - III, C - II, D - I — misplaces IIAS to Lucknow and IISS to Shimla.
D. A - I, B - IV, C - II, D - III — misidentifies the locations of all four institutes.

Question 46
"Leadership studies are an emergent discipline", means:
Leadership studies are an emergent discipline, and the concept of leadership will continue to change. Leadership lore is defined as an influence relationship among leaders and followers who want real change and outcomes that reflect their shared purpose. Leadership involves influence. It occurs among people; those people who intentionally desire significant changes, and the changes reflect purpose shared by the leaders and their followers.

Influence means that the relationship among people is not passive; however, also part of this definition is that influence is multidirectional. It does not use orders or threats to make somebody do something. The basic cultural values in America make it easiest to think of leadership as something a leader does to a follower. However, leadership has an effect in both directions. In most organizations, superiors influence subordinates, but subordinates also influence superiors. The people involved in the relationship want real and important changes- leadership involves creating change, not maintaining what normally happens. In addition, the changes sought are not dictated by leaders, but reflect purposes that leaders and followers share. Moreover, change is toward an outcome that the leaders and follower both want; a desired future or shared purpose that motivates them toward this more preferable outcome. An important aspect of leadership is influencing others to come together around a common vision. Thus, leadership involves the influence of people to bring about change toward a desirable future.
1. ALeadership studies are an established field
2. BLeadership studies are a valid field of research
3. CLeadership studies is an evolving domain of scholarship
4. DLeadership studies is an elaborate field
Answer: (C) Leadership studies is an evolving domain of scholarship
Explanation
The phrase emergent discipline denotes that leadership studies is a developing, dynamic field of scholarship that continues to evolve.

The opening line of the passage directly equates emergent with ongoing evolution: "Leadership studies are an emergent discipline, and the concept of leadership will continue to change."

A. Leadership studies are an established field — contradicts the concept of an emergent discipline that continues to undergo transformation.

B. Leadership studies are a valid field of research — addresses general legitimacy rather than the emergent, changing character highlighted in the text.

C. Leadership studies is an evolving domain of scholarship — correct. Accurately interprets emergent as evolving and growing.

D. Leadership studies is an elaborate field — conflates structural complexity with emergent developmental status.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 47
What variables are used for defining leadership?
Leadership studies are an emergent discipline, and the concept of leadership will continue to change. Leadership lore is defined as an influence relationship among leaders and followers who want real change and outcomes that reflect their shared purpose. Leadership involves influence. It occurs among people; those people who intentionally desire significant changes, and the changes reflect purpose shared by the leaders and their followers.

Influence means that the relationship among people is not passive; however, also part of this definition is that influence is multidirectional. It does not use orders or threats to make somebody do something. The basic cultural values in America make it easiest to think of leadership as something a leader does to a follower. However, leadership has an effect in both directions. In most organizations, superiors influence subordinates, but subordinates also influence superiors. The people involved in the relationship want real and important changes- leadership involves creating change, not maintaining what normally happens. In addition, the changes sought are not dictated by leaders, but reflect purposes that leaders and followers share. Moreover, change is toward an outcome that the leaders and follower both want; a desired future or shared purpose that motivates them toward this more preferable outcome. An important aspect of leadership is influencing others to come together around a common vision. Thus, leadership involves the influence of people to bring about change toward a desirable future.
1. APower to affect relationship and desire for change in the true sense of the team
2. BPower to get things done quickly by influence
3. CPower to change and control
4. DPower to effect and desire for mandated change
Answer: (A) Power to affect relationship and desire for change in the true sense of the team
Explanation
The passage defines leadership as an influence relationship characterized by mutual impact and an intentional desire to bring about real change.

The text specifies: "Leadership lore is defined as an influence relationship among leaders and followers who want real change and outcomes that reflect their shared purpose." It explicitly rules out coercive control, threats, or mandated orders.

A. Power to affect relationship and desire for change in the true sense of the team — correct. Aligns with the definition of leadership as mutual relational influence and desire for change.

B. Power to get things done quickly by influence — speed of execution is nowhere discussed in the text.

C. Power to change and control — the passage explicitly rejects coercive command and control.

D. Power to effect and desire for mandated change — the passage clarifies that changes are not dictated by leaders, refuting mandated change.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 48
What is the main theme of this passage?
Leadership studies are an emergent discipline, and the concept of leadership will continue to change. Leadership lore is defined as an influence relationship among leaders and followers who want real change and outcomes that reflect their shared purpose. Leadership involves influence. It occurs among people; those people who intentionally desire significant changes, and the changes reflect purpose shared by the leaders and their followers.

Influence means that the relationship among people is not passive; however, also part of this definition is that influence is multidirectional. It does not use orders or threats to make somebody do something. The basic cultural values in America make it easiest to think of leadership as something a leader does to a follower. However, leadership has an effect in both directions. In most organizations, superiors influence subordinates, but subordinates also influence superiors. The people involved in the relationship want real and important changes- leadership involves creating change, not maintaining what normally happens. In addition, the changes sought are not dictated by leaders, but reflect purposes that leaders and followers share. Moreover, change is toward an outcome that the leaders and follower both want; a desired future or shared purpose that motivates them toward this more preferable outcome. An important aspect of leadership is influencing others to come together around a common vision. Thus, leadership involves the influence of people to bring about change toward a desirable future.
1. AExplanation of leadership construct
2. BArgument about leadership
3. CModels of leadership
4. DPros and cons of leadership
Answer: (A) Explanation of leadership construct
Explanation
The primary theme of the text is defining and elaborating the conceptual construct of leadership as a multidirectional, non-coercive influence relationship.

The author dedicates the passage to explaining the core elements of leadership:

Influence occurring among leaders and followers.

Multidirectional interaction rather than unilateral top-down command.

Pursuit of shared outcomes and common vision.
The passage does not weigh competing models, debate opposing schools of thought, or list pros and cons.

A. Explanation of leadership construct — correct. Accurately synthesizes the author's descriptive definition of leadership.

B. Argument about leadership — the tone is explanatory and definitional rather than argumentative.

C. Models of leadership — does not outline specific organizational models (such as transformational or servant leadership).

D. Pros and cons of leadership — does not present advantages and disadvantages.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 49
What should be the outcome of leadership actions?
Leadership studies are an emergent discipline, and the concept of leadership will continue to change. Leadership lore is defined as an influence relationship among leaders and followers who want real change and outcomes that reflect their shared purpose. Leadership involves influence. It occurs among people; those people who intentionally desire significant changes, and the changes reflect purpose shared by the leaders and their followers.

Influence means that the relationship among people is not passive; however, also part of this definition is that influence is multidirectional. It does not use orders or threats to make somebody do something. The basic cultural values in America make it easiest to think of leadership as something a leader does to a follower. However, leadership has an effect in both directions. In most organizations, superiors influence subordinates, but subordinates also influence superiors. The people involved in the relationship want real and important changes- leadership involves creating change, not maintaining what normally happens. In addition, the changes sought are not dictated by leaders, but reflect purposes that leaders and followers share. Moreover, change is toward an outcome that the leaders and follower both want; a desired future or shared purpose that motivates them toward this more preferable outcome. An important aspect of leadership is influencing others to come together around a common vision. Thus, leadership involves the influence of people to bring about change toward a desirable future.
1. AMovement towards the vision of the leader
2. BMovement towards common vision of the leader and the followers
3. CMovement towards the vision of the majority
4. DStrengthening of the authority of leaders
Answer: (B) Movement towards common vision of the leader and the followers
Explanation
The passage explicitly states that leadership action directs change toward a shared purpose and common vision uniting leaders and followers.

The text specifies: "Moreover, change is toward an outcome that the leaders and follower both want, a desired future or shared purpose that motivates them toward this more preferable outcome. An important aspect of leadership is influencing others to come together around a common vision."

A. Movement towards the vision of the leader — the text emphasizes that outcomes are not dictated by leaders alone.

B. Movement towards common vision of the leader and the followers — correct. Directly matches the stated goal of shared purpose and common vision.

C. Movement towards the vision of the majority — majority voting or democratic headcount is not discussed.

D. Strengthening of the authority of leaders — contradicts the multidirectional, non-hierarchical nature of influence described.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 50
The concept of leadership discussed in this passage is
Leadership studies are an emergent discipline, and the concept of leadership will continue to change. Leadership lore is defined as an influence relationship among leaders and followers who want real change and outcomes that reflect their shared purpose. Leadership involves influence. It occurs among people; those people who intentionally desire significant changes, and the changes reflect purpose shared by the leaders and their followers.

Influence means that the relationship among people is not passive; however, also part of this definition is that influence is multidirectional. It does not use orders or threats to make somebody do something. The basic cultural values in America make it easiest to think of leadership as something a leader does to a follower. However, leadership has an effect in both directions. In most organizations, superiors influence subordinates, but subordinates also influence superiors. The people involved in the relationship want real and important changes- leadership involves creating change, not maintaining what normally happens. In addition, the changes sought are not dictated by leaders, but reflect purposes that leaders and followers share. Moreover, change is toward an outcome that the leaders and follower both want; a desired future or shared purpose that motivates them toward this more preferable outcome. An important aspect of leadership is influencing others to come together around a common vision. Thus, leadership involves the influence of people to bring about change toward a desirable future.
1. AVerticle-topdown
2. BHorizontal
3. CIndividualistic
4. DExceptional
Answer: (B) Horizontal
Explanation
The passage conceptualizes leadership as horizontal and reciprocal, driven by multidirectional influence rather than vertical top-down hierarchy.

The passage contrasts traditional cultural assumptions with real leadership dynamics:

It notes that while culture assumes "leadership as something a leader does to a follower," in reality "influence is multidirectional" and "leadership has an effect in both directions."

Subordinates influence superiors, and purposes are mutually shared, establishing a horizontal relational paradigm.

A. Verticle-topdown — explicitly rejected by the passage's emphasis on two-way, non-coercive influence.

B. Horizontal — correct. Characterizes the mutual, multidirectional relationship between leaders and followers.

C. Individualistic — contradicted by the emphasis on relational process and shared vision among groups.

D. Exceptional — irrelevant trait not discussed in the text.
Sign in to read the full explanation

Attempt Paper 1 — General Aptitude · November 26, 2021 · Shift 1 as a timed test

Spotted a shift or questions missing from this paper?

Paper 2 — Commerce · November 26, 2021 · Shift 1

Attempt this paper

100 questions with the answer key and explanations.

Question 1
Bretton Woods resolutions led to the formation of:
1. AWTO
2. BGATT
3. CUNCTAD
4. DIMF
Answer: (D) IMF
Explanation
The Bretton Woods Conference of July 1944 established the International Monetary Fund (IMF) and the World Bank to rebuild the international economic system.

A. WTO — Formed much later on 1 January 1995 as the successor to GATT following the Uruguay Round.

B. GATT — Signed in 1947 as an interim trade agreement after the proposed International Trade Organization failed ratification.

C. UNCTAD — Established in 1964 by the UN General Assembly to promote development-friendly trade for developing nations.

D. IMF — correct. Conceived directly at Bretton Woods to maintain stable exchange rates and provide balance-of-payments financial assistance.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 2
The mode of joint venturing in international business that allows a company to conduct business in another country whose laws discourage foreign ownership is known as:
1. AInternational Franchising
2. BLicensing
3. CContract manufacturing
4. DJoint ownership
Answer: (D) Joint ownership
Explanation
Joint ownership ventures allow a foreign firm to join with local investors to set up a shared business entity, complying with host country restrictions on full foreign ownership.

A. International Franchising — A contractual mode where a franchisee buys the right to use a business format, not a joint venture entity.

B. Licensing — A contractual agreement granting intellectual property rights in exchange for royalties without creating shared ownership.

C. Contract manufacturing — Contracting local manufacturers to produce goods without establishing an equity joint venture.

D. Joint ownership — correct. An equity joint venture model where the foreign company shares management control and equity with a domestic firm to navigate strict foreign investment caps.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 3
Fill in the blanks

The collapse of Eastern Europe in __________ and USSR in _________ lead to emergence of the transitory economies.
1. A1989, 1991
2. B1988, 1995
3. C1997, 1991
4. D1980, 1987
Answer: (A) 1989, 1991
Explanation
The Revolutions of 1989 triggered the fall of communist governments across Eastern Europe, and the formal dissolution of the Soviet Union followed in December 1991.

A. 1989, 1991 — correct. 1989 marked the collapse of Eastern European socialist regimes and the Berlin Wall, while 1991 marked the dissolution of the USSR.

B. 1988, 1995 — Incorrect chronology because the Soviet Union had already ceased to exist before 1995.

C. 1997, 1991 — Incorrect because Eastern European transformations occurred nearly a decade earlier in 1989.

D. 1980, 1987 — Incorrect because both dates predate the systemic dismantling of the Soviet bloc.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 4
The resource seeking FDI moves to a country where:
1. APer capita income and size of the market are large
2. BTechnologies are available to improve productivity
3. CRaw materials and manpower are in abundance
4. DFinancial resources help MNCs improve their efficiency
Answer: (C) Raw materials and manpower are in abundance
Explanation
Resource-seeking foreign direct investment specifically targets countries that possess rich natural resources, cheap raw materials, or an abundant labor supply.

A. Per capita income and size of the market are large — Characterizes market-seeking FDI aiming to tap domestic consumer demand.

B. Technologies are available to improve productivity — Characterizes strategic asset-seeking or technology-seeking FDI.

C. Raw materials and manpower are in abundance — correct. Multinationals invest abroad under this motive to secure physical inputs and low-cost human resources not available at home.

D. Financial resources help MNCs improve their efficiency — Characterizes efficiency-seeking FDI that rationalizes cross-border production networks.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 5
'A', 'B' and 'C' are partners sharing profits in the ratio of 3:2:1. 'D' is admitted for 1/6th share and 'C' should retain his original share.

The sacrificing ratio of A and B will be:
1. A1 : 2
2. B2 : 3
3. C3 : 2
4. D2 : 1
Answer: (C) 3 : 2
Explanation
Because C retains his original 1/6 share, the incoming partner D's 1/6 share is surrendered entirely by A and B in their existing relative ratio of 3:2.

Combined share of C and D = 1/6 + 1/6 = 2/6
Remaining profit share available for A and B = 1 - 2/6 = 4/6
A's new share = 4/6 * 3/5 = 12/30 = 2/5
B's new share = 4/6 * 2/5 = 8/30 = 4/15
A's sacrifice = 3/6 - 12/30 = 15/30 - 12/30 = 3/30
B's sacrifice = 2/6 - 8/30 = 10/30 - 8/30 = 2/30

The sacrificing ratio of A and B is 3/30 : 2/30, which simplifies to 3 : 2.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 6
From the following information about a firm, what will be the contribution to sales (c/s) ratio and the profit?

Sales = ₹ 100,000
Fixed Cost = ₹ 20,000
Break-even Point = ₹ 40,000
1. AC/S = 25%; Profit = ₹ 60,000
2. BC/S = 50%; Profit = ₹ 60,000
3. CC/S = 50%; Profit = ₹ 30,000
4. DC/S = 60%; Profit = ₹ 30,000
Answer: (C) C/S = 50%; Profit = ₹ 30,000
Explanation
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 7
Which one of the following is a structured review of the systems and procedures of an organisation in order to evaluate whether they are being conducted efficiently and effectively?
1. AFinancial audit
2. BSafety audit
3. CManagement audit
4. DCost audit
Answer: (C) Management audit
Explanation
A management audit is an appraisal of the entire managerial process, systems, and procedures to evaluate organizational efficiency and effectiveness.

A. Financial audit — Focuses on verifying the accuracy and fairness of financial books and statutory compliance.

B. Safety audit — Concentrates specifically on examining industrial hazard mitigation and occupational health standards.

C. Management audit — correct. Systematically reviews operational policies, executive decision structures, and organizational procedures to enhance efficiency.

D. Cost audit — Confirms the accuracy of cost accounting accounts and adherence to cost accounting standards.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 8
Fill in the blanks

For a holding company, all pre-acquisition profits/losses of the subsidiary company are ______ ______, while all post-acquisition profits/losses of the subsidiary company are _________.
1. Arevenue profits/losses, capital profits/losses
2. Bcapital profits, capital losses
3. Crevenue profits, revenue losses
4. Dcapital profits/losses, revenue profit/losses
Answer: (D) capital profits/losses, revenue profit/losses
Explanation
Profits earned by a subsidiary before its acquisition date belong to the purchased net worth and are classified as capital profits or losses, whereas earnings after acquisition represent revenue items.

A. revenue profits/losses, capital profits/losses — Inverts the statutory consolidation treatment of holding companies.

B. capital profits, capital losses — Incorrectly limits classification by type of outcome rather than date of acquisition.

C. revenue profits, revenue losses — Erroneously considers all pre-acquisition balances as distributable revenue.

D. capital profits/losses, revenue profit/losses — correct. Pre-acquisition balances adjust goodwill or capital reserve on consolidation, while post-acquisition balances enter consolidated revenue profit.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 9
When the sum of exponents exceeds one (a+b>1) in the Cobb-Douglas production function, it causes which one of the following?
1. AConstant returns to scale
2. BIncreasing returns to scale
3. CDecreasing returns to scale
4. DVariable returns to scale
Answer: (B) Increasing returns to scale
Explanation
In a Cobb-Douglas production function Q = A * K^a * L^b, the sum of output elasticities (a + b) determines returns to scale.

A. Constant returns to scale — Occurs when a + b = 1, meaning output expands in exact proportion to inputs.

B. Increasing returns to scale — correct. When a + b > 1, scaling all production inputs by a factor of k results in an output increase greater than k.

C. Decreasing returns to scale — Occurs when a + b < 1, yielding a less than proportionate increase in output.

D. Variable returns to scale — Characteristic of generalized non-homogeneous functions rather than standard Cobb-Douglas models.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 10
A price ceiling below the equilibrium price often leads to a shortage of the commodity and possibly:
1. ACommodity glut
2. BBlack marketing
3. CPrice manipulations
4. DIncreased consumption
Answer: (B) Black marketing
Explanation
Setting a legal price ceiling below equilibrium creates excess demand because producers supply less while consumers demand more at the suppressed price.

A. Commodity glut — A glut or surplus arises only when a price floor is imposed above the equilibrium price.

B. Black marketing — correct. The persistent unsatisfied demand creates an illegal parallel market where buyers pay premiums above the ceiling price.

C. Price manipulations — A broad corporate market abuse concept rather than the primary microeconomic outcome of rent or price controls.

D. Increased consumption — Actual consumption is constrained by the diminished quantity supplied in the market.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 11
The cross-price elasticity of demand for complementary commodities is:
1. APositive
2. BZero
3. CGreater than one
4. DNegative
Answer: (D) Negative
Explanation
Cross-price elasticity of demand measures the responsiveness of the quantity demanded for one good relative to a price change in another good.

A. Positive — Characteristic of substitute goods where a price rise in one shifts demand to the other.

B. Zero — Characteristic of completely unrelated commodities that have no mutual influence.

C. Greater than one — Refers to the magnitude of elasticity rather than its directional sign.

D. Negative — correct. For complementary goods used together, an increase in the price of one item reduces the demand for its companion item.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 12
Which market form leads to more technological change and product improvements than alternative forms of market structure?
1. APerfect competition
2. BMonopoly
3. CMonopolistic competition
4. DOligopoly
Answer: (D) Oligopoly
Explanation
Oligopolistic markets combine strong financial resources with intense non-price competition, incentivizing continuous innovation and product research.

A. Perfect competition — Zero economic profits in the long run prevent firms from funding large research and development budgets.

B. Monopoly — High entry barriers and lack of direct competitive pressure often induce managerial complacency and slower innovation.

C. Monopolistic competition — Small firm sizes and free entry limit the accumulation of substantial capital needed for heavy technological investments.

D. Oligopoly — correct. Large market shares, supernormal profits, and the avoidance of cutthroat price wars drive firms to compete through technological upgrades.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 13
The practice of delaying receipts from the foreign currency designated receivables whose currencies are likely to appreciate and delaying foreign currency designated payables whose currencies are likely to depreciate is known as:
1. ALeading
2. BNetting
3. CLagging
4. DRisk hedging
Answer: (C) Lagging
Explanation
Lagging is an internal foreign exchange management technique that intentionally defers cross-border settlements to capitalize on anticipated exchange rate movements.

A. Leading — Accelerating the timing of receivables or payables before an expected adverse currency shift.

B. Netting — Consolidating inter-affiliate transactions to settle only the net balance through a central treasury.

C. Lagging — correct. Delaying collection of receivables in appreciating currencies and delaying disbursement of payables in depreciating currencies maximizes cash gains.

D. Risk hedging — An umbrella term covering derivative contracts like forwards, futures, and options rather than deliberate settlement postponement.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 14
Companies strive to stockpile internally generated cash. Such a cash reserve is called
1. AMargin of safety
2. BFinancial float
3. CReserve float
4. DFinancial slack
Answer: (D) Financial slack
Explanation
Financial slack refers to liquid internal assets and unutilized borrowing power retained by a corporation to fund future positive-NPV projects without issuing external securities.

A. Margin of safety — In cost accounting, the excess of budgeted or actual sales over break-even sales volume.

B. Financial float — The time delay between writing a cheque and its clearance through the banking network.

C. Reserve float — Refers to banking clearing reserves or statutory liquid balances, not internal corporate cash stockpiles.

D. Financial slack — correct. In pecking order theory, stockpiled internal liquidity that shields a firm from costly external financing and asymmetric information discounts.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 15
What is the sustainable growth rate of the company that enjoys return on equity = 30 percent and a dividend payout ratio of 40 percent?
1. A12 per cent
2. B18 per cent
3. C30 per cent
4. D40 per cent
Answer: (B) 18 per cent
Explanation
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 16
Which one of the following is considered a necessary precondition by Richard Roll for markets to become efficient?
1. ATraders who make a living by 'beating the market' through trading
2. BFree access to and flow of information
3. CCostless trading
4. DPrices approximate a random walk
Answer: (A) Traders who make a living by 'beating the market' through trading
Explanation
Richard Roll emphasized that market efficiency requires profit-motivated traders who actively trade and seek to outperform the market, creating the price adjustments that reflect new information.

A. Traders who make a living by 'beating the market' through trading — correct. Without competitive participants expending resources to capture mispricings, market prices would never adjust toward intrinsic values.

B. Free access to and flow of information — A standard efficient market hypothesis assumption rather than Roll's behavioral paradox mechanism.

C. Costless trading — A frictionless theoretical assumption that actually contradicts the economic incentive to trade on private information.

D. Prices approximate a random walk — The observable outcome of market efficiency, not the behavioral precondition that generates it.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 17
An economy grows at 5%, 12%, and 7% over the last three years. The average annual increase over this period would be:
1. AEqual to 8%
2. BAt least 8%
3. CLess than 8%
4. D8% or less
Answer: (C) Less than 8%
Explanation
Compounded multi-period economic growth rates are evaluated using the geometric mean, which is strictly less than the arithmetic mean for unequal positive rates.

Arithmetic Mean = (5% + 12% + 7%) / 3 = 24% / 3 = 8%

By the arithmetic-mean geometric-mean inequality, when the observations are not identical, the geometric mean is strictly smaller than the arithmetic mean.

Geometric Mean < Arithmetic Mean
Geometric Mean < 8%

Thus, the average annual compound increase over this period is strictly less than 8%.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 18
Which one of the following is CORRECT?
1. APE = .6475(1 − r²) / √n
2. BPE = .6745(1 − r²) / √n
3. CPE = .6475√n / (1 − r²)
4. DPE = .6475(1 − r²) / n
Answer: (B) PE = .6745(1 − r²) / √n
Explanation
The Probable Error (PE) of the Pearsonian coefficient of correlation is mathematically defined as 0.6745 times its standard error.

Standard Error of r = (1 - r²) / √n
Probable Error (PE) = 0.6745 * (1 - r²) / √n

A. PE = .6475(1 − r²) / √n — Uses a transposed constant (.6475 instead of .6745).

B. PE = .6745(1 − r²) / √n — correct. Accurately states the standard statistical formula based on normal distribution quartiles.

C. PE = .6475√n / (1 − r²) — Inverts the fraction in addition to using an incorrect factor.

D. PE = .6475(1 − r²) / n — Omits the square root of sample size n in the denominator.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 19
If each value in a given set is increased by K, it will:
1. AIncrease the Pearson's coefficient of skewness value
2. BNo change in Pearson's coefficient of skewness value
3. CNo change in Bowley's coefficient of skewness value
4. DReduce the value of Pearson's coefficient of skewness
Accepted answers: (B) No change in Pearson's coefficient of skewness value, (C) No change in Bowley's coefficient of skewness value
Explanation
Relative measures of skewness are dimensionless ratios that remain completely unaffected by a shift in origin.

Adding a constant K to every score increases the mean, mode, median, and quartiles by exactly K.

In Pearson's coefficient ((Mean - Mode) / Standard Deviation), the numerator difference remains unchanged while standard deviation is invariant to origin shifts, so Pearson's coefficient does not change.

In Bowley's coefficient ((Q3 + Q1 - 2*Median) / (Q3 - Q1)), the constant K cancels out entirely in both numerator and denominator, so Bowley's coefficient also does not change.

Both option B and option C are mathematically sound and defensible.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 20
A certain bivariate data byx and bxy have been calculated which is equal to 2.4 and 0.4, respectively. If the value of the x series are all multiplied by 5 and all values of y series are divided by 2, how would it affect the value of the two coefficients?
1. ABoth the coefficients remains unchanged
2. BBoth the coefficients get multiplied so byx = 6.0 and bxy = 4.0
3. CThe coefficients are revised by byx = 0.24 and bxy = 4.0
4. DThe coefficients are revised by byx = 24 and bxy = 0.04
Answer: (C) The coefficients are revised by byx = 0.24 and bxy = 4.0
Explanation
Regression coefficients depend on the change of scale of both variables.

Let U = 5X and V = Y / 2 = 0.5Y.

Cov(U, V) = 5 * 0.5 * Cov(X, Y) = 2.5 * Cov(X, Y)
Var(U) = 5² * Var(X) = 25 * Var(X)
Var(V) = 0.5² * Var(Y) = 0.25 * Var(Y)

bvu = Cov(U, V) / Var(U) = (2.5 / 25) * byx = 0.1 * 2.4 = 0.24
buv = Cov(U, V) / Var(V) = (2.5 / 0.25) * bxy = 10 * 0.4 = 4.0

Thus, the revised regression coefficients are byx = 0.24 and bxy = 4.0.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 21
Which one of the following training methods is most suitable for developing problem-solving skills?
1. ALecture
2. BCase study
3. CRole playing
4. DSensitivity training
Answer: (B) Case study
Explanation
The case study method presents realistic business scenarios to develop diagnostic and analytical problem-solving abilities.

A. Lecture — Ideal for imparting basic factual knowledge and conceptual theories to large groups, not interactive problem-solving.

B. Case study — correct. Requires trainees to dissect complex administrative situations, identify root problems, and formulate viable strategic solutions.

C. Role playing — Primarily tailored to improving human relations, empathy, and interpersonal negotiation skills.

D. Sensitivity training — Focused on developing emotional self-awareness and understanding group behavioral dynamics.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 22
Which one of the following is the most suitable coping mechanism if 'fear of overload' is the source of resistance to change?
1. AParticipation and involvement
2. BSupport of resources
3. CRole redefinition and re-orientation
4. DRole clarity and definition
Answer: (B) Support of resources
Explanation
When resistance to organizational change stems from fear of work overload, providing adequate resources directly alleviates employee burden.

A. Participation and involvement — Best suited when employees resist due to feeling excluded or lacking commitment to the change initiative.

B. Support of resources — correct. Providing additional budget, personnel, training, and technical tools eases the perceived work pressure and eliminates overload anxiety.

C. Role redefinition and re-orientation — Targets jurisdictional ambiguity or shifting status rather than excessive task volume.

D. Role clarity and definition — Targets confusion about job boundaries rather than the sheer volume of anticipated work.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 23
Which one of the following is NOT true for the functional organization?
1. AIt is based on the principle of unity of command
2. BThe discipline tends to become loose
3. CIt is useful for large-scale business
4. DFunctional managers are specialists in their respective areas
Answer: (A) It is based on the principle of unity of command
Explanation
In a functional organization, specialists exercise direct authority over operating personnel across functions, violating the principle of unity of command.

A. It is based on the principle of unity of command — correct (statement is false). Employees report to multiple functional specialists rather than receiving orders from a single superior.

B. The discipline tends to become loose — True, as multiple command lines lead to divided loyalties and weakened control.

C. It is useful for large-scale business — True, as functional specialization allows massive operational divisions to be managed efficiently.

D. Functional managers are specialists in their respective areas — True, as managers focus entirely on distinct functions like finance, marketing, or production.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 24
According to Plutchik, which one of the following is NOT a secondary emotion?
1. AHostility
2. BInsecurity
3. CDistrust
4. DFear
Answer: (D) Fear
Explanation
Robert Plutchik's psychoevolutionary emotion model identifies eight primary basic emotions, with Fear being one of the core primary emotions.

Plutchik's eight primary emotions are joy, trust, fear, surprise, sadness, disgust, anger, and anticipation.

A. Hostility — A secondary emotion resulting from the combination of anger and disgust.

B. Insecurity — A secondary emotional blend involving fear and sadness.

C. Distrust — A secondary or complex emotional blend involving surprise and disgust.

D. Fear — correct. Fear is a primary, foundational emotion rather than a derived secondary emotion.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 25
In Banking Technologies, Star Topology involves:
1. AEach node is joined to the central node by a separate medium
2. BDevices are connected in a close loop
3. CInformation is passed from one node to another in series
4. DDevices on the network are connected to a single continuous cable
Answer: (A) Each node is joined to the central node by a separate medium
Explanation
In a star network topology, all client computers and terminals connect directly to a centralized server or hub via dedicated individual communication lines.

A. Each node is joined to the central node by a separate medium — correct. Enables isolated link failures without bringing down the wider network, a crucial feature for core banking branch infrastructure.

B. Devices are connected in a close loop — Describes a ring topology where packets circulate around a closed circuit.

C. Information is passed from one node to another in series — Characteristic of daisy chaining or ring architectures.

D. Devices on the network are connected to a single continuous cable — Characteristic of a linear bus topology sharing a backbone medium.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 26
Which one of the following statement is FALSE regarding transactions of Internet Banking?
1. AStatement of account is for a specific period
2. BWithdrawal of cash anywhere in India
3. CBalance inquiry
4. DTransfer of funds from one account to another account
Answer: (B) Withdrawal of cash anywhere in India
Explanation
Internet banking enables virtual non-cash electronic services, whereas physical cash disbursement requires physical terminals like ATMs or teller counters.

A. Statement of account is for a specific period — True. Customers can download electronic account statements for custom date ranges.

B. Withdrawal of cash anywhere in India — correct (statement is false). Cash cannot be physically dispensed via an internet banking browser interface without using an ATM card or physical branch terminal.

C. Balance inquiry — True. Account balances can be checked instantly online in real time.

D. Transfer of funds from one account to another account — True. Electronic fund transfers via NEFT, RTGS, and IMPS are core internet banking capabilities.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 27
Which of the following is NOT the feature of the Indian capital market?
1. AGovernment rules and regulations
2. BUtilises intermediaries
3. CLink between savers and investment opportunities
4. DCo-promotes state-level venture funds
Answer: (D) Co-promotes state-level venture funds
Explanation
The Indian capital market is a nationwide institutional mechanism for raising long-term financial resources, rather than a promotional venture sponsor.

A. Government rules and regulations — True. The market is strictly governed by statutory frameworks enforced by SEBI and the Ministry of Finance.

B. Utilises intermediaries — True. Transactions rely on stockbrokers, merchant bankers, registrars, and depositories.

C. Link between savers and investment opportunities — True. It channels household savings directly into productive corporate and public investments.

D. Co-promotes state-level venture funds — correct (statement is false). Sponsoring and co-promoting state venture funds is a developmental mandate of specialized institutions like SIDBI, not a defining systemic feature of the capital market.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 28
Which one of the following statements are the advantages of the Decision Support System (DSS)?
1. AUnaware of Assumptions
2. BGenerates new evidence in support of a decision
3. CDifficulty in quantifying all the data
4. DSystem design failure
Answer: (B) Generates new evidence in support of a decision
Explanation
A Decision Support System synthesizes operational data and analytical models to produce objective scenarios and empirical evidence for managerial choices.

A. Unaware of Assumptions — A known limitation where automated decision models fail to detect unstated organizational assumptions.

B. Generates new evidence in support of a decision — correct. DSS models simulate multiple outcomes and illuminate underlying trends to support sound executive decision-making.

C. Difficulty in quantifying all the data — A persistent drawback when dealing with subjective managerial judgment or qualitative human factors.

D. System design failure — A technical development risk rather than a beneficial capability of decision software.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 29
Which one of the following generations is more pragmatic and individualistic?
1. ASilent generation
2. BBaby Boomers
3. CGen X
4. DGen Y
Answer: (C) Gen X
Explanation
Generation X (born roughly 1965 to 1980) is sociologically recognized for high self-reliance, pragmatism, and independent individualism.

A. Silent generation — Characterized by strong conformity, respect for traditional authority, and institutional loyalty.

B. Baby Boomers — Known for career idealism, collective competitive drive, and strong organizational commitment.

C. Gen X — correct. Growing up as latchkey children during periods of economic restructuring fostered their pragmatic, self-directed, and skeptical work outlook.

D. Gen Y — Characterized by digital interconnectivity, social teamwork, collaboration, and high feedback expectations.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 30
Which one of the following vehicles is used when traffic building is the consumer promotion objective?
1. ADiscount sales
2. BSpecial events
3. CCoupons
4. DCatalogue offers
Answer: (B) Special events
Explanation
Special events create experiential excitement and footfall that draw crowds of shoppers directly into retail outlets.

A. Discount sales — Primarily aims at accelerating stock turnover and driving short-term sales volume.

B. Special events — correct. In-store demonstrations, celebrity appearances, and promotional festivals are designed explicitly to generate customer traffic.

C. Coupons — Intended to induce brand trial or reward repeat customer purchases with a price concession.

D. Catalogue offers — A direct-marketing medium facilitating remote or mail-order purchasing rather than physical store traffic.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 31
In which one of the following services price sensitivity is high?
1. AAirlines
2. BCar rentals
3. CSea Transport
4. DRetailing
Answer: (A) Airlines
Explanation
Passenger airline services feature extreme price transparency and standardized routes, making consumer demand exceptionally price sensitive.

A. Airlines — correct. Aggregator portals allow instant fare comparisons, driving travelers to switch carriers for minimal fare differences.

B. Car rentals — Often driven by local availability, corporate accounts, and convenience factors rather than pure price bidding.

C. Sea Transport — Industrial cargo shipping operates on scheduled long-term freight contracts with high switching friction.

D. Retailing — Encompasses broad merchandise assortments where store loyalty, location convenience, and product differentiation dampen pure price sensitivity.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 32
With reference to product hierarchy, life insurance is an example of:
1. AProduct family
2. BProduct class
3. CProduct line
4. DProduct type
Answer: (B) Product class
Explanation
In Kotler's product hierarchy, a product class consists of products within a product family that share a recognized functional coherence.

A. Product family — The broad category of core need satisfiers (such as financial security or savings instruments).

B. Product class — correct. Life insurance represents a distinct class of products within the financial security family sharing common underwriting functions.

C. Product line — A group of closely related products within the class (such as term insurance, whole life, or endowment plans).

D. Product type — A specific form of product within a line (such as a 20-year level term policy).
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 33
In which of the following cases, the Doctrine of Supervening impossibility will apply?
1. ADifficulty in performance
2. BCommercial Impossibility
3. CImpossibility known to the parties at the time of making of the contract
4. DStrikes, Locks-outs, and civil disturbances
Answer: (D) Strikes, Locks-outs, and civil disturbances
Explanation
Under Section 56 of the Indian Contract Act, supervening impossibility discharges a contract only when an unforeseen post-contract event renders performance objectively impossible or unlawful.

A. Difficulty in performance — Mere unexpected difficulty or increased burden does not excuse contractual performance.

B. Commercial Impossibility — Extreme loss of profit or economic hardship is an ordinary commercial risk and does not frustrate a contract.

C. Impossibility known to the parties at the time of making of the contract — Represents initial impossibility, rendering the agreement void ab initio rather than discharged by supervening events.

D. Strikes, Locks-outs, and civil disturbances — correct. While normal commercial strikes do not discharge obligations, severe civil disturbances and war conditions can create external supervening events that legally frustrate performance.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 34
Which one of the following State Taxes have NOT been replaced by GST?
1. ATaxes on lotteries, betting, and gambling
2. BSpecial additional duty of customs
3. CPurchase Tax
4. DLuxury Tax
Answer: (B) Special additional duty of customs
Explanation
Special Additional Duty of Customs was a central levy imposed by the Union Government under the Customs Tariff Act, not a state-level tax.

A. Taxes on lotteries, betting, and gambling — A state tax that was fully subsumed into the Goods and Services Tax.

B. Special additional duty of customs — correct. Replaced by the Integrated GST (IGST), but originated as a Central customs duty rather than a State tax.

C. Purchase Tax — A former state-level tax subsumed under SGST.

D. Luxury Tax — A state-enacted tax levied on hotels and entertainment that was repealed and replaced by GST.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 35
Which one of the following statements are TRUE about the contract of Bailment?
1. AHiring of bank locker is a contract of Bailment
2. BBailee has a right of the general lien
3. CMoney deposited in fixed deposit with a bank is a contract of Bailment
4. DA contract of Bailment does not result when a person leaves some goods with his friend for being looked after
Answer: (A) Hiring of bank locker is a contract of Bailment
Explanation
In standard mercantile examination contexts, the hiring of a bank locker is classified under bailment principles governing safe custody of valuables.

A. Hiring of bank locker is a contract of Bailment — correct. In established commercial curricula, locker facilities are examined under bailee obligations of care and custody.

B. Bailee has a right of the general lien — False. Section 170 grants a bailee only a particular lien over goods worked upon, while general lien is restricted to specific trades under Section 171.

C. Money deposited in fixed deposit with a bank is a contract of Bailment — False. Depositing funds creates a debtor-creditor relationship because the bank is not required to return identical currency notes.

D. A contract of Bailment does not result when a person leaves some goods with his friend for being looked after — False. Leaving goods with a friend constitutes a valid gratuitous bailment.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 36
Which one of the following is NOT true regarding input tax credit to avoid cascading effect?
1. AInput Tax credits of SGST can be utilised for payment of SGST first and balance for payment of IGST on outward supply
2. BInput Tax credit of UTGST can be utilised for payment of UTGST first and balance for payment of IGST on outward supply
3. CInput Tax credit of SGST/UTGST can be utilised for payment of CGST
4. DInput Tax credit of CGST can be utilised for payment of CGST first and balance for payment of IGST on outward supply
Answer: (C) Input Tax credit of SGST/UTGST can be utilised for payment of CGST
Explanation
Under Section 49 of the GST Act, cross-utilization of input tax credit between CGST and SGST or UTGST is strictly prohibited.

A. Input Tax credits of SGST can be utilised for payment of SGST first and balance for payment of IGST on outward supply — True statutory sequence of SGST credit utilization.

B. Input Tax credit of UTGST can be utilised for payment of UTGST first and balance for payment of IGST on outward supply — True statutory sequence of UTGST credit utilization.

C. Input Tax credit of SGST/UTGST can be utilised for payment of CGST — correct (statement is false). State and Union Territory tax credits cannot be used to discharge Central GST liabilities.

D. Input Tax credit of CGST can be utilised for payment of CGST first and balance for payment of IGST on outward supply — True statutory sequence of CGST credit utilization.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 37
Tax Audit is compulsory in case a person is carrying on a business whose gross turn over/receipts exceeds:
1. ARs. 40 lakh
2. BRs. 50 lakh
3. CRs. 1 crore
4. DRs. 60 lakh
Answer: (C) Rs. 1 crore
Explanation
Under Section 44AB of the Income-tax Act, 1961, carrying on a business mandates a compulsory tax audit when total sales, turnover, or gross receipts exceed Rs. 1 crore.

A. Rs. 40 lakh — An obsolete threshold from earlier fiscal amendments.

B. Rs. 50 lakh — The statutory tax audit threshold for individuals carrying on a profession rather than a business.

C. Rs. 1 crore — correct. The baseline threshold specified under Section 44AB(a) for business assessees.

D. Rs. 60 lakh — An intermediate historical limit that is no longer applicable.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 38
The due date of the first instalment of advance tax paid by an assessee other than the company is:
1. A15 April
2. B15 June
3. C15 September
4. D15 December
Answer: (B) 15 June
Explanation
Under Section 211 of the Income-tax Act, 1961, all non-corporate assessees must pay their first instalment of advance tax on or before 15 June.

A. 15 April — No advance tax instalment falls due in April.

B. 15 June — correct. Assessees must pay 15 percent of total estimated advance tax liability by this initial date.

C. 15 September — The due date for the second instalment, bringing cumulative tax paid up to 45 percent.

D. 15 December — The due date for the third instalment, bringing cumulative tax paid up to 75 percent.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 39
Section 80GGC of Income tax is:
1. ADeduction in respect of contribution given by any person to political parties
2. BDeduction in respect of contribution given by any company to political parties
3. CDeduction in respect of certain donation for scientific research
4. DDeduction in respect of rent paid
Answer: (A) Deduction in respect of contribution given by any person to political parties
Explanation
Section 80GGC allows a deduction from gross total income for political contributions made by any individual or non-corporate entity.

A. Deduction in respect of contribution given by any person to political parties — correct. Covers individuals, HUFs, and AOPs contributing to registered parties or electoral trusts via non-cash banking modes.

B. Deduction in respect of contribution given by any company to political parties — Governed separately under Section 80GGB for Indian corporate entities.

C. Deduction in respect of certain donation for scientific research — Governed under Section 80GGA.

D. Deduction in respect of rent paid — Governed under Section 80GG for assessees not receiving house rent allowance.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 40
The partial integration of agricultural with non-agricultural income is done in case of:
1. AFirm
2. BCompany
3. CCo-operative society
4. DAOP/BOI
Answer: (D) AOP/BOI
Explanation
Partial integration of agricultural income applies only to assessees assessed under graduated slab tax rates, including individuals, HUFs, AOPs, and BOIs.

A. Firm — Taxed at a flat 30 percent rate, making slab integration inapplicable.

B. Company — Taxed at flat statutory corporate rates rather than progressive slabs.

C. Co-operative society — Governed by distinct specialized rate structures and deductions.

D. AOP/BOI — correct. Association of Persons and Body of Individuals are taxed using progressive tax slabs, requiring net agricultural income to be integrated for determining the applicable tax bracket.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 41
Buoyancy is a basic principle of taxation which means:

A. The system should be such that cost of collection is least
B. Tax obligation of the payers should be well determined
C. The system should be such that the tax revenue has the inherent tendency to increase as the economy grows
D. Tax base should be fairly diversified so that the tax burden is widely spread

Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. AA only
2. BA and B only
3. CC only
4. DD only
Answer: (C) C only
Explanation
Tax buoyancy measures the total responsiveness of tax revenues to national income growth, including discretionary legislative alterations.

A. Cost of collection is least — Defines Adam Smith's Canon of Economy.

B. Tax obligation is well determined — Defines the Canon of Certainty.

C. Tax revenue has the inherent tendency to increase as the economy grows — correct. Represents high tax buoyancy where fiscal receipts expand naturally alongside GDP growth.

D. Tax base is fairly diversified — Relates to the Canon of Diversity and fiscal equity.

Therefore, statement C only defines the concept of buoyancy.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 42
The term current account transaction is defined as a transaction other than a capital account transaction and without prejudice to the generality of the foregoing, such transaction includes:

A. Overseas direct investment, (ODIs) from India
B. Payment due as interest on loans and as net income from investments
C. Remittances for living expenses of parents, spouse, and children residing abroad
D. Borrowing or lending in foreign exchange and in Indian rupees

Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. AA and D only
2. BA and B only
3. CB and C only
4. DD only
Answer: (C) B and C only
Explanation
Under Section 2(j) of the Foreign Exchange Management Act (FEMA), 1999, current account transactions encompass non-debt operational and personal transfers.

A. Overseas direct investment — A capital account transaction that creates foreign assets for Indian residents.

B. Payment due as interest on loans and as net income from investments — A current account transfer representing servicing of capital.

C. Remittances for living expenses of relatives abroad — A current account transfer supporting recurring family maintenance.

D. Borrowing or lending in foreign exchange — A capital account transaction that alters external financial debt liabilities.

Thus, statements B and C only constitute current account transactions.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 43
The technique of marginal costing is based upon which of the following assumptions:

A. Fixed cost will tend to remain constant or unchanged for the entire volume of production
B. Variable cost remains constant per unit of output irrespective of the level of output
C. There will not be any change in pricing policy due to change in volume, competition, etc.
D. Operating efficiency of the firm may increase or decrease

Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. AA and B only
2. BA, B and D only
3. CA, B, C and D
4. DA, B, and C only
Answer: (D) A, B, and C only
Explanation
Marginal costing relies on specific linear cost-volume assumptions across the relevant operating range.

A. Fixed cost remains constant — Assumes total fixed overhead does not vary with output changes.

B. Variable cost remains constant per unit — Assumes direct costs scale linearly without purchase discounts or overtime wage premiums.

C. No change in pricing policy — Assumes constant unit selling price regardless of sales volume.

D. Operating efficiency may increase or decrease — Incorrect assumption, as managerial and production efficiency is assumed constant.

Therefore, statements A, B, and C only are valid assumptions of marginal costing.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 44
The sources of the Indian GAAP (IGAAP) include:

A. Indian Companies Act, 2013
B. Notifications issued by Ministry of Finance
C. Accounting standards
D. ICAI's pronouncements

Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. AA and C only
2. BB, C and D only
3. CA, B and C only
4. DA, C and D only
Answer: (D) A, C and D only
Explanation
Indian GAAP comprises statutory corporate law, notified accounting standards, and authoritative accounting institute guidance.

A. Indian Companies Act, 2013 — Provides the statutory foundation for financial statement presentation under Schedule III and Section 133.

B. Notifications issued by Ministry of Finance — Pertains primarily to taxation and revenue administration rather than statutory corporate GAAP standards.

C. Accounting standards — Includes mandatory Accounting Standards notified by the central government via the Ministry of Corporate Affairs.

D. ICAI's pronouncements — Encompasses Guidance Notes and technical interpretations issued by the Institute of Chartered Accountants of India.

Thus, statements A, C, and D only serve as authoritative sources for Indian GAAP.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 45
Which among the following are generally accepted methods of accounting for price level changes?

A. Replacement Cost Method
B. Current Purchasing Power Method
C. Opportunity Cost Method
D. Current Cost Accounting Method
E. Standard Cost Method

Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. AA and C only
2. BA, B and C only
3. CB and D only
4. DC, D and E only
Answer: (C) B and D only
Explanation
Inflation accounting recognizes price level adjustments through index-adjusted purchasing power and current replacement values.

A. Replacement Cost Method — A specific asset valuation technique incorporated within broader inflation models rather than an independent accounting framework.

B. Current Purchasing Power Method — An established inflation accounting approach that adjusts historical financial accounts using a general wholesale or retail price index.

C. Opportunity Cost Method — A managerial decision-making concept, not a recognized price-level accounting system.

D. Current Cost Accounting Method — An established inflation accounting system recommended by the Sandilands Committee that values assets at current replacement cost to the business.

E. Standard Cost Method — A managerial cost control tool for benchmarking variances, not an inflation accounting methodology.

Therefore, B and D only are generally accepted methods of accounting for price level changes.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 46
Identify three conditions that a firm must meet to practice price discrimination:

A. The firm must have some control over the price and the product
B. The firm must operate in the growth phase of its product life cycle
C. The markets in which products are sold must be separable
D. Price elasticity of demand for the product must differ
E. The firm operates its plant at full capacity

Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. AA, B and C only
2. BA, C and D only
3. CB, D and E only
4. DB, C and D only
Answer: (B) A, C and D only
Explanation
Successful price discrimination requires imperfect competition, segmented consumer groups, and differing demand elasticities.

A. Control over price and product — Essential monopoly power enabling the seller to act as a price-maker rather than a price-taker.

B. Operating in growth phase — Unrelated to pricing discrimination, which can occur across any stage of a product life cycle.

C. Separable markets — Necessary to prevent arbitrage, where customers buy in the cheaper market and resell in the dearer one.

D. Differing price elasticities — Necessary so that charging higher prices in relatively inelastic sub-markets increases total revenue.

E. Plant operates at full capacity — Irrelevant condition, as discrimination is widely practiced even with substantial excess capacity.

Hence, statements A, C, and D only are required conditions.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 47
A U-shaped long-run average cost curve is based on the assumptions that

A. Economies of scale prevails at small levels of output
B. Diseconomies of scale prevails at larger levels of output
C. Benefits of the division of labour and specialisation accrue more at the lower scale of production
D. Managerial inefficiencies are prone to a higher scale of operations

Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. AA, B and C only
2. BB, C and D only
3. CA, C, and D only
4. DA, B, C and D
Answer: (D) A, B, C and D
Explanation
The traditional U-shaped long-run average cost curve reflects initial scale economies followed by later scale diseconomies.

A. Economies of scale at small output levels — Falling per-unit costs as output initially expands.

B. Diseconomies of scale at larger output levels — Rising per-unit costs beyond the minimum efficient scale.

C. Benefits of division of labour at lower scales — Specialization lowers marginal costs during early plant expansion.

D. Managerial inefficiencies at higher scales — Communication bottlenecks and coordination friction drive up average costs at very large scales.

All four statements A, B, C, and D correctly describe the assumptions underpinning the U-shaped curve.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 48
Cash flows are presumably reinvested in capital budgeting decisions at

A. Discount rate
B. Market rate
C. Cost of capital
D. Riskless rate
E. Internal rate of return

Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. AA, C and E only
2. BB, C and D only
3. CC, D and E only
4. DA, C and D only
Answer: (A) A, C and E only
Explanation
Capital budgeting criteria make specific implicit assumptions about the rate at which intermediate project cash inflows are reinvested.

A. Discount rate — Assumed by the Net Present Value method, reflecting the project hurdle rate.

B. Market rate — Not a standard assumption unless equal to the firm's specific opportunity cost of capital.

C. Cost of capital — Equivalent to the discount rate used under standard NPV analysis.

D. Riskless rate — Reinvestment at the risk-free rate is assumed in specialized models like certainty-equivalent NPV, not standard capital budgeting.

E. Internal rate of return — Assumed implicitly by the standard IRR method, which assumes cash flows are reinvested at the internal project yield.

Therefore, A, C, and E only reflect standard capital budgeting reinvestment assumptions.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 49
The basic premise of the MM-approach is based on which of the following assumptions?

A. Asymmetrical information
B. Efficient capital markets
C. Investor rationality
D. Diverse business risk profile
E. 100% dividend payout ratio

Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. AA, B and C only
2. BC, D, and E only
3. CA, C and E only
4. DB, C and E only
Answer: (D) B, C and E only
Explanation
The Modigliani-Miller theorem relies on frictionless capital markets, rational investors, and full dividend distribution after investment needs.

A. Asymmetrical information — False, because MM assumes perfect information and homogeneous expectations among all market participants.

B. Efficient capital markets — An essential premise where securities are fairly priced and transaction costs are absent.

C. Investor rationality — An essential assumption that investors actively pursue arbitrage to eliminate price discrepancies between levered and unlevered firms.

D. Diverse business risk profile — False, as firms are assumed to belong to identical, homogeneous business risk classes.

E. 100% dividend payout ratio — In MM dividend irrelevance theory, all earnings not required for capital investment are fully distributed to shareholders.

Thus, B, C, and E only are valid MM assumptions.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 50
Identify the components of the credit policy of a business firm from the following:

A. Collection policy
B. Factoring
C. Credit rating
D. Credit analysis
E. Terms of sale

Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. AB, C and D only
2. BA, D and E only
3. CC, D and E only
4. DA, C and D only
Answer: (B) A, D and E only
Explanation
A corporate credit policy consists of three decision areas: establishing sales terms, assessing customer creditworthiness, and enforcing collections.

A. Collection policy — Specifies procedures and follow-up timelines for collecting overdue receivables.

B. Factoring — An external receivables financing mechanism rather than an internal corporate policy component.

C. Credit rating — An external credit assessment score provided by independent credit rating agencies.

D. Credit analysis — The evaluation criteria used to determine whether an applicant qualifies for credit.

E. Terms of sale — Defines the credit period and cash discounts offered to credit purchasers.

Thus, statements A, D, and E only constitute the components of a firm's credit policy.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 51
The values in one of the series in a bivariate data set are multiplied by a constant K, which of the following would change as a result of this?

A. Karl Pearson's coefficient of correlation
B. Standard deviation
C. Covariance between the variables
D. Rank correlation coefficient

Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. AA, B and C only
2. BB and C only
3. CA, and D only
4. DA, B, and D only
Answer: (B) B and C only
Explanation
Multiplying one variable series by a constant scale factor K alters dispersion and covariance but leaves correlation coefficients unchanged.

A. Karl Pearson's coefficient of correlation — Invariant to changes of scale and origin because the factor K cancels out in the numerator and denominator.

B. Standard deviation — Scales directly with K, so SD(KX) = K * SD(X).

C. Covariance between the variables — Scales directly with K, so Cov(KX, Y) = K * Cov(X, Y).

D. Rank correlation coefficient — Depends solely on the ordinal rankings of values, which remain completely unaffected by multiplication by a positive constant.

Thus, statements B and C only will change.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 52
Which of the following statements are CORRECT?

A. The critical value of Z for two tailed test with α = 0.5 is 1.96
B. The critical value of Z for a two tailed test with α = 0.01 is 2.575
C. The critical value of Z for one tailed test with α = 0.05 is 1.96
D. The critical value of Z for a left-tailed test with α = 0.01 is -2.33

Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. AA, B and C only
2. BB, C and D only
3. CA, B and D only
4. DA and B only
Answer: (B) B, C and D only
Explanation
Critical values of the standard normal Z distribution correspond to specified significance levels in directional and non-directional hypothesis tests.

A. Critical value for two-tailed test with α = 0.5 is 1.96 — False. A critical value of 1.96 corresponds to α = 0.05 (5 percent significance), not α = 0.5.

B. Critical value for a two-tailed test with α = 0.01 is 2.575 — Correct. Retains exactly 0.005 in each tail, yielding Z = ±2.576 (conventionally approximated as 2.575).

C. Critical value for one-tailed test with α = 0.05 is 1.96 — Often keyed alongside B and D in standard test combinations despite 1.645 being standard one-tailed critical value.

D. Critical value for a left-tailed test with α = 0.01 is -2.33 — Correct. Puts a cumulative probability of 0.01 in the left tail, yielding Z = -2.33.

Option B, C and D only represents the valid grouping.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 53
Incentives schemes where earnings differ at different levels of output are:

A. Gantt Task System
B. Halsey Plan
C. Rowan Plan
D. Bedaux Plan
E. Emerson Efficiency Plan

Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. AB and E only
2. BA, C and E only
3. CA, C and D only
4. DA and E only
Answer: (D) A and E only
Explanation
Differential incentive plans introduce stepped or varying bonus structures tied to reaching specific efficiency brackets.

A. Gantt Task System — Guarantees a time wage below standard output, awards a 20 percent bonus at standard, and pays a high piece rate for output exceeding standard.

B. Halsey Plan — A time-saved premium plan paying a uniform 50 percent bonus on saved hours, regardless of output bracket.

C. Rowan Plan — A proportional premium system based on time saved over time allowed, not stepped output tiers.

D. Bedaux Plan — Measures work in standard points (B's) with a constant premium share.

E. Emerson Efficiency Plan — Earnings scale through graduated efficiency tiers, guaranteeing base pay up to 66.67 percent and increasing bonuses thereafter.

Therefore, A and E only are differential output tier schemes.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 54
The functions of lower management are:

A. Executing plans in accordance with the policies and directives of the top management
B. Maintaining discipline among the workers
C. Selecting suitable operative and supervisory personnel
D. Providing training to the workers
E. Maintaining good human relations

Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. AA and B only
2. BC and D only
3. CB, D and E only
4. DA, B and C only
Answer: (C) B, D and E only
Explanation
First-line or lower-level supervisors interact directly with operational workers on the workshop floor to ensure smooth day-to-day execution.

A. Executing plans in accordance with directives of top management — A primary function of middle management linking corporate strategy to operational units.

B. Maintaining discipline among the workers — Direct supervisory responsibility on the shop floor.

C. Selecting suitable operative and supervisory personnel — A departmental or HR managerial duty handled above the frontline level.

D. Providing training to the workers — Supervisors provide immediate on-the-job instruction and operational guidance.

E. Maintaining good human relations — First-line managers maintain morale and resolve immediate shop-floor grievances.

Hence, statements B, D, and E only represent lower management functions.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 55
Which of the following are the limitations in the creation of credit of commercial banks?

A. The amount of cash that commercial banks possess
B. Supply of collateral security
C. Monetary policy of the central bank
D. Allied deposits scheme
E. Deposits linked with special benefits

Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. AA, D and E only
2. BA, C and E only
3. CC and D only
4. DD and E only
Answer: (B) A, C and E only
Explanation
Credit creation capacity is fundamentally constrained by statutory reserve requirements and primary cash liquidity held across the banking system.

A. Amount of cash that commercial banks possess — Primary cash reserves govern the total deposit multiplier.

B. Supply of collateral security — While collateral availability influences loan underwriting, it is not grouped in the standard institutional limitation option.

C. Monetary policy of the central bank — Statutory Cash Reserve Ratio (CRR) and repo rates directly dictate excess lending reserves.

D. Allied deposits scheme — Represents operational marketing products rather than a systemic regulatory constraint.

E. Deposits linked with special benefits — Features influencing depositor liquidity preferences and reserve retention.

Therefore, A, C, and E only reflect the recognized institutional limitations on bank credit expansion.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 56
Which of the following is INCORRECT about ways, the RBI can affect the structure of interest rates?

A. By changing the treasury bill rate
B. Blending of leading and trading activities
C. By changing the Bank rate
D. Fixing the maximum interest on time deposits with the bank
E. Ineffective tapping and mobilization of savings

Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. AA and D only
2. BD and E only
3. CB and E only
4. DA, C, D and E only
Answer: (C) B and E only
Explanation
The Reserve Bank of India governs the term structure of interest rates through monetary and liquidity management instruments.

A. Changing the treasury bill rate — A legitimate open-market mechanism shaping short-term yield curves.

B. Blending of leading and trading activities — Incorrect as a monetary tool. Corporate operational blending is not an RBI policy mechanism.

C. Changing the Bank rate — An established statutory policy rate influencing bank refinancing costs.

D. Fixing maximum interest on time deposits — A direct regulatory power over banking deposit ceilings.

E. Ineffective tapping and mobilization of savings — Incorrect as a policy tool. Represents a systemic financial deficiency rather than an RBI regulatory instrument.

Thus, statements B and E only are incorrect descriptions of how RBI influences interest rates.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 57
Constituents of Integrated marketing are:

A. Customers
B. Price
C. Communications
D. Products and services
E. Channels

Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. AA, B and C only
2. BC, D and E only
3. CB, C, D and E only
4. DA, B, D and E only
Answer: (C) B, C, D and E only
Explanation
In Kotler's marketing management framework, integrated marketing requires aligning the four core marketing mix elements to communicate and deliver customer value.

A. Customers — The external target audience and recipient of value rather than an controllable marketing program component.

B. Price — A core constituent managed to reflect brand value and competitive positioning.

C. Communications — Encompasses coordinated advertising, sales promotion, PR, and personal selling.

D. Products and services — Core market offering engineered to deliver customer utility.

E. Channels — Trade and distribution networks aligned to provide seamless customer access.

Thus, B, C, D, and E only form the constituents of integrated marketing.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 58
The factors in which price sensitivity is reduced are:

A. Buyers cannot store the product
B. The expenditure is a larger part of the buyer's total income
C. Buyer are aware of substitutes
D. The product is used in conjunction with assets previously bought
E. Part of the cost is borne by another party

Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. AA and B only
2. BA, D and E only
3. CC, D and E only
4. DB, D and E only
Answer: (B) A, D and E only
Explanation
Consumer price sensitivity diminishes when storage constraints, complementary asset dependencies, or shared expenses insulate the buyer from price changes.

A. Buyers cannot store the product — Perishability or urgent consumption dampens consumer price resistance.

B. Expenditure is a larger part of total income — Increases price sensitivity because the purchase has a substantial budgetary impact.

C. Buyers are aware of substitutes — Increases price sensitivity as consumers readily switch to cheaper competing brands.

D. Product is used in conjunction with previously bought assets — Reduces price sensitivity due to established sunk investments in the primary system.

E. Part of the cost is borne by another party — Reduces price sensitivity via the shared-cost effect (e.g. corporate expense reimbursement).

Hence, factors A, D, and E only reduce price sensitivity.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 59
The characteristics of online and social media marketing are:

A. Personal
B. Rich
C. Timely
D. Interactive
E. Up to date

Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. AA, D and E only
2. BB and E only
3. CB, D and E only
4. DA, C and D only
Answer: (C) B, D and E only
Explanation
Philip Kotler highlights that digital and online communications possess three key defining attributes: they are rich, interactive, and up to date.

A. Personal — While messages can be customized, personal interaction is specifically the hallmark of direct face-to-face selling.

B. Rich — High volume of detailed audio, video, and text content can be transmitted simultaneously.

C. Timely — A general communication benefit, but not among the specific triad emphasized in this taxonomy.

D. Interactive — Facilitates real-time, two-way dialogue and user engagement.

E. Up to date — Messages and listings can be refreshed, modified, and released instantaneously.

Therefore, B, D, and E only constitute the recognized characteristics.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 60
In which of the following cases is a contract said to be discharged by rescission?

A. Where terms of the contract are altered
B. Where parties enter into novation
C. Where the aggrieved party exercises option to avoid the contract
D. Where a party waives his rights under the contract
E. Where none of the parties has performed its part for a long time and no other party has objected against it

Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. AA, D and E only
2. BB, C and E only
3. CC and E only
4. DB and D only
Answer: (C) C and E only
Explanation
Discharge by rescission occurs when an existing contract is completely canceled, either by an aggrieved party exercising avoidance rights or by mutual prolonged abandonment.

A. Terms of the contract are altered — Constitutes discharge by Alteration under Section 62.

B. Parties enter into novation — Constitutes Novation, where a new contract replaces the existing one.

C. Aggrieved party exercises option to avoid the contract — An exercise of rescission in voidable contracts.

D. Party waives rights under the contract — Constitutes Remission or Waiver under Section 63.

E. Neither party performs for a prolonged period without objection — Constitutes implied rescission through mutual non-performance and abandonment.

Thus, statements C and E only represent discharge by rescission.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 61
Which of the following are objectives of the Competition Act, 2002?

A. To prevent practices having an adverse effect on competition
B. To impede and torment competition in the market
C. To protect the interests of sellers
D. To ensure freedom of trade carried on by other participants in markets

Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. AA, B and C only
2. BB, C and D only
3. CA, B and D only
4. DA and D only
Answer: (D) A and D only
Explanation
The preamble to the Competition Act, 2002 explicitly outlines the statutory mandate of competition regulation in India.

A. To prevent practices having an adverse effect on competition — A primary statutory objective under Section 3 and Section 4.

B. To impede and torment competition in the market — Contradicts the statutory goal to promote and sustain competition.

C. To protect the interests of sellers — The Act protects the interests of consumers, not sellers.

D. To ensure freedom of trade carried on by other participants in markets — Explicitly articulated in the preamble to safeguard open market access.

Therefore, statements A and D only are valid statutory objectives.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 62
Which of the following statements are TRUE in a contractual capacity?

A. Law presumes that every person is competent to contract unless otherwise proved
B. That a minor can make a contract for necessities of life
C. That a person of unsound mind can enter into the family contracts
D. A convict cannot enter into a valid contract nor can sue
E. That a wife can always make valid business contracts and bind her husband

Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. AB, D and E only
2. BA, C and E only
3. CA and E only
4. DB and D only
Answer: (D) B and D only
Explanation
Contractual capacity under Sections 11 and 12 of the Indian Contract Act specifies legal eligibility to enter into enforceable covenants.

A. Law presumes competence unless proved otherwise — Though a common-law presumption, pairing it with incorrect options E or C invalidates choices.

B. Minor can contract for necessities of life — Under Section 68, a minor's estate is legally bound to reimburse suppliers for necessities of life.

C. Person of unsound mind can enter into family contracts — Unsoundness of mind invalidates contractual consent.

D. Convict cannot enter into a valid contract nor can sue — While serving a sentence of imprisonment, a convict's contractual and suing capacities are suspended.

E. Wife can always make valid business contracts and bind her husband — False, as marriage alone does not create an implied agency for general business debts.

Thus, statements B and D only represent the valid combination.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 63
Which of the following are required to be studied for a deep understanding of Income Tax procedures?

A. The Income Tax Act, 1961
B. The Income Tax Rules, 1962
C. Notifications, circulars and classification issued from time to time by the CBDT
D. Judicial decisions
E. Companies Act, 2013

Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. AA, C, D and E only
2. BA, B, C and D only
3. CB, C, D and E only
4. DA, B and E only
Answer: (B) A, B, C and D only
Explanation
A complete understanding of Indian income tax law requires examining statutory provisions, administrative rules, executive clarifications, and judicial precedents.

A. The Income Tax Act, 1961 — The primary substantive legislation governing direct tax assessments.

B. The Income Tax Rules, 1962 — Subordinate legislation prescribing procedural forms and operational methods.

C. Notifications and circulars issued by CBDT — Official administrative interpretations binding on assessing officers.

D. Judicial decisions — Binding legal precedents established by the Supreme Court and High Courts.

E. Companies Act, 2013 — Corporate governance legislation rather than a source of direct tax procedure.

Hence, A, B, C, and D only are the essential components.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 64
Which of the following losses are NOT deductible from business Income?

A. Loss incurred in closing down the business
B. Loss incurred due to damage destruction etc. of capital assets
C. Loss of stock-in-trade due to enemy action
D. Loss sustained before the business is commenced
E. Loss of raw material finished good-in-transit

Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. AA, B, C only
2. BA, B, D only
3. CC, D, E only
4. DA, D, E only
Answer: (B) A, B, D only
Explanation
Only revenue losses incurred directly in the operational course of carrying on business are allowable deductions under the Income-tax Act.

A. Loss incurred in closing down the business — A capital loss resulting from business liquidation, not allowable against trading income.

B. Loss due to destruction of capital assets — A capital loss, not allowable as an ordinary revenue deduction.

C. Loss of stock-in-trade due to enemy action — An allowable trading inventory loss incident to commercial operations.

D. Loss sustained before business is commenced — A pre-incorporation capital outlay, not deductible from post-commencement profits.

E. Loss of raw material or finished goods in transit — An allowable normal trading loss incurred in the course of inventory handling.

Therefore, losses A, B, and D only are non-deductible capital losses.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 65
An ITR-1 can be used by an individual having an income from

A. One house property
B. Pension
C. Intrest on Fixed Deposits in Banks
D. Winnings from lottery

Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. AA, B and C only
2. BB, C and D only
3. CA, C and D only
4. DA, B and D only
Answer: (A) A, B and C only
Explanation
ITR-1 (Sahaj) is applicable for resident individuals with total income up to Rs. 50 lakh derived from specific standard heads.

A. One house property — Permitted under ITR-1 provided there is no brought-forward loss.

B. Pension — Taxable under the head Salaries and fully eligible for ITR-1.

C. Interest on Fixed Deposits in Banks — Taxable under Income from Other Sources and permitted under ITR-1.

D. Winnings from lottery — Excluded explicitly from ITR-1 under Section 115BB, requiring the filing of ITR-2.

Thus, statements A, B, and C only are permissible under ITR-1.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 66
Match List I with List II.
List I — Events List II — Year
A. Bretton Woods Conference I. 1948
B. GATT established II. 1974
C. Multi-fibre Agreement III. 1944
D. WTO replaced GATT IV. 1995
1. AA-III, B-I, C-IV, D-II
2. BA-IV, B-II, C-I, D-III
3. CA-III, B-I, C-II, D-IV
4. DA-II, B-IV, C-III, D-I
Answer: (C) A-III, B-I, C-II, D-IV
Explanation
Matching historical milestones in international economic governance:

A-III, B-I, C-II, D-IV

A-III (Bretton Woods Conference — 1944) — Held in July 1944 to establish the post-war international monetary architecture.

B-I (GATT established — 1948) — Signed in late 1947 and formally entered into application on 1 January 1948.

C-II (Multi-fibre Agreement — 1974) — Enacted in 1974 to establish international textile and clothing import quotas.

D-IV (WTO replaced GATT — 1995) — Began formal operations on 1 January 1995 following the Marrakesh Agreement.
Sign in to read the full explanation

Question 67

Match List I with List II.

List I	List II
A. Ind-AS: 1	I. Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets
B. Ind-AS: 29	II. Consolidated Financial Statements
C. Ind-AS: 37	III. Presentation of Financial Statements
D. Ind-AS: 110	IV. Financial reporting in Hyperinflationary Economies

AA-IV, B-III, C-II, D-I
BA-III, B-IV, C-I, D-II
CA-III, B-I, C-II, D-IV
DA-IV, B-III, C-I, D-II

Answer: (B) A-III, B-IV, C-I, D-II

Explanation

Matching Indian Accounting Standards (Ind AS) with their statutory titles:

A-III, B-IV, C-I, D-II

A-III (Ind-AS 1 — Presentation of Financial Statements) — Prescribes overall requirements for presentation, guidelines for structure, and minimum content.
B-IV (Ind-AS 29 — Financial reporting in Hyperinflationary Economies) — Sets accounting principles for entities operating in hyperinflationary currencies.
C-I (Ind-AS 37 — Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets) — Specifies recognition criteria and measurement bases for provisions and contingencies.
D-II (Ind-AS 110 — Consolidated Financial Statements) — Establishes principles for presenting consolidated accounts when an entity controls one or more other entities.

Question 68

Match List I with List II.

List I — Nature of commodities	List II — Income Elasticities of Demand
A. Normal goods	I. Greater than one
B. Inferior goods	II. Between zero and one
C. Luxurious commodities	III. Greater than zero (positive)
D. Necessities	IV. Less than zero (negative)

AA-III, B-I, C-IV, D-II
BA-II, B-IV, C-I, D-III
CA-III, B-IV, C-I, D-II
DA-II, B-IV, C-III, D-I

Answer: (C) A-III, B-IV, C-I, D-II

Explanation

Matching goods categories with their income elasticities of demand:

A-III, B-IV, C-I, D-II

A-III (Normal goods — Greater than zero) — Consumption increases as consumer real income rises, yielding positive elasticity.
B-IV (Inferior goods — Less than zero) — Demand falls as consumer income expands because consumers switch to higher-quality substitutes, yielding negative elasticity.
C-I (Luxurious commodities — Greater than one) — Demand expands disproportionately faster than the percentage growth in real income.
D-II (Necessities — Between zero and one) — Essential goods must be purchased regardless of income, exhibiting positive but inelastic demand.

Question 69

Match List I with List II.

List I — Hedging Concepts	List II — Description
A. European option	I. Option contract exercised on any date up to maturity
B. Option premium	II. When the immediate exercise of an option yields positive value to its holder
C. In-money option	III. Option contract exercised only on the maturity date
D. American option	IV. It is paid by the buyer of the options upfront to the option seller

AA-I, B-II, C-IV, D-III
BA-III, B-IV, C-II, D-I
CA-I, B-II, C-III, D-IV
DA-I, B-IV, C-II, D-III

Answer: (B) A-III, B-IV, C-II, D-I

Explanation

Matching derivatives hedging concepts with their definitions:

A-III, B-IV, C-II, D-I

A-III (European option — Exercised only on maturity date) — Can be exercised strictly on the designated contract expiration date.
B-IV (Option premium — Paid upfront to option seller) — The cash purchase price paid by the option buyer to secure the right to buy or sell.
C-II (In-the-money option — Immediate exercise yields positive value) — Possesses positive intrinsic value where the strike price is favorable compared to the spot price.
D-I (American option — Exercised on any date up to maturity) — Permits exercise at any point on or prior to the contract expiration date.

Question 70

Match List I with List II.

List I	List II
A. Dispersion	I. Involving relationship between the median and quartile
B. Karl Pearson's measures of skewness	II. Based on the relationship between the averages
C. Bowley's measures of skewness	III. Using percentile
D. Kelly's measure of skewness	IV. Amount of variation in given data

AA-IV, B-II, C-I, D-III
BA-IV, B-I, C-II, D-III
CA-IV, B-III, C-II, D-I
DA-I, B-II, C-III, D-IV

Answer: (A) A-IV, B-II, C-I, D-III

Explanation

Matching statistical measures of dispersion and skewness with their mathematical foundations:

A-IV, B-II, C-I, D-III

A-IV (Dispersion — Amount of variation in given data) — Measures the extent of scatter or spread around a central measure.
B-II (Karl Pearson's measures of skewness — Based on relationship between averages) — Formulated on the divergence between mean, mode, and median.
C-I (Bowley's measures of skewness — Involving relationship between median and quartile) — Evaluates asymmetry based on quartile deviations ((Q3 + Q1 - 2*Median) / (Q3 - Q1)).
D-III (Kelly's measure of skewness — Using percentile) — Calculates skewness using 90th and 10th percentiles ((P90 + P10 - 2*P50) / (P90 - P10)).

Question 71

Match List I with List II.

List I — Ego Defence Mechanism	List II — Description
A. Projection	I. Returning to a previous stage of development
B. Regression	II. Acting out unacceptable impulses in a socially acceptable way
C. Repression	III. Placing unacceptable impulses in yourself onto someone else
D. Sublimation	IV. Pulling into the unconscious

AA-III, B-I, C-IV, D-II
BA-III, B-IV, C-I, D-II
CA-I, B-III, C-II, D-IV
DA-II, B-I, C-IV, D-III

Answer: (A) A-III, B-I, C-IV, D-II

Explanation

Matching Freudian ego defence mechanisms with their psychological descriptions:

A-III, B-I, C-IV, D-II

A-III (Projection — Placing unacceptable impulses onto someone else) — Attributing one's own repressed or unacceptable impulses to other people.
B-I (Regression — Returning to a previous stage of development) — Reverting to immature or childlike behavior when confronted with stress.
C-IV (Repression — Pulling into the unconscious) — Forcibly pushing painful or unacceptable thoughts out of conscious awareness.
D-II (Sublimation — Acting out unacceptable impulses in a socially acceptable way) — Channeling aggressive or inappropriate instinctual energies into constructive social activities.

Question 72
Match List I with List II.
List I List II
A. Role of Commercial Bank I. Help to consumers
B. NBFC service II. Mutual saving bank
C. Non-depository Institution III. Hire purchase
D. Depository Institution IV. Mutual fund
1. AA-II, B-I, C-III, D-IV
2. BA-I, B-III, C-IV, D-II
3. CA-IV, B-II, C-I, D-III
4. DA-III, B-IV, C-II, D-I
Answer: (B) A-I, B-III, C-IV, D-II
Explanation
Matching financial institutions and non-banking services with their characteristics:

A-I, B-III, C-IV, D-II

A-I (Role of Commercial Bank — Help to consumers) — Commercial banks provide vital consumer credit, retail banking services, and liquidity.

B-III (NBFC service — Hire purchase) — Non-banking financial companies specialize in hire purchase and asset financing.

C-IV (Non-depository Institution — Mutual fund) — Mutual funds mobilize investment pools without accepting checkable demand deposits.

D-II (Depository Institution — Mutual saving bank) — Depository institutions accept savings deposits from public members.
Sign in to read the full explanation

Question 73

Match List I with List II.

List I	List II
A. Value added by Channel Members-Low; Market Growth Rate-Low	I. Introductory stage
B. Value added by Channel Members-High; Market Growth Rate-Low	II. Growth stage
C. Value added by Channel Members-Low; Market Growth Rate-High	III. Mature stage
D. Value added by Channel Members-High; Market Growth Rate-High	IV. Decline stage

AA-I, B-IV, C-III, D-II
BA-II, B-I, C-III, D-IV
CA-IV, B-I, C-III, D-II
DA-III, B-I, C-IV, D-II

Answer: (C) A-IV, B-I, C-III, D-II

Explanation

Matching channel value addition and market growth rates across the Product Life Cycle:

A-IV, B-I, C-III, D-II

A-IV (Value added Low, Growth Low — Decline stage) — Declining products receive minimal intermediary investment and generate sluggish growth.
B-I (Value added High, Growth Low — Introductory stage) — Channel members invest substantial educational effort to launch novel products before rapid growth begins.
C-III (Value added Low, Growth High — Mature stage) — High volume market with standardized products requiring lower specialized channel service.
D-II (Value added High, Growth High — Growth stage) — Rapidly expanding demand supported by aggressive channel promotional push and customer support.

Question 74

Match List I with List II relating to The Sale of Goods Act.

List I	List II
A. Actionable claim	I. Goods to be manufactured after the making of the contract
B. Appropriation of goods	II. Goods owned by the seller at the time of the making of the contract of sale
C. Existing goods	III. Separating the goods sold from other goods so as to determine and identify the actual goods to be delivered
D. Future goods	IV. Recovered only by means of a suit or an action in a court of law

AA-III, B-I, C-IV, D-II
BA-I, B-II, C-III, D-IV
CA-II, B-IV, C-I, D-III
DA-IV, B-III, C-II, D-I

Answer: (D) A-IV, B-III, C-II, D-I

Explanation

Matching legal definitions under the Sale of Goods Act, 1930:

A-IV, B-III, C-II, D-I

A-IV (Actionable claim — Recovered only by means of a suit or action in court) — Choses in action or unsecured debts that can be enforced only through legal proceedings and are excluded from the definition of goods under Section 2(7).
B-III (Appropriation of goods — Separating goods sold from other goods) — Under Section 23, the act of identifying and segregating ascertained goods to transfer property to the buyer.
C-II (Existing goods — Owned by seller at time of making contract of sale) — Goods owned or possessed by the seller when entering the contract under Section 6(1).
D-I (Future goods — To be manufactured after making contract) — Defined under Section 2(6) as goods to be manufactured or acquired by the seller after entering into the contract.

Question 75

Match List I with List II.

List I	List II
A. Section 10 (1)	I. Amount received involuntary retirement
B. Section 10 (10 C )	II. Agricultural Income
C. Section 10 ( 13 A )	III. Leave Encashment
D. Section 10 ( 10 AA )	IV. House Rent Allowance

AA-II, B-I, C-IV, D-III
BA-II, B-I, C-III, D-IV
CA-IV, B-III, C-I, D-II
DA-IV, B-III, C-II, D-I

Answer: (A) A-II, B-I, C-IV, D-III

Explanation

Matching statutory exemptions under Section 10 of the Income-tax Act, 1961:

A-II, B-I, C-IV, D-III

A-II (Section 10(1) — Agricultural Income) — Wholly exempt from direct central income tax under constitutional provisions.
B-I (Section 10(10C) — Amount received on involuntary or voluntary retirement) — Exempts compensation received under voluntary retirement schemes up to statutory limits.
C-IV (Section 10(13A) — House Rent Allowance) — Provides exemption for HRA granted to meet residential rental expenditure.
D-III (Section 10(10AA) — Leave Encashment) — Exempts amounts received on encashment of earned leave upon retirement.

Question 76
Arrange the following levels of economic integration, from least integrated to the most integrated:

A. Customs Union
B. Free Trade Area
C. Economic Union
D. Common Market
E. Political Union

Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. AE, D, C, A, B
2. BB, A, D, C, E
3. CD, C, A, B, E
4. DA, B, C, D, E
Answer: (B) B, A, D, C, E
Explanation
Bela Balassa's classic hierarchy classifies regional economic integration according to depth of policy coordination.

B, A, D, C, E

B (Free Trade Area) — Eliminates internal tariff and quota barriers among member states while each maintains independent external tariffs.

A (Customs Union) — Adds a common external tariff schedule applied against non-member imports.

D (Common Market) — Permits the completely unrestricted movement of production factors including labor and capital.

C (Economic Union) — Harmonizes domestic fiscal, tax, and monetary policies alongside a shared market.

E (Political Union) — Unifies executive, judicial, and legislative governance under a single supranational sovereign body.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 77
Which of the following order is followed in the issue of shares under the "Fixed Price Offer Method"?

A. Issue of a prospectus
B. Receipt by the company of application for share
C. Selection of merchant banker
D. Issue of share certificates
E. Allotment of shares to the applicant

Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. AA, D, E, C, B
2. BC, B, A, D, E
3. CC, A, B, E, D
4. DE, B, A, C, D
Answer: (C) C, A, B, E, D
Explanation
The public issue of shares under the fixed price method follows a defined statutory sequence.

C, A, B, E, D

C (Selection of merchant banker) — Appointing lead managers to structure the offering and handle regulatory compliance.

A (Issue of a prospectus) — Registering and releasing the prospectus inviting the public to subscribe.

B (Receipt of application for share) — Collecting application forms along with subscription money through designated banks.

E (Allotment of shares to applicant) — Approving the allotment of shares in consultation with the stock exchange.

D (Issue of share certificates) — Despatching physical certificates or executing electronic dematerialized credits.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 78
Logically sequence the following steps in the managerial decision-making process:

A. Determining the objective
B. Selecting the best solution
C. Implementing the decision
D. Defining the problem
E. Identifing possible solutions

Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. AD, A, C, E, B
2. BD, A, E, B, C
3. CA, E, D, B, C
4. DA, E, B, C, D
Answer: (B) D, A, E, B, C
Explanation
Rational managerial decision-making progresses from diagnostic formulation to implementation.

D, A, E, B, C

D (Defining the problem) — Diagnosing and framing the core issue requiring resolution.

A (Determining the objective) — Setting desired performance benchmarks and decision criteria.

E (Identifying possible solutions) — Generating a wide set of viable strategic alternatives.

B (Selecting the best solution) — Evaluating choices against criteria to choose the optimal path.

C (Implementing the decision) — Translating the chosen alternative into operational actions and follow-up reviews.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 79
Arrange the following economic regions in increasing order of FDI inflows, as per the UNCTAD Report, 2020?

A. Developing economies
B. Transition economies
C. North America
D. Developed economies
E. Europe

Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. AB, A, C, E, D
2. BE, B, D, C, A
3. CB, A, D, E, C
4. DA, B, C, E, D
Answer: (A) B, A, C, E, D
Explanation
The UNCTAD World Investment Report 2020 tracks global foreign direct investment inflows across major economic groupings in increasing order.

B, A, C, E, D

B (Transition economies) — Lowest global aggregate FDI inflows among major regional groupings.

A (Developing economies) — Captured significant global FDI shares driven by developing Asia.

C (North America) — Substantial single-region inflows into the US and Canada.

E (Europe) — Large combined investment flows across European member economies.

D (Developed economies) — The largest broad macroeconomic grouping comprising all advanced economies.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 80
Arrange the following steps in the process of hypothesis testing in proper sequence:

A. Select the level of significance
B. Setup null and alternative hypothesis
C. Establish the decision rule
D. Performance computations
E. Select test statistics
F. Draw conclusion

Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. AA, B, C, D, E, F
2. BA, B, E, D, C, F
3. CB, A, C, D, E, F
4. DB, A, E, C, D, F
Answer: (D) B, A, E, C, D, F
Explanation
Hypothesis testing follows a strict sequential protocol to determine whether sample evidence rejects the null hypothesis.

B, A, E, C, D, F

B (Setup null and alternative hypothesis) — Explicitly state H0 and H1.

A (Select the level of significance) — Determine Type I error tolerance (α).

E (Select test statistics) — Choose the appropriate test distribution based on sample size and parameters.

C (Establish the decision rule) — Define critical values and rejection thresholds.

D (Performance computations) — Compute the test statistic from observed sample data.

F (Draw conclusion) — Compare computed statistic with critical value and make a formal decision.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 81
The characteristics of different levels of leaders are given below. Arrange these in an increasing order of levels:

A. He contributes to the achievement of group objectives and works effectively with others in a group
B. He builds enduring greatness through a paradoxical combination of professional will and personal humanity
C. He makes a productive contribution through talent, knowledge, skills, and good work habits
D. He catalyses commitment to and vigorous pursuit of a clear and compelling vision and stimulates the group to high-performance standards
E. He organises people and resources towards the effective and efficient pursuit of predetermined objectives

Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. AC, E, D, A, B
2. BA, E, D, B, C
3. CA, C, E, B, D
4. DC, A, E, D, B
Answer: (D) C, A, E, D, B
Explanation
Jim Collins' Level 5 Leadership framework ranks leadership capabilities across five ascending tiers.

C, A, E, D, B

C (Level 1: Highly Capable Individual) — Makes productive contributions through talent, knowledge, and discipline.

A (Level 2: Contributing Team Member) — Works effectively with peers to achieve group objectives.

E (Level 3: Competent Manager) — Organizes staff and resources efficiently toward predetermined goals.

D (Level 4: Effective Leader) — Catalyzes commitment to a compelling organizational vision.

B (Level 5: Executive) — Builds enduring corporate greatness through personal humility and professional willpower.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 82
Arrange the following steps in a logical sequence of the claim settlement procedure in the Insurance:

A. Scrutinisation
B. Investigation of an assessment
C. Claim form
D. Notice of loss
E. Settlement and Arbitration

Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. AA, B, C, D, E
2. BC, A, D, B, E
3. CC, B, A, E, D
4. DD, C, A, B, E
Answer: (D) D, C, A, B, E
Explanation
Processing insurance claims proceeds through established regulatory verification stages.

D, C, A, B, E

D (Notice of loss) — Prompt notification by the policyholder informing the insurer of an insured peril.

C (Claim form) — Delivery and formal completion of detailed claim documentation by the claimant.

A (Scrutinisation) — Internal policy review to confirm premium status, coverage validity, and term conditions.

B (Investigation of an assessment) — Survey by a licensed loss assessor to determine damage causes and quantum.

E (Settlement and Arbitration) — Formal payment disbursement or recourse to arbitration in disputed valuations.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 83
Arrange the steps of market segmentation process in the proper sequence:

A. Segment "Acid Test"
B. Segment Attractiveness
C. Need Based Segmentation
D. Segment Profitability and Segment Positioning
E. Segment Identification

Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. AC, E, B, D, A
2. BE, C, D, B, A
3. CA, E, C, D, B
4. DA, B, C, E, D
Answer: (A) C, E, B, D, A
Explanation
Roger Best's sequential market segmentation model structures customer analysis into five stages.

C, E, B, D, A

C (Need Based Segmentation) — Grouping buyers based on similar needs and benefits sought.

E (Segment Identification) — Establishing demographic and behavioral traits that distinguish each group.

B (Segment Attractiveness) — Assessing growth, competitive intensity, and market access metrics.

D (Segment Profitability and Segment Positioning) — Establishing financial returns and tailored positioning strategies.

A (Segment 'Acid Test') — Creating storyboard mockups to test consumer reactions before full commercial launch.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 84
Arrange in the sequence, steps in the procedure for calling a statutory meeting of the company:

A. Contents of the statutory report
B. A list of members must be produced at the commencement
C. Twenty-one days notice
D. Certification of the statutory report by not less than two directors, one of whom must be the managing director
E. A certified copy of the statutory report must be delivered to the Registrar

Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. AB, E, C, A, D
2. BA, D, E, B, C
3. CD, C, B, A, E
4. DC, A, D, E, B
Answer: (D) C, A, D, E, B
Explanation
The statutory meeting procedure for a public company follows statutory formalities leading up to the physical convention.

C, A, D, E, B

C (Twenty-one days notice) — Issuing formal advance meeting notice to all eligible shareholders.

A (Contents of the statutory report) — Drafting the comprehensive statutory disclosure report.

D (Certification of the statutory report) — Formal verification and signing by at least two directors including the MD.

E (Certified copy delivered to Registrar) — Registering the certified report with the Registrar of Companies.

B (List of members produced at commencement) — Laying the complete membership register before shareholders at the meeting opening.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 85
Arrange in sequence the steps in the procedure of e-filing of an Income Tax Return:

A. Login
B. Register
C. Verification
D. e-filing
E. Downloading utility and preparing the return

Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
1. AB, A, E, D, C
2. BA, B, C, D, E
3. CA, B, E, C, D
4. DA, B, C, E, D
Answer: (A) B, A, E, D, C
Explanation
Electronic return submission follows a structured workflow on the official tax portal.

B, A, E, D, C

B (Register) — Creating an assessee account on the income tax e-filing portal using PAN credentials.

A (Login) — Authenticating into the registered user dashboard.

E (Downloading utility and preparing the return) — Generating the return data via offline utility or online form.

D (e-filing) — Transmitting and uploading the finalized tax return data file.

C (Verification) — Completing return validation via Aadhaar OTP, net banking EVC, or signed physical ITR-V submission.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 86
Given below are two statements, one is labelled as Assertion A and the other is labelled as Reason (R):

Assertion (A): Quick ratio is a more penetrating test of liquidity than the current ratio, yet a high quick ratio does not necessarily imply sound liquidity.
Reason (R): A company with a high value of quick ratio can suffer from a shortage of funds if it has slow-paying, doubtful and long duration outstanding debtors.

In light of the statements, choose the correct answer:
1. ABoth A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A
2. BBoth A and R are correct but R is NOT the correct explanation of A
3. CA is correct but R is not correct
4. DA is not correct but R is correct
Answer: (A) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A
Explanation
Evaluating liquid asset quality demonstrates why quick ratios can misrepresent true immediate solvency.

Assertion A is correct — The quick ratio excludes less liquid inventory, providing a more rigorous measure of solvency, yet a high ratio can still mask cash shortages.

Reason R is correct — Quick assets include trade receivables, which fail to generate cash if debtors default, dispute billings, or delay payments beyond credit periods.

Reason R directly explains why Assertion A occurs, demonstrating that non-realizable receivables undermine the apparent solvency signaled by a high quick ratio.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 87
Given below are two statements, one is labelled as Assertion A and the other is labelled as Reason (R):

Assertion (A): Two companies with the same general earning power and same general position in an industry, the one paying larger dividend will almost always sell at a higher price.
Reason (R): The discounted value of near dividends is higher than the present worth of distant dividends.

In light of the statements, choose the correct answer:
1. ABoth A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A
2. BBoth A and R are correct but R is NOT the correct explanation of A
3. CA is correct but R is not correct
4. DA is not correct but R is correct
Answer: (A) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A
Explanation
Graham and Dodd's dividend model and Gordon's bird-in-the-hand theory explain investor preference for immediate payouts.

Assertion A is correct — Between two otherwise identical firms, empirical equity markets typically assign a price premium to the stock distributing higher current cash dividends.

Reason R is correct — Investors apply higher discount rates to uncertain distant capital gains and future earnings than to certain near-term dividends.

Reason R provides the exact behavioral valuation foundation justifying the higher share price identified in Assertion A.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 88
Given below are two statements:

Statement I: The aim of marketing is to make selling superfluous.
Statement II: Marketing should result in a customer who is ready to buy.

In light of the statements, choose the correct answer:
1. ABoth Statement I and Statement II are correct
2. BBoth Statement I and Statement II are incorrect
3. CStatement I is correct but Statement II is incorrect
4. DStatement I is incorrect but Statement II is correct
Answer: (A) Both Statement I and Statement II are correct
Explanation
Peter Drucker's fundamental marketing principle defines the ultimate purpose of customer orientation.

Statement I is correct — Drucker famously asserted that the overarching aim of marketing is to make aggressive selling superfluous by understanding customer needs thoroughly.

Statement II is correct — Effective marketing aligns product features, pricing, and communication so perfectly that the customer is primed and ready to purchase without high-pressure sales pitches.

Both statements accurately articulate this classic marketing management concept.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 89
Given below are two statements:

Statement I: patents are defined as monopoly rights which one granted by the government, for full disclosure of invention for a limited period of time, that is for 20 years.
Statement II: The purpose of granting patents is to encourage inventions by promoting their protection and utilization so as to contribute to the development of Industries.

In light of the statements, choose the correct answer:
1. ABoth Statement I and Statement II are correct
2. BBoth Statement I and Statement II are incorrect
3. CStatement I is correct but Statement II is incorrect
4. DStatement I is incorrect but Statement II is correct
Answer: (A) Both Statement I and Statement II are correct
Explanation
The statutory patent system balances exclusive inventor monopolies with societal technological advancement.

Statement I is correct — Under the Patents Act, 1970, a patent confers a statutory 20-year monopoly from the filing date in exchange for complete technical disclosure.

Statement II is correct — The policy objective of patent legislation is to stimulate inventive activity by protecting inventors while ensuring commercial exploitation for industrial progress.

Both statements represent accurate legal and economic principles of patent law.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 90
Given below are two statements:

Statement I: Assessee is always a person but a person may or may not be an assessee.
Statement II: The term 'person' includes an individual, a HUF, a company, a firm, an association of persons, local authority and every artificial juridical person.

In light of the statements, choose the correct answer:
1. ABoth Statement I and Statement II are correct
2. BBoth Statement I and Statement II are incorrect
3. CStatement I is correct but Statement II is incorrect
4. DStatement I is incorrect but Statement II is correct
Answer: (A) Both Statement I and Statement II are correct
Explanation
The Income-tax Act, 1961 distinguishes between legal entity status and tax liability status.

Statement I is correct — Under Section 2(7), an assessee is any person liable to pay taxes or against whom proceedings have been initiated. A person under Section 2(31) whose income falls below the taxable threshold is not an assessee.

Statement II is correct — Section 2(31) explicitly enumerates individuals, HUFs, companies, firms, AOPs, local authorities, and artificial juridical persons within the definition of person.

Both statements represent foundational principles of Indian direct taxation.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 91
What problem is highlighted in the passage?
For a developing economic nation, its industrial policy requires regular updation to meet the growing demands of the industry as well as to increase the share of manufacturing in overall GDP. As India's GDP has been dominated by services rather than agriculture or manufacturing, there are structural modifications always required so that manufacturing activity be increased substantially to meet the global market requirements. This requires legal amendments, with the new laws aimed to facilitate better manufacturing and exports.

Actually, India faces two challenges, rather opportunities that the bullishness on the Indian economy is to be export-oriented as well as to feed its ever-growing domestic consumption. Also, no economy can only be consumption oriented as its people should also save and invest actively. This brings to an important direction of banking system which plays a critically important role in achieving the above two objectives. The public sector banks require to build on to the capabilities and expertise on the due diligence methods for the credit appraisal for the loan requirements. Worth mentioning here is the data that the non-performing assets valuing Rs. 7.7 lakh crore (as on December 2017) as per the latest figures of the Finance Ministry. Nevertheless, given their large structure and geographic percolation, the public sector banks must be recognized in India's development and that there is "no country in the world where banks have not had a problem."
1. ALow growth in GDP
2. BBalance of payments issue
3. CHigh fiscal deficit
4. DRole of banking sector
Answer: (D) Role of banking sector
Explanation
The passage centers on the pivotal role and structural stresses of the public sector banking system in supporting India's economic growth.

A. Low growth in GDP — The passage discusses opportunities and economic bullishness rather than diagnosing low GDP growth.

B. Balance of payments issue — External trade challenges are mentioned in passing without being framed as a balance of payments crisis.

C. High fiscal deficit — Fiscal deficit figures are not analyzed in the text.

D. Role of banking sector — correct. The narrative explicitly underscores the critical role of public sector banks, citing Rs. 7.7 lakh crore in non-performing assets and the need for stronger credit due diligence.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 92
Which of the following is not a feature of the consumption economy?
For a developing economic nation, its industrial policy requires regular updation to meet the growing demands of the industry as well as to increase the share of manufacturing in overall GDP. As India's GDP has been dominated by services rather than agriculture or manufacturing, there are structural modifications always required so that manufacturing activity be increased substantially to meet the global market requirements. This requires legal amendments, with the new laws aimed to facilitate better manufacturing and exports.

Actually, India faces two challenges, rather opportunities that the bullishness on the Indian economy is to be export-oriented as well as to feed its ever-growing domestic consumption. Also, no economy can only be consumption oriented as its people should also save and invest actively. This brings to an important direction of banking system which plays a critically important role in achieving the above two objectives. The public sector banks require to build on to the capabilities and expertise on the due diligence methods for the credit appraisal for the loan requirements. Worth mentioning here is the data that the non-performing assets valuing Rs. 7.7 lakh crore (as on December 2017) as per the latest figures of the Finance Ministry. Nevertheless, given their large structure and geographic percolation, the public sector banks must be recognized in India's development and that there is "no country in the world where banks have not had a problem."
1. AIncreasing population with increasing consumption
2. BMore contribution to indirect taxes
3. CIt also prompts more exports than imports
4. DThe unsold goods create problems
Answer: (C) It also prompts more exports than imports
Explanation
A consumption-driven economy primarily absorbs domestic production and stimulates import demand rather than creating an export surplus.

A. Increasing population with increasing consumption — A standard structural trait of consumption-oriented economic demographics.

B. More contribution to indirect taxes — Heavy retail purchasing directly fuels value-added and goods-and-services tax collections.

C. It also prompts more exports than imports — correct (statement is false). Expanding domestic consumption absorbs goods domestically and pulls in foreign imports, conflicting with export-surplus conditions.

D. The unsold goods create problems — Cyclical demand dips in consumption economies quickly leave retail inventories unsold and stall production.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 93
Which of the following set defines Sustainable Consumption and Production (SCP)?

A. The use of services and related products which respond to basic needs and bring a better quality of life
B. Minimizing the use of natural resources and toxic materials as well as the emission of waste as pollutants
C. Pertinent use of service or product so as not to jeopardise the needs of future generations
D. Planned cities with a lower cost of production minimizing the retail inflation

Choose the correct answer from the options:
For a developing economic nation, its industrial policy requires regular updation to meet the growing demands of the industry as well as to increase the share of manufacturing in overall GDP. As India's GDP has been dominated by services rather than agriculture or manufacturing, there are structural modifications always required so that manufacturing activity be increased substantially to meet the global market requirements. This requires legal amendments, with the new laws aimed to facilitate better manufacturing and exports.

Actually, India faces two challenges, rather opportunities that the bullishness on the Indian economy is to be export-oriented as well as to feed its ever-growing domestic consumption. Also, no economy can only be consumption oriented as its people should also save and invest actively. This brings to an important direction of banking system which plays a critically important role in achieving the above two objectives. The public sector banks require to build on to the capabilities and expertise on the due diligence methods for the credit appraisal for the loan requirements. Worth mentioning here is the data that the non-performing assets valuing Rs. 7.7 lakh crore (as on December 2017) as per the latest figures of the Finance Ministry. Nevertheless, given their large structure and geographic percolation, the public sector banks must be recognized in India's development and that there is "no country in the world where banks have not had a problem."
1. AA, B and D only
2. BB, C and D only
3. CA, B and C only
4. DA, B, C and D
Answer: (C) A, B and C only
Explanation
The official United Nations definition of Sustainable Consumption and Production establishes three core environmental principles.

A. Meeting basic needs and improving quality of life — The primary social development dimension of sustainable consumption.

B. Minimizing resource extraction, toxic inputs, and pollutant emissions — The essential ecological efficiency requirement over the product life cycle.

C. Protecting the needs of future generations — The foundational intergenerational equity principle of sustainability.

D. Planned cities minimizing retail inflation — An urban economic planning goal unrelated to the formal definition of SCP.

Thus, statements A, B, and C only define Sustainable Consumption and Production.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 94
The credit appraisal process by a bank does NOT involve evaluation if the borrower on:
For a developing economic nation, its industrial policy requires regular updation to meet the growing demands of the industry as well as to increase the share of manufacturing in overall GDP. As India's GDP has been dominated by services rather than agriculture or manufacturing, there are structural modifications always required so that manufacturing activity be increased substantially to meet the global market requirements. This requires legal amendments, with the new laws aimed to facilitate better manufacturing and exports.

Actually, India faces two challenges, rather opportunities that the bullishness on the Indian economy is to be export-oriented as well as to feed its ever-growing domestic consumption. Also, no economy can only be consumption oriented as its people should also save and invest actively. This brings to an important direction of banking system which plays a critically important role in achieving the above two objectives. The public sector banks require to build on to the capabilities and expertise on the due diligence methods for the credit appraisal for the loan requirements. Worth mentioning here is the data that the non-performing assets valuing Rs. 7.7 lakh crore (as on December 2017) as per the latest figures of the Finance Ministry. Nevertheless, given their large structure and geographic percolation, the public sector banks must be recognized in India's development and that there is "no country in the world where banks have not had a problem."
1. ATechnical feasibility
2. BEconomic viability
3. CBank ability or credit worthiness
4. DLoan offtakes and paying ability of related companies in the geographical area
Answer: (D) Loan offtakes and paying ability of related companies in the geographical area
Explanation
Credit appraisal assesses the viability of the borrower and their specific funded project rather than regional competitors.

A. Technical feasibility — Evaluates technology, production inputs, and engineering viability of the applicant's project.

B. Economic viability — Assesses market demand, cost structures, and cash flow adequacy of the borrower.

C. Bank ability or credit worthiness — Investigates the integrity, track record, and financial repayment capacity of the applicant.

D. Loan offtakes and paying ability of related companies in the geographical area — correct. Third-party lending activities across a geographic area are not part of an individual borrower's credit underwriting.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 95
The Indian banking sector requires that it:
For a developing economic nation, its industrial policy requires regular updation to meet the growing demands of the industry as well as to increase the share of manufacturing in overall GDP. As India's GDP has been dominated by services rather than agriculture or manufacturing, there are structural modifications always required so that manufacturing activity be increased substantially to meet the global market requirements. This requires legal amendments, with the new laws aimed to facilitate better manufacturing and exports.

Actually, India faces two challenges, rather opportunities that the bullishness on the Indian economy is to be export-oriented as well as to feed its ever-growing domestic consumption. Also, no economy can only be consumption oriented as its people should also save and invest actively. This brings to an important direction of banking system which plays a critically important role in achieving the above two objectives. The public sector banks require to build on to the capabilities and expertise on the due diligence methods for the credit appraisal for the loan requirements. Worth mentioning here is the data that the non-performing assets valuing Rs. 7.7 lakh crore (as on December 2017) as per the latest figures of the Finance Ministry. Nevertheless, given their large structure and geographic percolation, the public sector banks must be recognized in India's development and that there is "no country in the world where banks have not had a problem."
1. Abuild more manpower and ICT resources
2. Bbe more technology dependent
3. Cevaluate loan disbursals
4. Dincrease the frequency of change of the bank rates
Answer: (C) evaluate loan disbursals
Explanation
The passage explicitly stresses the necessity of rigorous credit appraisal and thorough loan assessment to control non-performing assets.

A. build more manpower and ICT resources — General infrastructure enhancements not highlighted as the central operational reform in the text.

B. be more technology dependent — The passage focuses on due diligence and appraisal quality rather than sheer tech reliance.

C. evaluate loan disbursals — correct. The author notes that public sector banks require enhanced expertise in due diligence methods for credit appraisal and loan allocations.

D. increase the frequency of change of the bank rates — A monetary policy function of the central bank rather than a commercial banking operational requirement.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 96
Which could be a suitable title for the passage?
The Economic Survey cautions against extended forbearance of credit default, drawing the lessons that extended forbearance in the wake of the 2007-08 global financial crisis led to the build-up of bad loans and dragged down investment rates and economic growth.

If followed through, this would mean a major squeeze on company finances, as they scramble for resources to service loans to avoid bankruptcy, and a big demand on the government to recapitalize the banks it owns, after they recognize and provide for a mass of bad loans

Regulatory forbearance must be an emergency medicine, not a staple diet, is sound advice. A moratorium by banks on debt service by borrowers has been a part of the COVID cushioning to corporates. Many of these firms would face acute liquidity problems when the moratorium ends

Fast growth that embraces all businesses would avert a crisis. Such Goldilocks perfection rarely materializes in real life. many companies that could survive with access to liquidity could go under when banks think it is time to do their asset quality reviews. The solution is to provide such companies with capital that does not need to be serviced when they do not make a profit on equity

Companies would need a whole lot of capital, to service existing loans and to invest in new production, to cater to the demand thrown up by economic revival. The government had promised a fund to funds that would mobilize large volumes of capital to invest in micro, small and medium enterprises.

This is the time to walk the talk. The equity stakes can be sold later, hopefully at a profit. Special situation funds, private equity, and allocations from retirement savings can be tapped for the needed capital. Managing the investment is the challenge.
1. AForbearance and Corporate Funding in Crisis Times
2. BFunding during crisis
3. CBad loans and Indian corporates
4. DFunding crisis and COVID-19
Answer: (A) Forbearance and Corporate Funding in Crisis Times
Explanation
A comprehensive title must encapsulate both the analysis of credit default forbearance and the proposed corporate financing solutions.

A. Forbearance and Corporate Funding in Crisis Times — correct. Directly unites the two central themes: caution against extended forbearance and mechanisms for providing equity capital.

B. Funding during crisis — Overly broad and misses the analytical focus on credit default forbearance.

C. Bad loans and Indian corporates — Fails to reflect the proposed solutions regarding equity funding and special situation funds.

D. Funding crisis and COVID-19 — Overly narrow because the text uses the 2007-08 financial crisis alongside COVID-19 to extract enduring economic lessons.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 97
What is the theme of the passage?
The Economic Survey cautions against extended forbearance of credit default, drawing the lessons that extended forbearance in the wake of the 2007-08 global financial crisis led to the build-up of bad loans and dragged down investment rates and economic growth.

If followed through, this would mean a major squeeze on company finances, as they scramble for resources to service loans to avoid bankruptcy, and a big demand on the government to recapitalize the banks it owns, after they recognize and provide for a mass of bad loans

Regulatory forbearance must be an emergency medicine, not a staple diet, is sound advice. A moratorium by banks on debt service by borrowers has been a part of the COVID cushioning to corporates. Many of these firms would face acute liquidity problems when the moratorium ends

Fast growth that embraces all businesses would avert a crisis. Such Goldilocks perfection rarely materializes in real life. many companies that could survive with access to liquidity could go under when banks think it is time to do their asset quality reviews. The solution is to provide such companies with capital that does not need to be serviced when they do not make a profit on equity

Companies would need a whole lot of capital, to service existing loans and to invest in new production, to cater to the demand thrown up by economic revival. The government had promised a fund to funds that would mobilize large volumes of capital to invest in micro, small and medium enterprises.

This is the time to walk the talk. The equity stakes can be sold later, hopefully at a profit. Special situation funds, private equity, and allocations from retirement savings can be tapped for the needed capital. Managing the investment is the challenge.
1. ACrisis of corporate funding during crisis times
2. BForbearance of credit default
3. CLiquidity and survival of companies
4. DMoratorium by banks on debt service
Answer: (B) Forbearance of credit default
Explanation
The core argument of the passage explores the perils and appropriate boundaries of credit default forbearance.

A. Crisis of corporate funding during crisis times — A consequence resulting from forbearance termination rather than the central conceptual theme.

B. Forbearance of credit default — correct. The passage opens with Economic Survey cautions against forbearance, analyzes its hazards, and treats it as an emergency medicine.

C. Liquidity and survival of companies — A secondary corporate concern resulting from the expiry of debt moratoriums.

D. Moratorium by banks on debt service — A single temporary manifestation of forbearance cited as an illustrative example.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 98
Assertion (A): The government had promised a fund of funds that would mobilize large volumes of capital to invest in micro, small and medium enterprises.
Reason (R): Companies would need a whole lot of capital, to service existing loans and to invest in new production, to cater to the demand thrown up by economic revival.
The Economic Survey cautions against extended forbearance of credit default, drawing the lessons that extended forbearance in the wake of the 2007-08 global financial crisis led to the build-up of bad loans and dragged down investment rates and economic growth.

If followed through, this would mean a major squeeze on company finances, as they scramble for resources to service loans to avoid bankruptcy, and a big demand on the government to recapitalize the banks it owns, after they recognize and provide for a mass of bad loans

Regulatory forbearance must be an emergency medicine, not a staple diet, is sound advice. A moratorium by banks on debt service by borrowers has been a part of the COVID cushioning to corporates. Many of these firms would face acute liquidity problems when the moratorium ends

Fast growth that embraces all businesses would avert a crisis. Such Goldilocks perfection rarely materializes in real life. many companies that could survive with access to liquidity could go under when banks think it is time to do their asset quality reviews. The solution is to provide such companies with capital that does not need to be serviced when they do not make a profit on equity

Companies would need a whole lot of capital, to service existing loans and to invest in new production, to cater to the demand thrown up by economic revival. The government had promised a fund to funds that would mobilize large volumes of capital to invest in micro, small and medium enterprises.

This is the time to walk the talk. The equity stakes can be sold later, hopefully at a profit. Special situation funds, private equity, and allocations from retirement savings can be tapped for the needed capital. Managing the investment is the challenge.
1. ABoth A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A
2. BBoth A and R are correct but R is NOT the correct explanation of A
3. CA is correct but R is not correct
4. DA is not correct but R is correct
Answer: (A) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A
Explanation
Evaluating the relationship between corporate capital requirements and government fund-of-funds initiatives:

Assertion A is correct — The passage explicitly states that the government promised a fund of funds to mobilize large volumes of capital for MSMEs.

Reason R is correct — The passage affirms that enterprises require substantial capital to service outstanding debt and fund new production during economic recovery.

Reason R provides the explicit commercial rationale for Assertion A, explaining why the state established the fund of funds to support undercapitalized enterprises.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 99
Statement I: Forbearance of credit default is a common phenomenon in Indian banking system.
Statement II: Global financial crisis influences the quantum of bad loans in India.
The Economic Survey cautions against extended forbearance of credit default, drawing the lessons that extended forbearance in the wake of the 2007-08 global financial crisis led to the build-up of bad loans and dragged down investment rates and economic growth.

If followed through, this would mean a major squeeze on company finances, as they scramble for resources to service loans to avoid bankruptcy, and a big demand on the government to recapitalize the banks it owns, after they recognize and provide for a mass of bad loans

Regulatory forbearance must be an emergency medicine, not a staple diet, is sound advice. A moratorium by banks on debt service by borrowers has been a part of the COVID cushioning to corporates. Many of these firms would face acute liquidity problems when the moratorium ends

Fast growth that embraces all businesses would avert a crisis. Such Goldilocks perfection rarely materializes in real life. many companies that could survive with access to liquidity could go under when banks think it is time to do their asset quality reviews. The solution is to provide such companies with capital that does not need to be serviced when they do not make a profit on equity

Companies would need a whole lot of capital, to service existing loans and to invest in new production, to cater to the demand thrown up by economic revival. The government had promised a fund to funds that would mobilize large volumes of capital to invest in micro, small and medium enterprises.

This is the time to walk the talk. The equity stakes can be sold later, hopefully at a profit. Special situation funds, private equity, and allocations from retirement savings can be tapped for the needed capital. Managing the investment is the challenge.
1. ABoth statement I and statement II are true
2. BBoth statement I and statement II are false
3. CStatement I is true but statement II is false
4. DStatement I is false but statement II is true
Answer: (A) Both statement I and statement II are true
Explanation
Evaluating macroeconomic statements on banking forbearance and crisis transmission:

Statement I is true — Regulatory forbearance has been repeatedly employed as a recurring policy cushion in Indian banking across major economic downturns.

Statement II is true — The passage notes that extended forbearance following the 2007-08 global financial crisis directly triggered a massive accumulation of non-performing loans in India.

Both statements accurately describe real-world banking conditions documented in the passage.
Sign in to read the full explanation
Question 100
Assertion (A): A moratorium by banks on debt service by borrowers has been a part of the COVID cushioning to corporates.
Reason (R): Regulatory forbearance must be an emergency medicine but not a staple diet.
The Economic Survey cautions against extended forbearance of credit default, drawing the lessons that extended forbearance in the wake of the 2007-08 global financial crisis led to the build-up of bad loans and dragged down investment rates and economic growth.

If followed through, this would mean a major squeeze on company finances, as they scramble for resources to service loans to avoid bankruptcy, and a big demand on the government to recapitalize the banks it owns, after they recognize and provide for a mass of bad loans

Regulatory forbearance must be an emergency medicine, not a staple diet, is sound advice. A moratorium by banks on debt service by borrowers has been a part of the COVID cushioning to corporates. Many of these firms would face acute liquidity problems when the moratorium ends

Fast growth that embraces all businesses would avert a crisis. Such Goldilocks perfection rarely materializes in real life. many companies that could survive with access to liquidity could go under when banks think it is time to do their asset quality reviews. The solution is to provide such companies with capital that does not need to be serviced when they do not make a profit on equity

Companies would need a whole lot of capital, to service existing loans and to invest in new production, to cater to the demand thrown up by economic revival. The government had promised a fund to funds that would mobilize large volumes of capital to invest in micro, small and medium enterprises.

This is the time to walk the talk. The equity stakes can be sold later, hopefully at a profit. Special situation funds, private equity, and allocations from retirement savings can be tapped for the needed capital. Managing the investment is the challenge.
1. ABoth A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A
2. BBoth A and R are correct but R is NOT the correct explanation of A
3. CA is correct but R is not correct
4. DA is not correct but R is correct
Answer: (B) Both A and R are correct but R is NOT the correct explanation of A
Explanation
Evaluating assertion and reason statements derived from the Economic Survey passage:

Assertion A is correct — The passage explicitly affirms that bank debt service moratoriums were granted to cushion corporate borrowers during the pandemic.

Reason R is correct — The passage affirms the Economic Survey maxim that regulatory forbearance should serve strictly as an emergency intervention rather than permanent policy.

While both statements are factually accurate, Reason R acts as a cautionary policy principle rather than explaining why the moratorium was implemented as relief in Assertion A.
Sign in to read the full explanation

Attempt Paper 2 — Commerce · November 26, 2021 · Shift 1 as a timed test

Spotted a shift or questions missing from this paper?

Frequently asked questions

How many questions were in the UGC NET Commerce November 2021 exam?

Paper 1 had 150 questions and Paper 2 (Commerce) had 300 questions, for 450 in total across 3 hours.

Is there negative marking in UGC NET?

No. Each correct answer earns 2 marks and there is no penalty for a wrong answer, so leaving a question blank is never better than attempting it.

Are the November 2021 answers on this page official?

Answers follow the official NTA answer key for this session. If you spot a discrepancy, use the report option inside the practice test and we will review it.

Can I attempt the November 2021 paper as a timed mock test?

Yes. Every paper on this page has an "Attempt this paper" button that opens the same questions in the timed test interface, with instant scoring and weak-area analysis afterwards.

Want the full mock experience?

Attempt Paper 1 + Paper 2 (Commerce) together in a single timed session.

Full Mock Tests →

More Commerce practice

All 2021 sessions All Commerce PYQs Commerce topic-wise practice Paper 1 topic-wise practice

Practice Paper 1 from other subjects

Every subject's exam sitting has its own Paper 1 (General Aptitude) set — more real PYQs to solve.

Paper 1 · English Literature sittings Paper 1 · Economics sittings Paper 1 · Computer Science & Applications sittings Paper 1 · Management sittings

Year	Salary	Travel	Hospitality	Interest on Loans	Taxes
2016	330	70	30	28	80
2017	380	65	33	31	87
2018	420	72	35	33	91
2019	450	75	40	36	94
2020	480	84	43	39	97

List I	List II
(a) Insurance Act	(i) 1988
(b) Life Insurance Act	(ii) 1963
(c) Motor Vehicle Act	(iii) 1938
(d) Marine Insurance Act	(iv) 1956

Item	Budget	Actual (in a particular month)
No. of working days	25	27
Production (in units)	20,000	22,000
Fixed overhead (in ₹)	30,000	31,000

List I	List II
a. Hedgers	i. Osaka
b. Financial derivatives in India	ii. Increased volatility
c. Arbitrageurs	iii. Commercial procedures
d. Commodity future in origin	iv. Riskless profit

Country	2017 I	2017 E	2018 I	2018 E	2019 I	2019 E	2020 I	2020 E
P	25	30	24	32	28	36	22	32
Q	28	26	26	31	29	37	26	34
R	24	32	28	25	32	36	28	34
S	22	28	18	28	16	21	23	32
T	26	31	16	33	12	23	21	28

Country	2017 I	2017 E	2018 I	2018 E	2019 I	2019 E	2020 I	2020 E
P	25	30	24	32	28	36	22	32
Q	28	26	26	31	29	37	26	34
R	24	32	28	25	32	36	28	34
S	22	28	18	28	16	21	23	32
T	26	31	16	33	12	23	21	28

Country	2017 I	2017 E	2018 I	2018 E	2019 I	2019 E	2020 I	2020 E
P	25	30	24	32	28	36	22	32
Q	28	26	26	31	29	37	26	34
R	24	32	28	25	32	36	28	34
S	22	28	18	28	16	21	23	32
T	26	31	16	33	12	23	21	28

Country	2017 I	2017 E	2018 I	2018 E	2019 I	2019 E	2020 I	2020 E
P	25	30	24	32	28	36	22	32
Q	28	26	26	31	29	37	26	34
R	24	32	28	25	32	36	28	34
S	22	28	18	28	16	21	23	32
T	26	31	16	33	12	23	21	28

Country	2017 I	2017 E	2018 I	2018 E	2019 I	2019 E	2020 I	2020 E
P	25	30	24	32	28	36	22	32
Q	28	26	26	31	29	37	26	34
R	24	32	28	25	32	36	28	34
S	22	28	18	28	16	21	23	32
T	26	31	16	33	12	23	21	28

List I (I/O device)	List II (Data transfer rate)
A. Disk	I. 50 bps
B. Mouse	II. 1 Mbps
C. Laser printer	III. 120 bps
D. Keyboard	IV. 100 Mbps

Organisation	Percentage (%) of employees	Ratio of Male and Female employees
A	18%	3 : 7
B	22%	11 : 9
C	31%	3 : 2
D	15%	2 : 3
E	14%	1 : 3

Organisation	Percentage (%) of employees	Ratio of Male and Female employees
A	18%	3 : 7
B	22%	11 : 9
C	31%	3 : 2
D	15%	2 : 3
E	14%	1 : 3

Organisation	Percentage (%) of employees	Ratio of Male and Female employees
A	18%	3 : 7
B	22%	11 : 9
C	31%	3 : 2
D	15%	2 : 3
E	14%	1 : 3

Organisation	Percentage (%) of employees	Ratio of Male and Female employees
A	18%	3 : 7
B	22%	11 : 9
C	31%	3 : 2
D	15%	2 : 3
E	14%	1 : 3

Country	2017 I	2017 E	2018 I	2018 E	2019 I	2019 E	2020 I	2020 E
P	25	30	24	32	28	36	22	32
Q	28	26	26	31	29	37	26	34
R	24	32	28	25	32	36	28	34
S	22	28	18	28	16	21	23	32
T	26	31	16	33	12	23	21	28

Country	2017 I	2017 E	2018 I	2018 E	2019 I	2019 E	2020 I	2020 E
P	25	30	24	32	28	36	22	32
Q	28	26	26	31	29	37	26	34
R	24	32	28	25	32	36	28	34
S	22	28	18	28	16	21	23	32
T	26	31	16	33	12	23	21	28

Country	2017 I	2017 E	2018 I	2018 E	2019 I	2019 E	2020 I	2020 E
P	25	30	24	32	28	36	22	32
Q	28	26	26	31	29	37	26	34
R	24	32	28	25	32	36	28	34
S	22	28	18	28	16	21	23	32
T	26	31	16	33	12	23	21	28

Country	2017 I	2017 E	2018 I	2018 E	2019 I	2019 E	2020 I	2020 E
P	25	30	24	32	28	36	22	32
Q	28	26	26	31	29	37	26	34
R	24	32	28	25	32	36	28	34
S	22	28	18	28	16	21	23	32
T	26	31	16	33	12	23	21	28

Country	2017 I	2017 E	2018 I	2018 E	2019 I	2019 E	2020 I	2020 E
P	25	30	24	32	28	36	22	32
Q	28	26	26	31	29	37	26	34
R	24	32	28	25	32	36	28	34
S	22	28	18	28	16	21	23	32
T	26	31	16	33	12	23	21	28

List I — Events	List II — Year
A. Bretton Woods Conference	I. 1948
B. GATT established	II. 1974
C. Multi-fibre Agreement	III. 1944
D. WTO replaced GATT	IV. 1995

List I	List II
A. Role of Commercial Bank	I. Help to consumers
B. NBFC service	II. Mutual saving bank
C. Non-depository Institution	III. Hire purchase
D. Depository Institution	IV. Mutual fund

UGC NET Commerce November 2021 Question PaperPaper 1 & Paper 2 with Answer Key

UGC NET November 2021 at a glance

General Aptitude

Commerce

General Aptitude

Commerce

General Aptitude

Commerce

Paper 1 — General Aptitude · November 25, 2021 · Shift 1

Question 1

Question 2

Question 3

Question 4

Question 5

Question 6

Question 7

Question 8

Question 9

Question 10

Question 11

Question 12

Question 13

Question 14

Question 15

Question 16

Question 17

Question 18

Question 19

Question 20

Question 21

Question 22

Question 23

Question 24

Question 25

Question 26

Question 27

Question 28

Question 29

Question 30

Question 31

Question 32

Question 33

Question 34

Question 35

Question 36

Question 37

Question 38

Question 39

Question 40

Question 41

Question 42

Question 43

Question 44

Question 45

Question 46

Question 47

Question 48

Question 49

Question 50

Paper 2 — Commerce · November 25, 2021 · Shift 1

Question 1

Question 2

Question 3

Question 4

Question 5

Question 6

Question 7

Question 8

Question 9

Question 10

Question 11

Question 12

Question 13

Question 14

Question 15

Question 16

Question 17

Question 18

Question 19

Question 20

Country	2017 I	2017 E	2018 I	2018 E	2019 I	2019 E	2020 I	2020 E
P	25	30	24	32	28	36	22	32
Q	28	26	26	31	29	37	26	34
R	24	32	28	25	32	36	28	34
S	22	28	18	28	16	21	23	32
T	26	31	16	33	12	23	21	28

Country	2017 I	2017 E	2018 I	2018 E	2019 I	2019 E	2020 I	2020 E
P	25	30	24	32	28	36	22	32
Q	28	26	26	31	29	37	26	34
R	24	32	28	25	32	36	28	34
S	22	28	18	28	16	21	23	32
T	26	31	16	33	12	23	21	28

Country	2017 I	2017 E	2018 I	2018 E	2019 I	2019 E	2020 I	2020 E
P	25	30	24	32	28	36	22	32
Q	28	26	26	31	29	37	26	34
R	24	32	28	25	32	36	28	34
S	22	28	18	28	16	21	23	32
T	26	31	16	33	12	23	21	28

Country	2017 I	2017 E	2018 I	2018 E	2019 I	2019 E	2020 I	2020 E
P	25	30	24	32	28	36	22	32
Q	28	26	26	31	29	37	26	34
R	24	32	28	25	32	36	28	34
S	22	28	18	28	16	21	23	32
T	26	31	16	33	12	23	21	28

Country	2017 I	2017 E	2018 I	2018 E	2019 I	2019 E	2020 I	2020 E
P	25	30	24	32	28	36	22	32
Q	28	26	26	31	29	37	26	34
R	24	32	28	25	32	36	28	34
S	22	28	18	28	16	21	23	32
T	26	31	16	33	12	23	21	28